ASME NM.

2-2022
(Revision of ASME NM.2-2020)

Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin
Piping Systems
ASME Standards for Nonmetallic
Pressure Piping Systems

AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD

Two Park Avenue • New York, NY • 10016 USA

x
 Date of Issuance: January 31, 2023

The next edition of this Standard is scheduled for publication in 2024. This Standard will become effective 6 months after the
Date of Issuance.

This code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National Standards. The
standards committee that approved the code or standard was balanced to ensure that individuals from competent and
concerned interests had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public
review and comment, which provided an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies,
and the public-at-large.

ASME does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity. ASME does not
take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any items mentioned in this
document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for infringement of any applicable
letters patent, nor does ASME assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly advised that determination of
the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility.

Participation by federal agency representatives or persons affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as government or
industry endorsement of this code or standard.

ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME
procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.

The endnotes and preamble in this document (if any) are part of this American National Standard.

ASME Collective Membership Mark

“ASME” and the above ASME symbol are registered trademarks of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990

Copyright © 2023 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
 CONTENTS

Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Committee Roster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Correspondence With the NPPS Committee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Chapter 1 Scope and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1-1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-2 Terms and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-3 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chapter 2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2-1 Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2-2 Design Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2-3 Pressure Design of Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2-4 Pipe Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-5 Piping Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2-6 Special Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 3 Constituent Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3-2 Materials and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3-3 Temperature Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Chapter 4 Standards for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4-1 Dimensions and Ratings of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4-2 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4-3 Quality Assurance and Conformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Chapter 5 Fabrication, Assembly, and Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5-2 Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5-3 Assembly and Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 6 Inspection, Examination, and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6-1 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6-2 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6-3 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6-4 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Mandatory Appendices
I Design of Integral Flat-Face Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
II Calculation of Physical and Mechanical Properties Using the Laminate Analysis Method . 64
III Stress Intensification Factors, Flexibility Factors, and Pressure Stress Multipliers . . . . . 80

iii
IV Specification for 55-deg Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin Pipe 86
V Inspections and Testing of Reinforcement Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
VI Examination and Testing Requirements for Vinyl Ester Resin, Polyester Resin, and Additive
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Nonmandatory Appendices
A Pipe Support Calculations and Simplified Stress Analysis for FRP Piping System Design . 108
B Alternative Testing Grips and Brackets (Modification to ASTM D2105) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
C Guidance on Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Figures
2-2.3.1-1 Allowable Stress Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2-3.3.1-1 Nomenclature for Smooth Radius Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2-3.3.2-1 Nomenclature for Mitered Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2-3.4.1-1 Detail for Fabricated Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2-3.4.3-1 Detail for Integrally Molded Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2-3.5.1-1 Knuckle Reinforcement for Torispherical Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5-2.5.2-1 Adhesive Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5-2.5.3-1 Wrapped Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5-3.1.2.1-1 Assembly Tolerances and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5-3.1.2.4-1 Flange Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
I-2.3-1 Typical Flange Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
I-3.3-1 Design of Flat-Face Integral Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
I-3.3-2 Values of V (Integral Flange Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
I-3.3-3 Values of F (Integral Flange Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
I-3.3-4 Values of f (Hub Stress Correction Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
I-3.3-5 Values of T, U, Y, and Z (Terms Involving K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
II-2-1 Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
II-4-1 In-Place Force Resultants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
II-4-2 Moment Resultants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
II-4-3 Notations for Ply Positions and Laminate Stacking Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
A-5-1 Example Problem Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
B-1-1 Alternative Testing Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Tables
2-2.3.6-1 Component Sizes Qualified by Proof-of-Design Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3-2.1-1 Listed Constituent Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3-3.1-1 Temperature Limits for Acceptable Polymeric Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4-1.1-1 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4-1.1-2 Test Methods and Other Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4-1.1-3 Procurement Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4-3.2-1 Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6-2.2.2-1 Acceptance Criteria for Bonds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
I-3.3-1 Flange Factors in Formula Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
A-3.1-1 Guidance to Span Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

iv
Forms
V-2.2-1 Veil and Mat Reinforcement Log Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
V-3.2-1 Roving Reinforcement Log Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
V-4.2-1 Fabric Reinforcement Log Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
V-5.2-1 Milled Fiber Reinforcement Log Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
VI-6-1 Resin Log Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
VI-6-2 Curing Agent Log Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
VI-7.2-1 Common Additives Log Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

v
 FOREWORD

In 2011, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) established the Committee on Nonmetallic Pressure
Piping Systems (NPPS) to develop standards for the construction of nonmetallic pressure piping systems. This Commit-
tee’s goal was to specify construction* requirements for nonmetallic piping and piping products; such requirements were
not adequately defined in existing standards.
Prior to the development of the ASME Standards for Nonmetallic Pressure Piping Systems, nonmetallic pressure piping
requirements were contained within several existing standards. The nonmetallic piping requirements of the ASME B31
Code for Pressure Piping varied across Sections, with some Sections having no requirements for nonmetallic components
at all. Other standards and codes, such as ASME RTP-1 and the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section X,
included requirements for reinforced thermoset plastic (RTP) corrosion-resistant equipment but not for piping and
piping components. ASME BPVC, Section III did have a few Code Cases that addressed requirements for some nonmetallic
piping and piping components, including those made from glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting resin and a few thermo-
plastics, e.g., high-density polyethylene (HDPE) and poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC). However, the scope of these Code Cases
was very limited, and in some cases the methodology was nearly 30 years old. The ASME NPPS Standards now serve as a
centralized location for NPPS requirements and are developed by committees whose members are experts in this field.
The NPPS Committee’s functions are to establish requirements related to pressure integrity for the construction of
nonmetallic pressure piping systems, and to interpret these requirements when questions arise regarding their intent.
ASME NM.2 provides requirements for construction of FRP piping and piping components. This Standard addresses
pipe and piping components that are produced as standard products, and custom products that are designed for a specific
application. ASME NM.2-2018 (first edition) was approved by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) on
August 13, 2018.
ASME NM.2-2020 included revisions to Mandatory Appendix II that added example calculations, cautionary notes, and
methods to compute classical lamination theory (CTE) of lamina and laminates. Additionally, Nonmandatory Appendix A
was reorganized and revised, and section A-5 was added. Section A-5 includes a simplified stress analysis of a sample
pipeline and illustrates the application of the design approach, equations, and physical properties of ASME NM-2 piping
systems. Further, ASME NM.2-2020 revised and clarified figures, definitions, and nomenclature for ASME NM-2 piping
systems.
ASME NM.2-2022 has been retitled “Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin Piping Systems.” The scope has been
revised to include piping systems made of fiber-reinforced thermosetting resin (rather than specifically glass-fiber-
reinforced thermosetting resin) or dual laminate. Various equations and variables have been revised to clarify meaning.
Following approval by the ASME NPPS Standards Committee, ASME NM.2-2022 was approved by the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) on December 5, 2022.

* Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, erection, examination, inspection, testing,
and overpressure protection.

vi
 ASME NPPS COMMITTEE
Nonmetallic Pressure Piping Systems
(The following is the roster of the Committee at the time of approval of this Standard.)

STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

C. Henley, Chair
D. McGriff, Vice Chair
C. Ramcharran, Secretary

STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

R. Appleby, Consultant D. McGriff, ISCO Industries, Inc.
B. R. Colley, INEOS Composites T. Musto, Sargent and Lundy, LLC
R. Davis, Consultant C. Ramcharran, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
C. Davison, NUPI Americas C. W. Rowley, The Wesley Corp.
J. Eisenman, Maverick Applied Science, Inc. L. G. Vetter, Sargent and Lundy, LLC
M. Engelkemier, Cargill V. D. Holohan, Contributing Member, U.S. Department of Transporta-
B. Hebb, RPS Composites, Inc. tion — Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration
C. Henley, Kiewitt Engineering Group, Inc. D. L. Keeler, Contributing Member, Dow Chemical Co.
L. Hutton, Plasticwelding, LLC W. Lundy, Contributing Member, U.S. Coast Guard

SUBCOMMITTEE ON FIBER-REINFORCED THERMOSETTING-RESIN PIPING (SC-FRP)

J. Eisenman, Chair, Maverick Applied Science, Inc. C. W. Rowley, The Wesley Corp.
B. Hebb, Vice Chair, RPS Composites, Inc. R. J. Vatovec, Design Engineering, Pressure Vessels, Piping and Tanks,
A. Carrion, Secretary, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers Metal and FRP
J. L. Bustillos, Bustillos and Associates, LLC H. T. Wells, Albemarle Corp.
B. R. Colley, INEOS Composites W. Britt, Jr., Contributing Member, Britt Engineering
T. W. Cowley, FRP Consulting, LLC H. L. Gower, Contributing Member, Shell Projects and Technology
R. Crawford, Consultant L. E. Hunt, Contributing Member, L. E. Hunt and Associates, LLC
R. Davis, Consultant D. L. Keeler, Contributing Member, Dow Chemical Co.
M. Engelkemier, Cargill F. Z. Krmpotich, Contributing Member, Retired
P. K. Gilbert, NOV Fiber Glass Systems C. Moore, Contributing Member, NOV Fiber Glass Systems
T. E. Haber, Maverick Applied Science, Inc. B. Shelley, Contributing Member, Consultant
C. Henley, Kiewit Engineering Group, Inc. Z. Siveski, Contributing Member, Bechtel Infrastructure and Power
D. H. McCauley, The Chemours Co. F. Worth, Contributing Member, Air Logistics, FACS Division
D. Mikulec, Maverick Applied Science, Inc.

SC-FRP SUBGROUP ON DESIGN

D. Mikulec, Chair, Maverick Applied Science, Inc. D. H. McCauley, The Chemours Co.
A. Bausman, VSP Technologies G. L. Patrick, Sr., Belding Tank Technologies
T. Chen, The Chemours Co. B. F. Shelley, Consultant
P. W. Craven, Composites USA R. J. Vatovec, Design Engineering, Pressure Vessels, Piping and Tanks,
D. Diehl, Retired Metal and FRP
J. Eisenman, Maverick Applied Science, Inc. R. Wacker, Inertech, Inc.
M. Engelkemier, Cargill S. L. Wagner, Finite Composites Consulting, LLC
B. Hebb, RPS Composites, Inc. W. Britt, Jr., Contributing Member, Britt Engineering
R. A. Johnson, Russcor Engineering, Inc. D. L. Keeler, Contributing Member, Dow Chemical Co.
J. L. Kendall, RPS Composites, Inc.

vii
 SC-FRP SUBGROUP ON FABRICATION AND EXAMINATION
T. E. Haber, Chair, Maverick Applied Science, Inc. D. Naugle, Composites USA
A. K. Yuen, Vice Chair, Fiber Glass Systems, LLC J. R. Richter, SENCON, Sentinel Consulting, LLC
M. S. Brown, Industrial Plastic Systems Z. Siveski, Bechtel Infrastructure and Power
T. W. Cowley, FRP Consulting, LLC H. T. Wells, Albermarle Corp.
R. Crawford, Consultant E. Wesson, AOC Resins
W. Daugherty, Beetle Plastics, LLC R. Moubarac, Contributing Member, Consultant

NPPS NM-2-FRP AND NM-3-NMM SUBGROUP ON MATERIALS

P. K. Gilbert, Chair, NOV Fiber Glass Systems R. Davis, Consultant
G. A. Van Beek, Vice Chair, Southern Company Services B. L. Hutton, Lubrizol
M. Beneteau, Owens Corning J. Ness, AOC, LLC
D. S. Brown, Interplastic Corp. D. Olson, Daniel Co.
J. L. Bustillos, Bustillos and Associates, LLC C. W. Rowley, The Wesley Corp.
B. R. Colley, INEOS Composites K. Wachholder, Consultant
L. J. Craigie, Consultant L. E. Hunt, Contributing Member, L. E. Hunt and Associates, LLC

viii
 CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE NPPS COMMITTEE

General. ASME codes and standards are developed and maintained by committees with the intent to represent the
consensus of concerned interests. Users of ASME codes and standards may correspond with the committees to propose
revisions or cases, report errata, or request interpretations. Correspondence for this Standard should be sent to the staff
secretary noted on the committee’s web page, accessible at http://go.asme.org/NPPScommittee.

Revisions and Errata. The committee processes revisions to this Standard on a continuous basis to incorporate
changes that appear necessary or desirable as demonstrated by the experience gained from the application of the Stan-
dard. Approved revisions will be published in the next edition of the Standard.
In addition, the committee may post errata on the committee web page. Errata become effective on the date posted.
Users can register on the committee web page to receive e-mail notifications of posted errata.
This Standard is always open for comment, and the committee welcomes proposals for revisions. Such proposals
should be as specific as possible, citing the paragraph number(s), the proposed wording, and a detailed description of the
reasons for the proposal, including any pertinent background information and supporting documentation.

Cases
(a) The most common applications for cases are
(1) to permit early implementation of a revision based on an urgent need
(2) to provide alternative requirements
(3) to allow users to gain experience with alternative or potential additional requirements prior to incorporation
directly into the Standard
(4) to permit the use of a new material or process
(b) Users are cautioned that not all jurisdictions or owners automatically accept cases. Cases are not to be considered
as approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the
freedom of manufacturers, constructors, or owners to choose any method of design or any form of construction that
conforms to the Standard.
(c) A proposed case shall be written as a question and reply in the same format as existing cases. The proposal shall also
include the following information:
(1) a statement of need and background information
(2) the urgency of the case (e.g., the case concerns a project that is underway or imminent)
(3) the Standard and the paragraph, figure, or table number(s)
(4) the edition(s) of the Standard to which the proposed case applies
(d) A case is effective for use when the public review process has been completed and it is approved by the cognizant
supervisory board. Approved cases are posted on the committee web page.

Interpretations. Upon request, the committee will issue an interpretation of any requirement of this Standard. An
interpretation can be issued only in response to a request submitted through the online Interpretation Submittal Form at
http://go.asme.org/InterpretationRequest. Upon submitting the form, the inquirer will receive an automatic e-mail
confirming receipt.
ASME does not act as a consultant for specific engineering problems or for the general application or understanding of
the Standard requirements. If, based on the information submitted, it is the opinion of the committee that the inquirer
should seek assistance, the request will be returned with the recommendation that such assistance be obtained. Inquirers
can track the status of their requests at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations.
ASME procedures provide for reconsideration of any interpretation when or if additional information that might affect
an interpretation is available. Further, persons aggrieved by an interpretation may appeal to the cognizant ASME
committee or subcommittee. ASME does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary
device, or activity.
Interpretations are published in the ASME Interpretations Database at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations as they are
issued.

ix
 Committee Meetings. The NPPS Standards Committee regularly holds meetings that are open to the public. Persons
wishing to attend any meeting should contact the secretary of the committee. Information on future committee meetings
can be found on the committee web page at http://go.asme.org/NPPScommittee.

x
 INTRODUCTION

The ASME Standards for Nonmetallic Pressure Piping Systems (NPPS) are as follows:
NM.1 Thermoplastic Piping Systems: This Standard contains requirements for piping and piping components that are
produced using thermoplastic resins or compounds. Thermoplastics are a specific group of nonmetallic
materials that, for processing purposes, are capable of being repeatedly softened by increase of temperature and
hardened by decrease of temperature.
NM.2 Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin Piping Systems: This Standard contains requirements for piping and
piping components that are produced using fiber reinforcement embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin.
NM.3 Nonmetallic Materials: This Standard includes specifications for nonmetallic materials (except wood, nonfibrous
glass, and concrete) and, in conformance with the requirements of the individual construction standards,
methodologies, design values, limits, and cautions on the use of materials. This Standard is divided into three
Parts:
– NM.3.1, Nonmetallic Materials, Part 1 —Thermoplastic Material Specifications: This Part contains thermoplastic
material specifications identical to or similar to those published by the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM International) and other recognized national or international organizations.
– NM.3.2, Nonmetallic Materials, Part 2 — Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Material Specifications: This Part contains
reinforced thermoset plastic material specifications identical to or similar to those published by ASTM and other
recognized national or international organizations.
– NM.3.3, Nonmetallic Materials, Part 3 — Properties: This Part provides tables and data sheets for allowable
stresses, mechanical properties (e.g., tensile and yield strength), and physical properties (e.g., coefficient of
thermal expansion and modulus of elasticity) for nonmetallic materials.

It is the owner’s responsibility to select the piping standard that best applies to the proposed piping installation. Factors
to be considered by the owner include limitations of the standard, jurisdictional requirements, and the applicability of
other standards. All applicable requirements of the selected standard shall be met. For some installations, more than one
standard may apply to different parts of the installation. The owner is also responsible for imposing requirements
supplementary to those of the standard if such requirements are necessary to ensure safe piping for the proposed
installation.
Certain piping within a facility may be subject to other codes and standards, including but not limited to the following:
ASME B31.1, Power Piping: This code contains requirements for piping typically found in electric power generating
stations, industrial and institutional plants, geothermal heating systems, and central and district heating and cooling
systems.
ASME B31.3, Process Piping: This code contains requirements for piping typically found in petroleum refineries; onshore
and offshore petroleum and natural gas production facilities; chemical, pharmaceutical, textile, paper, ore-processing,
semiconductor, and cryogenic plants; food- and beverage-processing facilities; and related processing plants and
terminals.
ASME B31.4, Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquids and Slurries: This code contains requirements for piping
transporting products that are predominately liquid between plants and terminals, and within terminals and pumping,
regulating, and metering stations.
ASME B31.5, Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components: This code contains requirements for piping for
refrigerants and secondary coolants.
ASME B31.8, Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems: This code contains requirements for piping transporting
products that are predominately gas between sources and terminals, including compressor, regulating, and metering
stations; and gas gathering pipelines.
ASME B31.9, Building Services Piping: This code contains requirements for piping typically found in industrial,
institutional, commercial, and public buildings, and in multi-unit residences, which does not require the range of sizes,
pressures, and temperatures covered in ASME B31.1.

xi
ASME B31.12, Hydrogen Piping and Pipelines: This code contains requirements for piping in gaseous and liquid hydrogen
service, and pipelines in gaseous hydrogen service.
National Fuel Gas Code: This code contains requirements for piping for fuel gas from the point of delivery to the
connection of each fuel utilization device.
NFPA 99, Health Care Facilities: This standard contains requirements for medical and laboratory gas systems.
NFPA Fire Protection Standards: These standards contain requirements for fire protection systems using water, carbon
dioxide, halon, foam, dry chemicals, and wet chemicals.

The ASME NPPS Standards specify engineering requirements deemed necessary for safe design and construction of
nonmetallic pressure piping. These Standards contain mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmanda-
tory guidance for construction activities. These Standards do not address all aspects of these activities, and those aspects
that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. While safety is the overriding consideration, this
factor alone will not necessarily govern the final specifications for any piping installation. With few exceptions, the
requirements do not, of practical necessity, reflect the likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service
related to specific service fluids or external operating environments. These Standards are not design handbooks.
Many decisions that must be made to produce a safe piping installation are not specified in detail within these Standards.
These Standards do not serve as substitutes for sound engineering judgment by the owner and the designer. The phrase
engineering judgment refers to technical judgments made by knowledgeable designers experienced in the application of
these Standards. Engineering judgments must be consistent with the philosophy of these Standards, and such judgments
must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or specific prohibitions of these Standards.
To the greatest possible extent, Standard requirements for design are stated in terms of basic design principles and
formulas. These are supplemented as necessary with specific requirements to ensure uniform application of principles
and to guide selection and application of piping elements. These Standards prohibit designs and practices known to be
unsafe and contain warnings where caution, but not prohibition, is warranted.
These Standards generally specify a simplified approach for many of their requirements. A designer may choose to use a
more rigorous analysis to develop design and construction requirements. When the designer decides to take this
approach, he or she shall provide to the owner details and calculations demonstrating that design, fabrication, exam-
ination, inspection, testing, and overpressure protection are consistent with the criteria of these Standards. These details
shall be adequate for the owner to verify the validity of the approach and shall be approved by the owner. The details shall
be documented in the engineering design.
The designer is responsible for complying with requirements of these Standards and demonstrating compliance with
the equations of these Standards when such equations are mandatory. These Standards neither require nor prohibit the
use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the requirements of these Standards. However,
designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cautioned that they are responsible for all
technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and for the application of these programs to their design.
These Standards do not fully address tolerances. When dimensions, sizes, or other parameters are not specified with
tolerances, the values of these parameters are considered nominal, and allowable tolerances or local variances may be
considered acceptable when based on engineering judgment and standard practices as determined by the designer.
Suggested requirements of good practice are provided for the care and inspection of in-service nonmetallic pressure
piping systems only as an aid to owners and their inspectors.
The requirements of these Standards are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any proprie-
tary or specific design or as limiting in any way the manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method of design or any form of
construction that conforms to the requirements of these Standards.
It is intended that editions of the ASME NPPS Standards not be retroactive. Unless agreement is specifically made
between contracting parties to use another edition, or the regulatory body having jurisdiction imposes the use of another
edition, the latest edition issued at least 6 months prior to the original contract date for the first phase of activity covering a
piping installation shall be the governing document for all design, materials, fabrication, erection, examination, inspec-
tion, testing, and overpressure protection for the piping until the completion of the work and initial operation. Revisions
to material specifications included in ASME NM.3.1 and ASME NM.3.2 are originated by ASTM and other recognized
national or international organizations, and are usually adopted by ASME. However, those revisions do not necessarily
indicate that materials produced to earlier editions of specifications are no longer suitable for ASME construction. Both
ASME NM.3.1 and ASME NM.3.2 include a Mandatory Appendix, “Guideline on Acceptable ASTM Editions,” that lists the
latest edition of material specifications adopted by ASME as well as other editions considered by ASME to be identical for
ASME construction.
Users of these Standards are cautioned against making use of revisions to these Standards without assurance that they
are acceptable to the proper authorities in the jurisdiction where the piping is to be installed.

xii
 ASME NM.2-2022
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Following approval by the ASME NPPS Committee and ASME, and after public review, ASME NM.2-2022 was approved by
the American National Standards Institute on December 5, 2022.

In ASME NM.2-2022, the word “Glass” has been deleted from the title. In addition, ASME NM.2-2022 includes the following
changes identified by a margin note, (22).

Page Location Change

1 1-1 Revised
12 2-3.2.2 Equation (2-3-2) and nomenclature revised
13 2-3.2.3 (1) Equations (2-3-3) through (2-3-5) and nomenclature revised
(2) In eq. (2-3-5) nomenclature, exponent “3/4” in equation for Zp
corrected by errata to “3/2”
14 2-3.3.1 Equation (2-3-6) and nomenclature revised
14 2-3.3.2 Equations (2-3-9) through (2-3-11) and nomenclature revised
15 2-3.4.1 (1) Definitions of Ep, SOL, and SUP revised
(2) Definition of S deleted
18 2-3.4.3 Equation (2-3-18) revised
18 2-3.5.1 Equations (2-3-22) through (2-3-24) and nomenclature revised
20 2-3.6.2 Equation (2-3-25) nomenclature revised
21 2-3.8.2 Subparagraph (a) revised
24 2-4.4.4 Revised
35 Table 4-1.1-2 Updated
37 Table 4-3.2-1 Entry for “Edge exposure” revised
41 5-2.5.1 Subparagraph (a) revised
43 5-3.2 Last sentence added
51 6-3.3.3 Subparagraph (b)(1) revised
55 I-3.3 In subpara. (d), equations editorially renumbered
101 VI-2 Former para. VI-2.1 deleted and subsequent paragraphs
redesignated

xiii
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

xiv
 ASME NM.2-2022

Chapter 1
Scope and Definitions

ð22Þ 1-1 SCOPE (e) products with fiber-reinforcement materials that

are not made from glass
(a) This Standard provides requirements for the (f) nonmetallic pressure vessels, valves, and specialty
design, materials, manufacture, fabrication, installation, components covered by other ASME codes and standards,
examination, and testing of fiber-reinforced thermoset- such as ASME BPVC, Section X and ASME RTP-1
ting-resin (FRP) and dual laminate piping systems. (g) piping for which the maximum internal pressure
(b) FRP and dual laminate piping, as used in this Stan- exceeds 1 700 kPa (250 psi)
dard, includes pipe, flanges, bolting, gaskets, valves, (h) piping for which the algebraic product of internal
fittings, special connecting components, and the pres- pressure [in kilopascals gauge (pounds per square inch
sure-containing or pressure-retaining portions of other gauge)] and internal diameter [in meters (inches)]
piping components, whether manufactured in accordance exceeds 1 262 kPag·m (7,200 psig·in.)
with references cited in this Standard or specially (i) piping used as ductwork conveying air or other
designed. It also includes hangers and supports and gases at pressures within 6.89 kPag (1 psig) of the pres-
other items necessary to prevent overstressing the pres- sure of the surrounding atmosphere
sure-containing components.

1-1.1 Content and Coverage 1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

Commonly used terms relating to FRP piping are
(a) This Standard addresses pipe and piping compo-
defined below. Some terms are defined with specific refer-
nents that are produced as standard products, as well
ence to piping. The definitions generally agree with those
as custom products that are designed for a specific appli-
in ASME BPVC, Section X; ASME RTP-1; ASTM D883; and
cation. It covers FRP pipe and piping components manu-
ASTM F412. Definitions taken unchanged from other stan-
factured by contact molding, centrifugal casting, filament
dards are indicated by a footnote.
winding, and other methods. Its intent is to provide a
uniform set of requirements for FRP pipe and piping adhesive: a material designed to join together two other
components that can be adopted by reference in the component materials by surface attachment (bonding).
various piping codes, including sections of the ASME adhesive joint: a bonded joint made using an adhesive on
B31 Code for Pressure Piping. This Standard is published the surfaces to be joined.
as a separate document to reduce duplication between
assembly: synonymous with fabrication.
piping codes.
(b) Requirements of this Standard apply to FRP piping binder1: in a reinforced plastic, the continuous phase that
systems typically used within the scope of the various holds together the reinforcement.
sections of the ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping bloom1: a visible exudation or efflorescence on the surface
(ASME B31.1, ASME B31.3, ASME B31.4, ASME B31.5, of a material.
ASME B31.8, and ASME B31.9) and selected piping
bonder2: one who performs a manual or semiautomatic
systems designed to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
bonding operation.
Vessel Code (BPVC), Section III, Division 1, Subsection ND.
bonding procedure2: the detailed methods and practices
1-1.2 Exclusions involved in the production of a bonded joint.
This Standard does not provide requirements for the Bonding Procedure Specification (BPS): a document
following: providing in detail the required variables and procedures
(a) metallic pipe for the bonding process to ensure repeatability in the
(b) thermoplastics, ceramics, and other nonmetallic bonding procedure.
materials used to fabricate pipe and piping components
(c) dual laminate construction that combines thermo-
plastic linings with FRP pipe and fittings 1
This definition is from ASTM D883.
(d) reinforced polymer mortar pipe 2
This definition is from ASME B31.3.

1
 ASME NM.2-2022

butt-and-wrapped joint: a bonded joint made by applying diluent4: a reactive or nonreactive modifying material,
plies of reinforcement saturated with resin to the surfaces usually liquid, that reduces the concentration of a resin
to be joined. material to facilitate handling characteristics and
chalking1: (plastics) a powdery residue on the surface of a improve wetting.
material resulting from degradation or migration of an erection: the installation of piping components and piping
ingredient, or both. subassemblies into an entire piping system in its final
chopped roving: a collection of noncontinuous glass installed location, including supports and other acces-
strands gathered without mechanical twist. Each sories as designated by the engineering design.
strand is made up of glass filaments bonded together extrados: the outside bend radius of an elbow.
with a finish or size for application by chopper gun. fabrication: the process of preparing and joining two or
chopped-strand mat3: reinforcement made from randomly more manufactured components into piping subassem-
oriented glass strands that are held together in mat form blies by processes such as bonding and bolting.
using a binder. Each strand has a sizing. fiberglass pipe: a tubular product containing glass-fiber
composite1: a solid product consisting of two or more reinforcement embedded in or surrounded by cured ther-
distinct phases, including a binding material (matrix) mosetting resin; the composite structure may contain
and a particulate or fibrous reinforcement material. thixotropic agents, pigments, or dyes; thermosetting
continuous roving: a collection of continuous glass strands liners or coatings may be included.
wound into a cylindrical package without mechanical fire-retardant resin4: a specially compounded material
twist. combined with a resin material designed to reduce the
corrosion barrier: a thermosetting, resin-rich internal or tendency to burn.
external layer that inhibits penetration of corrosive flexibilizer: a modifying liquid material added to a resinous
chemicals to the structural layers of the laminate, inhibits mixture designed to make the finished component flexible,
erosion, and prevents leakage under strain. This layer is bendable, or less rigid.
typically reinforced with a glass or synthetic veil and one hydrostatic design basis (HDB): a hoop stress developed for
or more layers of chopped-strand mat. fiberglass pipe in accordance with ASTM D2992 practice
creep: the time-dependent part of strain resulting from and multiplied by a service (design) factor to obtain a
stress. hydrostatic design stress. The HDB is the long-term hydro-
cure: to change the properties of a polymeric system into a static strength determined in accordance with ASTM
more stable, usable condition by the use of heat, radiation, D2992 that allows the long-term hydrostatic strength
or reaction with chemical additives. to be obtained on a cyclic stress (Procedure A) or constant
stress (Procedure B) basis.
cure time: the period of time that a reacting thermosetting
material is exposed to specific conditions to reach a speci- hydrostatic design pressure (HDP) 5 : the estimated
fied property level. maximum internal hydrostatic pressure that can be
applied cyclically (Procedure A) or continuously (Proce-
curing agent: a reactive material that when combined with dure B) to a piping component with a high degree of
a resin material initiates polymerization or reacts with a certainty that failure of the component will not occur.
resin to polymerize the resin; also referred to as a hard-
ener. hydrostatic design stress (HDS): the estimated maximum
tensile stress in the wall of the pipe in the hoop direction
cyclic long-term hydrostatic pressure: the estimated due to internal hydrostatic pressure, as calculated per
internal pressure of the piping product that, when ASTM D2992, that can be applied cyclically (Procedure
applied cyclically in accordance with ASTM D2992, Proce- A) or continuously (Procedure B) with a high degree
dure A, will cause failure of the product after a specified of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur. This
number of cycles. The cyclic rate, specified number of stress is usually established by applying an appropriate
cycles, and extrapolation of failure results out to the speci- service (design) factor to the hydrostatic design basis.
fied number of cycles are the same as for the cyclic long-
term hydrostatic strength. intrados: the inside bend radius of an elbow.

cyclic long-term hydrostatic strength: the hoop stress that, knuckle area: in reinforced plastics, the area of transition
when applied cyclically at 25 cycles/min, is calculated to between sections of different geometry.
cause the failure of the pipe in a selected number of cycles. laminate1: a product made by bonding together two or
more layers of material or materials. There are three
types, as follows:

3 4
This definition is from ASME RTP-1. This definition is from ASME B31.1.
5
This definition is from ASTM D2992.

2
 ASME NM.2-2022

(a) Type I. See ASME NM.3.2, SC-582. (b) structural attachments: structural attachments
(b) Type II. See ASME NM.3.2, SC-582. include elements that are bonded, bolted, or clamped
(c) Type III. See Mandatory Appendix IV. to the pipe, such as clips, lugs, rings, clamps, clevises,
lay1: straps, and stanchions.
(a) the length of twist produced by stranding filaments, pressure design basis (PDB): an internal pressure devel-
such as fibers, wires, or roving; length of twist of a filament oped for a fiberglass piping product and multiplied by
is usually measured as the distance parallel to the axis of a service (design) factor to obtain a hydrostatic design
the strand between successive turns of the filament. pressure. The PDB is the long-term hydrostatic pressure
(b) the angle that such filaments make with the axis of determined in accordance with ASTM D2992; ASTM
the strand during a stranding operation. D2992 allows the long-term hydrostatic pressure to be
lay up1: in reinforced plastics, to assemble layers of resin- obtained on a cyclic stress (Procedure A) or constant
impregnated material for processing. stress (Procedure B) basis.

lay-up1: in reinforced plastics, an assembly of layers of pressure rating (PR): the estimated maximum pressure in
resin-impregnated material ready for processing. a piping component that can be exerted continuously with
a high degree of certainty that failure of the piping compo-
NOTE: Within this Standard, the noun “lay-up” is hyphenated to
nent will not occur.
differentiate it from the verb “lay up.”
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR): a record of the
listed components: piping components manufactured in bonding data used to bond a test piece. The PQR is a
accordance with the specifications listed in Table 4-1.1-1. record of variables recorded during the bonding of the
long-term hydrostatic pressure (LTHP): the estimated test pieces. It also contains the test results of the
internal pressure of the piping product that, when tested specimens. Recorded variables normally fall
applied continuously in accordance with ASTM D2992, within a small range of the actual variables that will
Procedure B, will cause failure of the product after a speci- be used in production bonding.
fied number of hours. The specified number of hours and reinforced thermoset resin pipe: a term used synonymously
the extrapolation of failure results out to the specified with FRP pipe.
number of hours are the same as for the long–term hydro-
reinforcement3: glass fibers having the form of chopped
static strength.
roving, continuous roving, fabric, or chopped-strand
long-term hydrostatic strength (LTHS): the hoop stress mat. These fibers are added to the resin matrix to
that when applied continuously is calculated to cause strengthen and improve the properties of the resin.
the failure of the pipe in a specified number of hours,
resin3: the matrix of the laminate.
as set by the product standard. These strengths are
usually obtained by extrapolation of log–log regression restrained piping system: a piping system or portion
equations or plots of actual failure times for a range of thereof that includes no changes in direction and is
stresses out to the selected interval. restrained from axial movement.
lower deviated value (LDV): the test mean value less two service (design) factor: a number not greater than 1.0 that
standard deviations [see para. 2-2.3.3(c)]. is multiplied by the long-term hydrostatic strength (or
long-term hydrostatic pressure) to obtain the hydrostatic
may: used to denote permission; neither a requirement
design stress (or hydrostatic design pressure). The factor
nor a recommendation.
may vary depending on the service conditions, hazard,
manufacturing: the production of piping components by length of service desired, and properties of the pipe.
combining constituent materials using processes such as
shall: "shall" or "shall not" is used to indicate that a provi-
contact molding, filament winding, compression molding,
sion or prohibition is mandatory.
and centrifugal casting.
short-term hydrostatic strength (STHS): the lower deviated
pipe-supporting elements: pipe-supporting elements
value (LDV) of the tensile strength of the pipe in the hoop
consist of fixtures and structural attachments as follows:
direction when the pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM
(a) fixtures: fixtures include elements that transfer the
D1599 [see para. 2-2.3.3(c)].
load from the pipe or structural attachment to the
supporting structure, tank, vessel, or equipment. They should: "should" or "it is recommended" is used to indicate
include hanging-type fixtures, such as hanger rods, that a provision is not mandatory but recommended as
spring hangers, sway braces, turnbuckles, struts, good practice.
guides, and anchors; and bearing-type fixtures, such as stiffness factor4: the measurement of a pipe’s ability to
saddles, bases, brackets, and sliding supports. resist deflection, as determined in accordance with
ASTM D2412.

3
 ASME NM.2-2022

supporting structures (not covered by this Standard): struc- woven roving: a glass-fiber fabric-reinforcing material
tures that permit the transfer of piping forces through made by the weaving of glass-fiber roving.
pipe-supporting elements. They consist of
(a) independent structures: free-standing structures 1-3 ABBREVIATIONS
include T-poles, frames, bents attached to grade.
(b) building or nonbuilding structures, tanks, vessels, The following abbreviations may be used in this Stan-
and equipment: these structures can be made of concrete, dard to replace lengthy phrases in the text:
steel, or other materials.
(c) auxiliary steel: this includes brackets, beams, or
frames welded or bolted to building or nonbuilding struc- Abbreviation Term
tures, tanks, vessels, or equipment. BPS [Note (1)] Bonding Procedure Specification
surfacing veil: a thin mat of fine fibers used primarily to EP [Note (2)] Epoxy, epoxide
produce a smooth surface on a reinforced plastic. FF [Note (2)] Furan-formaldehyde resin
thermoset resin: a plastic that, after having been cured by FRP Fiber-reinforced thermosetting resin
heat or other means, is substantially infusible and insol- HDB [Note (3)] Hydrostatic design basis
uble. HDP [Note (3)] Hydrostatic design pressure
LDV Lower deviated value
thermosetting: capable of being changed into a substan-
tially infusible or insoluble product when cured by heat or HDS [Note (4)] Hydrostatic design strength
other means. LTHP [Note (3)] Long-term hydrostatic pressure
LTHS [Note (4)] Long-term hydrostatic strength
thixotropic agent: a material added to resin to impart high
PDB [Note (4)] Pressure design basis
static shear strength (viscosity) while retaining the resin’s
low dynamic shear strength. PQR [Note (1)] Procedure Qualification Record
RTP [Note (5)] Reinforced thermoset plastic
trim piping: piping that is attached to vessels or equip-
RTR Reinforced thermoset resin
ment, such as, but not limited to, overflows, vents, and
STHS Short-term hydrostatic strength
drains.
NOTES:
ultraviolet absorber: a material that when combined in a (1) Abbreviation is in accordance with ASME B31.3.
resin mixture will selectively absorb ultraviolet radiation. (2) Abbreviation is in accordance with ASTM D1600.
unlisted components: piping components not manufac- (3) Abbreviation is in accordance with ASTM D2992.
(4) Abbreviation is in accordance with ASTM F412.
tured in accordance with the specifications listed in
(5) Abbreviation is in accordance with ASME RTP-1.
Table 4-1.1-1.

4
 ASME NM.2-2022

Chapter 2
Design

2-1 DESIGN CONDITIONS (c) When a pipe is separated into individualized pres-
sure-containing chambers (jacketed piping, blanks, etc.),
This section states the qualifications of the designer; the partition wall shall be designed on the basis of the most
defines the pressures, temperatures, and forces applicable severe coincident temperature (minimum or maximum)
to the design of piping; and states the considerations to be and differential pressure between the adjoining chambers
given to various effects and their consequent loadings. See expected during service, except as provided in
also section 2-6. para. 2-2.2.3.
2-1.1 Qualifications of the Designer 2-1.2.2 Required Pressure Containment or Relief
The designer is the person in charge of the engineering (a) Provision shall be made to safely contain or relieve
design of a piping system. The designer shall be experi- any expected pressure to which the piping may be
enced in the design of FRP piping systems and in the use of subjected. Piping that is not protected by a pressure-
this Standard. The designer shall meet at least one of the relieving device or that can be isolated from a pres-
following qualifications: sure-relieving device shall be designed for at least the
(a) completion of an engineering degree, accredited by highest pressure that can be developed.
an independent agency such as the Accreditation Board (b) Sources of pressure to be considered include
for Engineering and Technology (ABET), requiring the ambient influences, pressure oscillations and surges,
equivalent of at least 4 yr of study that provides exposure decomposition of unstable fluids, static head, and
to fundamental subject matter relevant to the design of failure of control devices.
piping systems, plus a minimum of 5 yr of experience (c) The allowances of para. 2-2.2.3(d) shall be
in the design of related pressure piping permitted, provided that the other requirements of
(b) professional engineering registration, recognized para. 2-2.2.3 are also met.
by the local jurisdiction, and at least 5 yr of experience
in the design of related pressure piping 2-1.2.3 Maximum Operating Pressure. The maximum
(c) completion of a science-based degree, an accredited operating pressure for the piping system is the maximum
engineering technician’s or associate’s degree or certifi- sustained operating pressure to which the piping compo-
cate requiring the equivalent of at least 2 yr of study, plus a nents can be exposed in service. The maximum operating
minimum of 10 yr of experience in the design of related pressure, along with the coincident temperature, shall be
pressure piping used in the pipe stress analysis (see section 2-4).
Experience in the design of related pressure piping is
satisfied by piping design experience that includes design 2-1.3 Design Temperature
calculations for pressure, sustained and occasional loads, 2-1.3.1 General. The design temperature of each
and piping flexibility. component in a piping system is the temperature at
which, under the coincident pressure, the greatest thick-
2-1.2 Design Pressure ness is required in accordance with para. 2-1.2.
2-1.2.1 General NOTE: To satisfy the requirements of para. 2-2.2, different
components in the same piping system may have different
(a) The design pressure of each component in a piping
design temperatures.
system shall be not less than the pressure at the most
severe condition of coincident internal or external pres- In establishing design temperatures, the designer shall
sure and temperature (minimum or maximum) expected consider, at minimum, the fluid temperatures, ambient
during service, except as provided in para. 2-2.2.3. temperatures, solar radiation, heating or cooling
(b) The most severe condition shall be that which medium temperatures, and the applicable provisions of
results in the greatest required component thickness para. 2-2.3.
and the highest component rating.

5
 ASME NM.2-2022

2-1.3.2 Minimum Design Temperature. The minimum (d) Low Ambient Temperature. Low-ambient-tempera-
design temperature is the lowest component temperature ture conditions shall be considered in the pipe stress
expected in service. This temperature can establish special analysis.
design requirements and material qualification require-
ments. See also para. 2-1.4(d). 2-1.5 Dynamic Effects
2-1.3.3 Uninsulated Components. The component Dynamic effects include the following:
design temperature for uninsulated components shall (a) Impact. Impact forces caused by external or internal
be the fluid temperature, unless a higher temperature conditions (including changes in flow rate, hydraulic
will result from solar radiation or other external heat shock, liquid or solid slugging, flashing, and geysering)
sources, or unless calculations, tests, or service experience shall be taken into account in the design of piping.
based on measurements support the use of another (b) Wind. The effect of wind loading shall be taken into
temperature. account in the design of exposed piping. The analysis
considerations and loads may be as described in
2-1.3.4 Externally Insulated Piping. The component ASCE/SEI 7. Authoritative local meteorological data
design temperature for externally insulated components may also be used to define or refine the design wind loads.
shall be the fluid temperature unless calculations, tests, or (c) Earthquake. The effect of earthquake loading shall
service experience based on measurements support the be taken into account in the design of piping. The analysis
use of another temperature. If piping is to be heated or considerations and loads may be as described in
cooled by tracing or jacketing, this effect shall be consid- ASCE/SEI 7. Authoritative local seismological data may
ered in establishing component design temperatures. also be used to define or refine the design earthquake
2-1.3.5 Internally Insulated Piping. The component loads.
design temperature for internally insulated components (d) Vibration. Piping shall be designed, arranged, and
shall be based on heat transfer calculations or tests. supported so as to eliminate excessive and harmful effects
of vibration, which can arise from such sources as impact,
2-1.3.6 Maximum Operating Temperature. The pressure pulsation, turbulent flow vortices, resonance in
maximum operating temperature for the piping system compressors, and wind.
is the maximum sustained operating temperature to (e) Discharge Reactions. Piping shall be designed,
which the piping components can be exposed in arranged, and supported so as to withstand reaction
service. The maximum operating temperature, along forces due to let-down or discharge of fluids.
with the coincident pressure, shall be used in the pipe
stress analysis (see section 2-4). 2-1.6 Weight Effects
2-1.4 Ambient Effects The following weight effects, combined with loads and
forces from other causes, shall be taken into account in the
For piping systems in which fluids can be trapped (e.g., design of piping:
in double-seated valves) and subjected to heating and (a) Live Loads. These loads include the weight of the
consequent expansion, pressure relief shall be provided medium transported or the medium used for test.
or means shall be provided to enable the system to with- Snow and ice loads due to both environmental and oper-
stand the pressure buildup. ating conditions shall be considered.
(a) Cooling: Effects on Pressure. The cooling of a gas or (b) Dead Loads. These loads consist of the weight of
vapor in a piping system can reduce the pressure suffi- piping components, insulation, and other superimposed
ciently to create an internal vacuum. In such a case, permanent loads supported by the piping.
the piping shall be capable of withstanding the external
pressure at the lower temperature, or provision shall be 2-1.7 Thermal Expansion and Contraction Effects
made to break the vacuum.
(b) Fluid Expansion Effects. Provision shall be made in The following thermal effects, combined with loads and
the design to enable the system either to withstand or forces from other causes, shall be taken into account in the
relieve increased pressure caused by the heating of design of piping. Thermal expansion and contraction shall
static fluid in a piping component. be accounted for, preferably by the use of elbows, offsets,
(c) Atmospheric Icing. If the design minimum tempera- or changes in direction of the pipeline.
ture of a piping system is below 0°C (32°F), the possibility (a) Thermal Loads Due to Restraints. These loads
of moisture condensation and buildup of ice shall be consist of thrusts and moments that arise when restraints
considered and provisions made in the design to avoid or anchors prevent free thermal expansion and contrac-
any resultant malfunctions. This applies to surfaces of tion of the piping.
moving parts of shutoff valves; control valves; pressure (b) Loads Due to Temperature Gradients. These loads
relief devices, including discharge piping; and other arise from stresses in pipe walls resulting from large,
components. rapid temperature changes or from unequal temperature

6
 ASME NM.2-2022

distribution as may result from a high heat flux through a 2-2.2 Pressure–Temperature Design Criteria
comparatively thick pipe or bowing of the line caused by
stratified two-phase flow. 2-2.2.1 Listed Components Having Established
(c) Loads Due to Differences in Expansion Characteris- Ratings. FRP piping components manufactured in accor-
tics. These loads result from differences in thermal expan- dance with the specifications listed in Table 4-1.1-1 are
sion that occur when materials with different thermal acceptable for use in accordance with this Standard,
expansion coefficients are combined, as in double- provided they comply with one of the following:
containment or metallic–nonmetallic piping. (a) The hydrostatic design stress (HDS) or hydrostatic
design pressure (HDP) is determined in accordance with
2-1.8 Effects of Support, Anchor, and Terminal para. 2-2.3.3, Design Method B, and the components are
Movements designed in accordance with the requirements of section
2-3.
The effects of movements of piping supports, anchors, (b) The maximum design pressure is established in
and connected equipment shall be taken into account in accordance with para. 2-2.3.6.
the design of piping. These movements can result from the
flexibility and/or thermal expansion of equipment, 2-2.2.2 Unlisted Components. FRP piping compo-
supports, or anchors, and from settlement, tidal move- nents not manufactured in accordance with the specifica-
ments, or wind sway. tions listed in Table 4-1.1-1 but for which allowable
stresses have been established in accordance with
2-1.9 Reduced Impact Resistance para. 2-2.3.3 or para. 2-2.3.4 shall be tested in accordance
with para. 2-2.3.6 to establish maximum design pressures.
The harmful effects of reduced impact resistance shall These components are referred to as “unlisted compo-
be taken into account in the design of piping. The effects nents” throughout this Standard.
can, for example, result from low operating temperatures,
including the chilling effect of sudden loss of pressure on 2-2.2.3 Allowances for Pressure and Temperature
highly volatile fluids. Low ambient temperatures expected Variations. Occasional variations of pressure and/or
during operation shall be considered. temperature may occur in a piping system. Such variations
shall be considered in the selection of design pressure (see
2-1.10 Cyclic Effects para. 2-1.2) and design temperature (see para. 2-1.3). The
most severe coincident pressure and temperature shall
The effects of pressure cycling, thermal cycling, and determine the design conditions unless all of the following
other cyclic loadings shall be considered in the design criteria are met:
of piping. (a) In no case shall the increased pressure exceed the
test pressure specified in section 6-3 for the piping system.
2-2 DESIGN CRITERIA (b) Combined longitudinal stresses shall not exceed the
Section 2-2 states pressure–temperature design limits established in section 2-4.
criteria, stress criteria, design allowances, and (c) The total number of pressure variations plus the
minimum design values, together with permissible varia- total number of temperature variations above the
tions of these factors as applied to the design of piping. design conditions shall not exceed 1,000 during the life
of the piping system.
2-2.1 General (d) Occasional variations above design conditions shall
remain within the following limits for pressure design.
The designer shall be satisfied as to the adequacy of the The designer shall determine, using methods acceptable
material and its manufacture, considering at least the to the owner, that the effects of such variations will be safe
following: over the service life of the piping system.
(a) long- or short-term tensile, compressive, flexural, Subject to the owner’s approval, it is permissible to
and shear strengths, and modulus of elasticity, at exceed the pressure rating or the allowable stress for pres-
design temperature sure design at the temperature of the increased condition
(b) creep rate at design conditions by not more than
(c) design stress and its basis (1) 20% for no more than 1 h at any one time and no
(d) ductility and plasticity more than 10 h/yr, or
(e) impact and thermal shock properties (2) 10% for no more than 10 h at any one time and no
(f) temperature limits more than 100 h/yr
(g) transition temperature: melting and vaporization (e) The combined effects of the sustained and cyclic
(h) porosity and permeability variations on the serviceability of all components in
(i) testing methods the system shall have been evaluated.
(j) methods of making joints and their efficiency
(k) possibility of deterioration in service

7
 ASME NM.2-2022

(f) The application of pressures exceeding pressure– (2) SA(2:1), the allowable longitudinal tensile stress
temperature ratings of valves may under certain condi- with coincident hoop stress equal in magnitude to
tions cause loss of seat tightness or difficulty of operation. twice that of the allowable longitudinal stress
The differential pressure on the valve closure element Additional points may be used to develop a more
should not exceed the maximum differential pressure complex allowable stress envelope.
rating established by the valve manufacturer. Such appli- It is permissible to use −SA(0:1) for SA(0:−1).
cations are the owner’s responsibility. It is permissible to use more than one design method
to determine the points of the allowable stress envelope.
2-2.2.4 Junction of Different Services. When two
For example, Design Method B (see para. 2-2.3.3) could be
services that operate at different pressure–temperature
used to determine SA(2:1), and Design Method C (see para.
conditions are connected, the valve segregating the
2-2.3.4) could be used to determine SA(0:1).
two services shall be rated for the more severe service
(c) Particular types of FRP laminates have greater
condition. For piping on either side of the valve,
strength in the hoop direction than in the longitudinal
however, each system shall be designed for the conditions
direction. An example of such a laminate is filament-
of the service to which it is connected.
wound pipe with a winding angle of 55 deg to the pipe
2-2.3 Allowable Stresses and Other Design Limits axis. Designing the thickness of these types of laminates
solely to resist pressure loads could result in a pipe with
2-2.3.1 General insufficient capacity to withstand longitudinal loads other
(a) Both prescriptive and performance-based methods than pressure. Consideration shall be given therefore to
may be used to determine the allowable stress values for providing additional longitudinal load-carrying capacity.
FRP piping materials; these methods include application Regardless of the design method used to determine the
of successful in-service experience, proof-of-design pipe thickness required for pressure design, the pipe
testing, and detailed stress analysis using laminate thickness shall be increased beyond that required for
theory with a quadratic interaction failure criterion. pressure by the following factor:
The magnitude of the design factors used depends on K1 = 0.67 × SH(2:1)/ SA(0:1) + 0.33
the level of confidence of the material properties. Compo-
nents qualified with the highest level of confidence have where K1 < 1.67 and
the lowest design factors, and components designed by SA(0:1) = allowable longitudinal stress with no coinci-
prescription methods and with lower levels of confidence dent hoop stress
have the highest design factors. This Standard recognizes SH(2:1) = allowable hoop stress with coincident longi-
the following methods of design: tudinal stress equal in magnitude to one-half
(1) Method A — Design by Rules. Allowable stresses that of the hoop stress
are listed in ASME NM-3.3 for defined materials.
(2) Method B — Design by Long-Term Testing. Allow-
able stresses are determined based on the results of long-
2-2.3.2 Design Method A — Design by Rules. Allow-
term pressure testing.
able stresses have been established for standard materials
(3) Method C — Design by Short-Term Testing. Allow-
as listed in ASME NM.3.3. The allowable stresses listed in
able stresses are determined based on the results of short-
ASME NM.3.3 are based on not greater than one-eighth of
term testing.
the laminate strength. Pressure design of piping compo-
(4) Method D — Design by Stress Analysis. Allowable
nents shall be in accordance with section 2-3.
stresses are determined based on the results of laminate,
layer, or macrolayer testing or from using strain limits. 2-2.3.3 Design Method B — Design by Long-Term
(b) FRP is, in general, a nonisotropic, nonhomogeneous Testing. Allowable stresses for pressure design per
material. The strength of the material in one direction, e.g., Design Method B are to be determined in accordance
the longitudinal direction, depends on the stress in the with the procedures described in ASTM D2992. The allow-
orthogonal direction, e.g., the hoop direction. To able stresses so determined are defined as the hydrostatic
account for this behavior, an allowable stress envelope design stresses (HDS), and shall be in accordance with the
as shown in Figure 2-2.3.1-1 is used to define the allowable following requirements and limits:
stresses. The allowable stress envelope defines the allow- (a) For the purposes of this Standard, the long-term
able longitudinal stress as a function of the coincident hydrostatic strength (LTHS) is defined as the lower
hoop stress. 95% prediction limit of the estimated tensile stress in
Regardless of the design method used, a minimum of the wall of the pipe in the hoop direction due to internal
two points must be determined to develop the allowable hydrostatic pressure that will cause failure of the pipe
stress envelope. The two points are after the design life of the piping. If the cyclic LTHS is
(1) SA(0:1), the allowable longitudinal tensile stress used as per ASTM D2992, Procedure A, the design
with no coincident hoop stress number of cycles shall not be less than 262 800 000

8
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 2-2.3.1-1
Allowable Stress Envelope
SA

SA(2:1)

SA

SA(0:1)

1
2
SH
SH SH(2:1)

SA(0:21)

cycles. If the static LTHS is used as per ASTM D2992, Proce- The LDV is defined as the test mean value less two stan-
dure B, the design number of hours shall not be less than dard deviations.
175 200 h. (d) The HDS is valid in the temperature range listed in
(b) The HDS is determined by multiplying the LTHS by a Table 3-3.1-1. For design temperatures in excess of those
suitable service (design) factor. listed in Table 3-3.1-1, the testing shall be conducted at no
(1) If the cyclic LTHS is used, the service (design) less than the design temperature.
factor shall not exceed 1.0. (e) SH(2:1) shall be taken as not greater than the HDS.
(2) If the static LTHS is used, the service (design) SA(2:1) shall be taken as not greater than HDS/2.
factor shall not exceed 0.5. (f) Strain in lieu of stress may be used when data is
The designer should select the service (design) factor analyzed in accordance with ASTM D2992. The LTHS
after evaluating fully the service conditions and the engi- and HDS in this case would be strain values rather
neering properties of the specific material under consid- than stress values.
eration. See also section 2-6. (g) Pressure in lieu of stress may be used when data is
(c) The HDS shall not be taken as greater than one- analyzed in accordance with ASTM D2992. The long-term
quarter of the short-term hydrostatic strength (STHS) hydrostatic pressure (LTHP) is defined as the lower 95%
of the pipe. The STHS is defined as the LDV of the prediction limit of the estimated pressure that will cause
tensile strength of the pipe in the hoop direction when failure of the pipe after the design life of the piping. When
the pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D1599. the cyclic LTHP is used as per ASTM D2992, Procedure A,
the design number of cycles shall not be less than

9
 ASME NM.2-2022

262 800 000 cycles. When the static LTHP is used as per (b) The hoop tensile strength under uniaxial loading,
ASTM D2992, Procedure B, the design number of hours SH(1:0), shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
shall not be less than 175 200 h. D638; ASTM D2290, Procedure A; ASTM D3039; or
The hydrostatic design pressure (HDP) is determined ASTM D5083.
by multiplying the LTHP by a suitable service (design) NOTE: SH(2:1) may be used for SH(1:0).
factor.
(1) When the cyclic LTHP is used, the service (c) The axial tensile strength under biaxial pressure,
(design) factor shall not exceed 1.0. SA(2:1), shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
(2) When the static LTHP is used, the service (design) D1599, Procedure A or Procedure B, as the axial
factor shall not exceed 0.5. stress (or strain) at maximum pressure. Free end
The designer should select the service (design) factor closures shall be used for this testing. For either Proce-
after evaluating fully the service conditions and the engi- dure A or Procedure B, the 70-s time to reach the burst
neering properties of the specific material under consid- pressure may be exceeded.
eration. See also section 2-6. NOTE: SA(0:1) [see (d)] may be used for SA(2:1).
(h) The HDS (or HDP) is valid only for the materials and (d) The axial tensile strength under uniaxial loading,
laminate constructions used in the test specimens. SA(0:1), shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
Changes to materials or laminate constructions require D638, ASTM D2105, ASTM D3039, or ASTM D5083.
retesting to establish alternative allowable stresses
NOTE: The axial bending strength of filament-wound pipe can be
(strains).
greater than the axial tensile strength. That additional bending
(i) Components that have been designed using the HDS strength may be used for pipe bending loads.
(or HDP) shall be constructed of the same materials and
laminate constructions as those used in the long-term test (e) Except as provided in para. 3-2.4, the allowable
specimens. stresses (or strains) are valid only for the materials
(j) Components for which the allowable stresses have and laminate constructions used in the test specimens.
been determined in accordance with Design Method B and Except as provided in para. 3-2.4, changes to materials
that have been designed in accordance with the rules in or laminate constructions shall require retesting to estab-
section 2-3 do not need to be tested in accordance with lish alternative allowable stresses (strains).
para. 2-2.3.6. All other components shall be tested in (f) Components that have been designed using these
accordance with para. 2-2.3.6. allowable stresses (or strains) shall be constructed of
Currently, there are no long-term test methods avail- the same materials and shall have the same laminate
able for determining other points on the allowable constructions as those used in the short-term test speci-
stress envelope. Therefore, short-term test methods mens.
shall be used to supplement the long-term pressure (g) The allowable stresses are valid in the temperature
testing in order to construct the full allowable stress range as listed in Table 3-3.1-1. For design temperatures
envelope. in excess of those listed in Table 3-3.1-1, the testing shall
be conducted at no less than the design temperature.
2-2.3.4 Design Method C — Design by Short-Term (h) Components for which the allowable stresses have
Testing. Allowable stresses per Design Method C shall been determined in accordance with Design Method C and
be determined using the results from short-term tests that have been designed in accordance with the require-
as described below. In all cases, the allowable stresses ments in section 2-3 do not need to be tested in accordance
shall be not greater than one-sixth of the LDV of the mate- with para. 2-2.3.6. All other components shall be tested in
rial strength. The LDV is defined as the test mean value less accordance with para. 2-2.3.6.
two standard deviations.
(a) The hoop tensile strength under biaxial pressure, 2-2.3.5 Design Method D — Design by Stress
SH(2:1), shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Analysis. Design Method D consists of two steps: first,
D1599, Procedure A or Procedure B, as the hoop stress a biaxial stress analysis of the component to determine
(or strain) at maximum pressure. Free end closures the stress state at points of concern in the component
shall be used for this testing. For either Procedure A as determined by the designer, and second, the application
or Procedure B, it is permissible to exceed the 70-s of the quadratic interaction criterion to demonstrate that
time to reach the burst pressure. the stress state is within permissible limits.
(a) Biaxial Stress Analysis
NOTE: For quasi-isotropic materials such as Type I or Type II
(1) Various methods of stress analysis may be used
laminates, SH(1:0) [see (b)] may be used for SH(2:1).
to determine the biaxial stress state in the component.
These include
(-a) finite element analysis
(-b) application of closed-form solutions that yield
the complete biaxial stress state

10
 ASME NM.2-2022

(-c) back calculation of the biaxial state of stress tested in accordance with the performance requirements
using strain gauge data of ASME SD-4024 or ASME SD-5421, as applicable.
(2) The elastic constants to be used in the stress (b) The minimum proof test pressure depends on the
analysis shall be determined from one of the following: number of components of a given type and size that are
(-a) the elastic properties listed in ASME NM.3.3 proof tested. The proof test pressures listed in
(-b) testing of the laminate ASME SD-6041, ASME SD-5685, ASME SD-4024 or
(-c) testing of the individual layers (lamina) or ASME SD-5421, as applicable, shall be increased by the
macrolayers and using laminate analysis as defined in following factors:
Mandatory Appendix II
(-d) micromechanics and laminate analysis as Number of Components Tested Proof Test Factor
defined in Mandatory Appendix II 1 1.5
(b) Quadratic Interaction Criterion 2 1.375
(1) The quadratic interaction criterion requires ≥3 1.25
calculation of the strength ratio of each individual
lamina [see (2) below] for each loading combination (c) The ranges of component sizes that may be qualified
using stress limits determined from one of the following by proof testing are shown in Table 2-2.3.6-1.
(or a combination thereof): (d) The proof-of-design testing shall be conducted at a
(-a) testing of individual layers (lamina) or macro- temperature in the range of 15°C to 25°C (60°F to 77°F).
layers (as defined in Mandatory Appendix II). Test results The maximum design pressures established by the testing
shall be based on the LDV of the layer strength. The LDV is are suitable for the design temperature ranges listed in
defined as the test mean value less two standard devia- Table 3-3.1-1. For design temperatures in excess of
tions. those listed in Table 3-3.1-1, the testing shall be conducted
(-b) the strain limits listed in Mandatory at no less than the design temperature.
Appendix II, with stress limits calculated from the (e) Proof-of-design testing shall not be required for
strain limits using the appropriate modulus of elasticity piping components complying with any of the following:
values. (1) Piping components have been designed in accor-
(2) For quasi-isotropic materials such as Type I and dance with Design Method A.
Type II laminates, the quadratic interaction criterion may (2) Allowable stresses have been determined in
be applied to the entire laminate rather than to the indi- accordance with Design Method B or Design Method C,
vidual layers. The stress limits in this case shall be deter- and the piping components have been designed in accor-
mined by testing of the laminate. dance with the requirements in section 2-3.
(3) For any layer or macrolayer for which the stress (3) Piping components have been designed in accor-
limit has been calculated from the strain limits, the dance with Design Method D.
strength ratio shall not be less than 8. For any laminate,
layer, or macrolayer for which the stress limit has been 2-2.3.7 Limits of Calculated Stresses Due to
determined by testing, the strength ratio shall not be less Sustained and Operating Loads
than 6. (a) Internal Pressure Stresses. Limits of stress due to
(4) The stress limits are applicable to the tempera- internal pressure are as stated in paras. 2-2.3.2
ture range as listed in Table 3-3.1-1. For design tempera- through 2-2.3.5. The following also apply:
tures in excess of those listed in Table 3-3.1-1, the stress (1) Sustained Loads. Limits of stress due to internal
limits shall be determined by testing at no less than the pressure and other sustained loads such as weight are as
design temperature. stated in section 2-4.
2-2.3.6 Proof-of-Design Testing of Piping Compo- (2) Operating Loads. Limits of stress due to sustained
nents. Except as noted in (e) below, proof-of-design loads plus operating loads such as those due to restraint of
testing is required to establish or verify the maximum thermal expansion/contraction are as stated in section 2-4.
design pressure of piping components for which the allow- (b) External Pressure Stresses. The stress due to
able stresses have been determined in accordance with external pressure shall be considered adequate if it is
Design Method B or Design Method C. Proof-of-design not greater than one-quarter of the collapse pressure
testing may also be used to qualify individual components determined by test or calculation.
designed by means other than Design Method B or Design
Method C. The requirements for proof-of-design testing 2-2.3.8 Limits of Calculated Stresses Due to Occa-
are as follows: sional Loads
(a) Fittings and joints shall be pressure tested in (a) Operation. The total stress in any component due to
accordance with the proof-of-design requirements in the following loads shall not exceed the limits stated in
ASME SD-6041, or in accordance with the pressure section 2-4:
test requirements of ASME SD-5685. Flanges shall be (1) sustained loads such as pressure and weight

11
 ASME NM.2-2022

Table 2-2.3.6-1 for adequacy of mechanical strength under applicable

Component Sizes Qualified loadings as described in section 2-1.
by Proof-of-Design Testing
2-3.2 Straight Pipe
Size of Test Component, Qualified Component Sizes,
DN (NPS) DN (NPS) 2-3.2.1 General
50 (2) 20–150 (0.75–6)
(a) The required thickness of straight sections of pipe
80 (3) 25–200 (1–8)
shall be determined by eq. (2-3-1):
100 (4) 40–300 (1.5–12)
tm = t + c (2-3-1)
150 (6) 50–450 (2–18)

200 (8) 65–600 (2.5–24) where

250 (10) 125–600 (5–24) c = sum of mechanical allowances (thread or groove
depth) plus corrosion-barrier and erosion allow-
300 (12) 150–600 (6–24)
ances, mm (in.). For threaded components, the
350 (14) 200–700 (8–28)
nominal thread depth (dimension h of ASME
400 (16) 200–800 (8–32) B1.20.1) shall apply. If the tolerance of machined
450 (18) 250–900 (10–36) surfaces or grooves is not specified, it shall be
500 (20) 250–1 000 (10–40) assumed to be 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) plus the specified
600 (24) 300–1 200 (12–48) depth of the cut. Unless otherwise specified by the
owner, the corrosion-barrier thickness shall be
750 (30) 400–1 500 (16–60) considered as sacrificial and shall not be included
900 (36) 450–1 800 (18–72) for structural contributions.
GENERAL NOTE: For test components of sizes other than those listed t = pressure design structural thickness, mm (in.), as
above, size range of qualified components would be 1∕2 to 2 times the calculated in accordance with para. 2-3.2.2 for
size of the tested component. pipe under internal pressure or para. 2-3.2.3
for pipe under external pressure. For piping
with both internal and external pressure
design requirements, minimum structural thick-
(2) sustained plus operating loads such as those due ness shall be taken as the maximum value
to the restraint of thermal expansion and/or contraction required. Minimum structural thickness shall
(3) occasional loads such as wind or earthquake not be less than 2.0 mm (0.080 in.).
NOTE: Wind and earthquake forces need not be considered as tm = minimum required thickness, mm (in.), including
acting concurrently. the corrosion-barrier and mechanical and erosion
allowances
(b) Test. Stresses due to test conditions are subject to
the limitations in (a). It is not necessary to consider other
occasional loads, such as wind and earthquake, as occur- The measured total pipe wall thickness, T, for the manu-
ring concurrently with test loads. factured pipe shall not be less than tm. In addition, the
measured thickness of the structural wall shall not be
2-2.3.9 Allowances. The minimum required thickness less than t.
of a piping component shall include allowances for corro- (b) The requirements of para. 2-3.2 are intended to
sion, erosion, and thread or groove depth. See also address uniform static pressure design only. Additional
section 2-5. thickness may be required for other loadings, dynamic
effects, or stability as required by section 2-4.
2-3 PRESSURE DESIGN OF PIPING COMPONENTS 2-3.2.2 Straight Pipe Under Internal Pressure. To ð22Þ
ensure that straight pipe has adequate axial-direction
2-3.1 General
strength for loads other than pressure, it is necessary
Components manufactured in accordance with specifi- to include provisions for additional axial strength capacity
cations listed in Table 4-1.1-1 shall be considered suitable in the initial internal pressure design equations. The
for use at their respective maximum design pressures in internal pressure design structural thickness, t, shall
accordance with para. 2-2.2.1. The requirements in paras. not be less than that calculated by eq. (2-3-2). The
2-3.2 through 2-3.9 are intended for uniform static pres- stress values for eq. (2-3-2) shall be taken from the appro-
sure design of components not covered by the specifica- priate table in ASME NM-3.3 or determined from qualifi-
tions in Table 4-1.1-1, but may be used for a special or cation testing.
more rigorous design of such components, or to satisfy
requirements of para. 2-2.2.2. Designs shall be checked

12
 ASME NM.2-2022

PD
t = K1 (b) With Qualified Rib Stiffeners. Qualified rib stiffeners
2SH(2:1) (2-3-2)
are defined as circumferential stiffener rings that meet the
requirements for minimum moment of inertia, Is, as calcu-
where lated by eq. (2-3-4):
D = inside diameter of pipe structural wall, mm (in.)
x = (Di + 2c) PeLsDo3F (2-3-4)
Is =
c = sum of allowances defined in 24ES
para. 2-3.2.1, mm (in.)
Di = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) where
K1 = factor to provide additional available axial ES = hoop tensile modulus of stiffener, MPa (psi)
strength for loads other than pressure Ls = one-half the distance from the centerline of the
x = 1.0 for Type I and Type II laminates stiffener to the next stiffener on one side plus
x = 1.67 for Type III laminates one-half the centerline distance to the next stif-
x = 0.67(SH(2:1)/SA(0:1)) + 0.33 for all other laminates, fener on the other side of the stiffener, both
where (SH(2:1)/SA(0:1)) shall be taken as greater measured parallel to the axis of the cylinder,
than or equal to 1.0 but need not exceed 2.0 mm (in.)
SA(0:1) = allowable axial stress from the appli-
cable table in ASME NM.3.3 or from The external pressure design structural thickness, t,
qualification testing, MPa (psi) shall be not less than that calculated by eq. (2-3-5) but
SH(2:1) = allowable hoop stress from the appli- need not exceed the value calculated by eq. (2-3-3).
cable table in ASME NM.3.3 or from The elastic modulus and Poisson’s ratio values for eq.
qualification testing, MPa (psi) (2-3-5) shall be taken from the appropriate table in
P = internal design gauge pressure, MPa (psi) ASME NM-3.3 or calculated by lamination analysis in
accordance with Mandatory Appendix II. For laminate
ð22Þ 2-3.2.3 Straight Pipe Under Uniform External Pres- types other than Type I, II, or III, in the absence of appro-
sure priate Poisson’s ratio values, the product of Poisson’s
ratios, νAHT × νHAT, may be taken as zero for conservatism
(a) Without Qualified Rib Stiffeners. The external pres- in the following equation:
sure design structural thickness, t, shall be established
2/5
following the procedures outlined in ASTM D2924, or ij Do 3/2 yz
jj P (1 F zzzz
shall not be less than that calculated by eq. (2-3-3).
The elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio values for eq. t = jjj
jj e
j AHT HAT )3/4 Lc
2 ( ) zz
zz
(2-3-5)
jj 0.8531KD E 3/4
E 1/4 zz
(2-3-3) shall be taken from the appropriate table in k HF AT {
ASME NM-3.3 or calculated by lamination analysis in
accordance with Mandatory Appendix II. For laminate where
types other than Type I, II, or III, in the absence of appro- EAT = pipe axial tensile modulus, MPa (psi)
priate Poisson’s ratio values, the product of Poisson’s KD = a knockdown factor to cover all data points
ratios, νAHT × νHAT, may be taken as zero for conservatism x = 1.0 for Type I, Type II, and Type III laminates
in the following equation. A design factor, F, of at least 4.0 x = 0.84 for all other laminate types
for external pressure shall be used: Lc = greatest center-to-center distance between any
two adjacent stiffener rings, mm (in.)
FPeDo3(1 AHT HAT ) (2-3-3) t = external pressure design structural thickness,
t= 3 mm (in.)
2EHF
γ = reduction factor to better correlate theoretical
where predictions and test results
Do = outside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) x = 1 − 0.001Zp if Zp ≤ 100
EHF = pipe hoop-direction flexural modulus, MPa x = 0.9 if Zp > 100
(psi) EHF 3/2 EAT1/2 2
Zp = (1 1/2 Lc
F = design factor; F is ≥ 4.0 AHT HAT )
EAF 2 Do
Pe = external or vacuum design gauge pressure, MPa
(psi)
2
t ( )
νAHT = Poisson’s ratio in the axial direction where EAF is the axial flexural modulus, MPa
νHAT = Poisson’s ratio in the hoop direction (psi)
νAHT = Poisson’s ratio in the axial direction
νHAT = Poisson’s ratio in the hoop direction

13
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 2-3.3.1-1 where

Nomenclature for Smooth Radius Elbows R1 = bend radius of elbow, mm (in.); R1 ≥ D

At the sidewall on the elbow centerline radius, m = 1.0.

Thickness variations from the intrados to the extrados
and along the length of the elbow shall be gradual. The
R1
Intrados thickness requirements apply at the midspan of the
elbow, γ/2, at the intrados, extrados, and elbow centerline
radius (see Figure 2-3.3.1-1). The minimum thickness at
the end tangents and extrados shall not be less than the
Extrados requirements of para. 2-3.2 for straight pipe (m ≥ 1.0).
2-3.3.2 Mitered Elbows Under Uniform Internal Pres- ð22Þ
sure. Acceptable methods for pressure design of multiple
and single miter bends are given in (a) and (b), where the
requirements in (c) and (d) apply. Refer to Figure 2-3.3.2-1
2-3.3 Curved and Mitered Segments of Pipe for nomenclature used in eqs. (2-3-9) through (2-3-11) for
ð22Þ 2-3.3.1 Smooth Radius Elbows Under Uniform the internal pressure design of mitered elbows.
Internal Pressure. To ensure that smooth radius (a) Multiple-Miter Elbows. The maximum allowable
elbows have adequate hoop-direction strength capacity internal pressure, Pm, shall be the lesser value calculated
for combined stresses due to internal pressure and from eqs. (2-3-9) and (2-3-10). These equations are not
bending, it is necessary to include provisions for addi- applicable when angle θ exceeds 22.5 deg:
tional strength capacity in the initial internal pressure
design equations. The minimum required thickness, tm, SH(2:1) × t ij t yz
jj zz (2-3-9)
of a smooth radius elbow shall be determined in accor- Pm = jj z
r2 k t + 0.643 tan r2t z{
dance with eq. (2-3-1), with pressure design structural
thickness, t, calculated using eq. (2-3-6):
PD
t = K2m (2-3-6) SH(2:1) × t ij R1 r2 yz
2SH(2:1) Pm = jj zz (2-3-10)
r2 jj R zz
k 1 0.5r2 {
where
D = inside diameter of pipe structural wall, mm where
(in.) SH(2:1) = allowable stress from applicable table in
x = (Di + 2c) ASME NM.3.3 or from qualification testing,
c = sum of allowances defined in MPa (psi)
para. 2-3.2.1, mm (in.)
Di = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) (b) Single-Miter Elbows
K2 = factor to provide additional available strength (1) The maximum allowable internal pressure, Pm,
for loads other than pressure for a single miter bend with angle θ not greater than
x = 1.2 for Type I and Type II laminates 22.5 deg shall be calculated by eq. (2-3-9).
m = pressure stress multiplier for location on (2) The maximum allowable internal pressure, Pm,
elbow for a single miter bend with angle θ greater than 22.5
P = internal design gauge pressure, MPa (psi) deg shall be calculated by eq. (2-3-11):
SH(2:1) = allowable stress from applicable table in
ASME NM.3.3 or from qualification testing, SH(2:1) × t ij t yz
jj zz (2-3-11)
MPa (psi) Pm = jj z
r2 k t + 1.25 tan r2t z{
At the intrados (inside bend radius)
(c) The miter pipe wall thickness, t, used in eqs. (2-3-9)
4(R1/D) 1 (2-3-7) through (2-3-11) shall extend a distance not less than M
m= 1.0
4(R1/ D) 2 from the inside crotch of the end miter welds, where M
equals the larger of the following:
At the extrados (outside bend radius)
2.5(r2t )0.5
4(R1/D) + 1 (2-3-8)
m= 1.0
4(R1/ D) + 2 or

14
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 2-3.3.2-1 EOL = tensile modulus of the reinforcement (minimum

Nomenclature for Mitered Elbows of hoop and axial moduli), MPa (psi)
EP = tensile modulus of the run pipe (maximum of EAT
and EHT), MPa (psi)
F = design factor
x = 10.0 minimum
Lb = length of reinforcement on branch pipe, mm (in.)
Lc = longest chord length of opening, mm (in.)
Lp = width of reinforcement pad on run pipe, mm (in.)
Lpi = width of reinforcement pad on inside of run pipe,
mm (in.)
Lpo = width of reinforcement pad on outside of run
pipe, mm (in.)
P = design pressure, MPa (psi)
SOL = tensile strength of reinforcement (minimum of
SH(2:1) and SA(2:1)), MPa (psi)
Ssb = shear strength of secondary bond on branch
pipe, MPa (psi)
Ssh = shear strength of secondary bond on run pipe,
MPa (psi)
SUP = tensile strength of the run pipe (maximum of
GENERAL NOTE: Corrosion barrier not shown for clarity. SH(2:1) and SA(2:1)), MPa (psi)
tb = thickness of reinforcement on branch pipe, mm
(in.)
Th = thickness of run pipe required for pressure
tan (R1 – r2)
rating, mm (in.)
(d) For all miter elbows for which the inside joint is Tp = thickness of reinforcement pad on run pipe, mm
accessible, 30% to 50% of the required miter joint (in.)
shall be applied as an inside lay-up. A corrosion Tpi = thickness of reinforcement pad on inside of run
barrier shall be applied over the inside joint. The require- pipe, mm (in.)
ment for an inside lay-up is mandatory for miters where Tpo = thickness of reinforcement pad on outside of run
Di ≥ 600 mm (24 in.) diameter. pipe, mm (in.)

2-3.3.3 Curved and Mitered Segments of Pipe Under (b) General Provisions and Requirements. The following
Uniform External Pressure. The wall thickness of curved general provisions and requirements apply to the proce-
and mitered segments of pipe subjected to external pres- dures presented in (c) and (d) for pressure design of
sure may be determined as specified for straight pipe in branch connections:
paras. 2-3.2.1 and 2-3.2.3. (1) These procedures apply to branch connections
for which d/D ≤ 0.5. Branch connections for which
2-3.4 Branch Connections d/D > 0.5 shall be designed by Design Method B, C, or
ð22Þ 2-3.4.1 Fabricated Branch Connections. A pipe having D (see paras. 2-2.3.3 through 2-2.3.5).
a branch connection is weakened by the opening that must (2) These procedures apply for branch connections
be made in it, and unless the wall thickness of the pipe is for which the angle between the branch and run pipe is ≥
sufficiently in excess of that required to sustain the pres- 45 deg.
sure, it is necessary to provide added reinforcement. The (3) For all branch connections for which the inside
design of branch connections shall be based on the joint is accessible, 30% to 50% of the required reinforce-
following, except as provided in paras. 2-3.4.2 and 2-3.4.3. ment shall be applied as an inside lay-up. A corrosion
(a) Nomenclature. The following nomenclature is used barrier shall be applied over the inside joint. The require-
in the equations for pressure design of branch connec- ment for an inside lay-up is mandatory for branch connec-
tions: tions where D ≥ 600 mm (24 in.) and d ≥ 200 mm (8 in.).
Ap = area of reinforcement required on each side of (4) These procedures are intended to address pres-
branch, mm2 (in.2); Ap ≥ AT/2 sure design only. Additional thicknesses may be required
AT = total area of reinforcement required on run pipe, for external loads.
mm2 (in.2) (5) When any two or more branches are so closely
D = inside diameter of run pipe, mm (in.) spaced that their reinforcements overlap, each branch
d = inside diameter of branch pipe, mm (in.) connection shall be reinforced as required by (c) and

15
 ASME NM.2-2022

(d). No portion of the reinforcement shall be considered as (-a) A maximum of 50% of the length of the
applying to more than one branch connection. tapered reinforcement may be considered as contributing
(c) Reinforcement of the Run Pipe to the required area of reinforcement.
(1) The total area for reinforcement of the run pipe (-b) The minimum structural thickness, not
shall not be less than that determined by eqs. (2-3-12) and including the corrosion barrier, of the inside or outside
(2-3-13): reinforcement shall not be less than 6 mm (0.25 in.).
S (-c) Not less than 50% of the total external rein-
AT K1Lc Th UP (2-3-12) forcement thickness shall extend up the branch pipe.
SOL
These layers shall have a minimum length-to-thickness
taper of 4:1 beginning above the run pipe reinforcement
pad. For joints with inside reinforcement, it is permissible
E
AT K1Lc Th P (2-3-13) to include the reinforcement that extends into the branch
EOL pipe as contributing to the inside reinforcement of the run
pipe. The maximum length of the reinforcement that can
where be considered as run pipe reinforcement is Th + Tp.
K1 = 1.5 if reinforcement is applied only to the outside (-d) Resin putty shall be used at the intersection to
of the joint. See Figure 2-3.4.1-1, illustration (a). form a smooth lay-up surface. The finished radius of the
x = 1.0 if reinforcement is applied to the inside and putty shall not exceed 10 mm (3∕8 in.).
outside of the joint. See Figure 2-3.4.1-1, illustra- (d) Reinforcement of the Branch Pipe
tion (b). (1) The minimum length of reinforcement on the
branch pipe shall not be less than that determined by
If test data are not available for the tensile strength of eq. (2-3-16):
the run pipe, SUP, it is permissible to use 0.015EP. If test
Pd
data are not available for the tensile strength of the re- Lb (2-3-16)
inforcement, SOL, it is permissible to use 0.010EOL. 4(Ssb/ F )
(2) The area of run pipe reinforcement on each side
of the branch shall not be less than that determined by (-a) No more than 50% of the taper length shall be
eq. (2-3-14): included as contributing to the minimum reinforcement
length on the branch, Lb. The minimum reinforcement
AT (2-3-14) length of the branch pipe shall not be less than 75 mm
Ap
2 (3.0 in.).
(-b) The secondary bond shear strength on the
(3) The minimum width of reinforcement pad on the
branch pipe, Ssb, shall not be taken to be greater than
run pipe shall not be less than that determined by
14 MPa (2,000 psi).
eq. (2-3-15):
(2) The minimum thickness of the reinforcement on
Lc P the branch pipe shall not be less than that determined by
Lp (2-3-15)
4(Ssh/ F ) eq. (2-3-17):
K2Pd
The minimum width of reinforcement pad shall not be less tb (2-3-17)
than 75 mm (3.0 in.). 2(SOL/ F )
The secondary bond shear strength on the run pipe,
where
Ssh, shall not be taken to be greater than 7 MPa (1,000 psi).
K2 = 1.5 if reinforcement is applied only to the outside
For joints with inside reinforcement, the total length
of the joint. See Figure 2-3.4.1-1, illustration (a).
of the inside and outside reinforcement shall not be less
x = 1.0 if reinforcement is applied to the inside and
than that determined by eq. (2-3-15). The length of the
outside of the joint. See Figure 2-3.4.1-1, illustra-
inside reinforcement shall not be less than 30% of that
tion (b).
determined by eq. (2-3-15). The inside and outside rein-
forcements shall each be no less than 75 mm (3.0 in.).
(-a) The full thickness reinforcement on the
For joints with reinforcement only on the outside, no
branch pipe shall extend a minimum of 50 mm (2.0
less than 66% of Ap shall be applied within the first third of
in.) onto the run pipe, beyond the resin putty, followed
Lp from the branch pipe. The thickness of this portion of
by a minimum length-to-thickness taper of 4:1.
the reinforcement shall not be less than 2Ap/Lp. The
(-b) If test data is not available for the tensile
remainder of the reinforcement shall taper uniformly
strength of the reinforcement, SOL, it is permissible to
to the end of L p at a minimum length-to-thickness
use 0.010EOL.
taper of 4:1.
(4) The following general provisions and require-
ments apply to the reinforcement of the run pipe:

16
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 2-3.4.1-1
Detail for Fabricated Branch

Lb tb
Tp
$2 in.
Tp / 2 A1 A2
$4
1 typical Th

$2 in.
Lp /3 Taper length/2
D
Lp

(a) Reinforcement on Outside Only [Note (1)]

Lb
tb
Tpo
$2 in. Tpo /2 A1 A2
$4
$2 in. 1 typical Th

A4

Taper
$3 in.
length/2
Tpi Lpi D
A3
$2 in. Taper
length/2
Lpo
(b) Reinforcement on Inside and Outside [Note (2)]

GENERAL NOTE: Corrosion barrier not shown for clarity.

NOTES:
(1) AP = A1 + A2.
(2) AP = A1 + A2 +A3 + A4.

17
 ASME NM.2-2022

(-c) The minimum thickness of the reinforcement together shall be qualified in accordance with
shall not be less than 6 mm (0.25 in.). The reinforcement para. 2-3.4.1 or para. 2-3.9.2, as applicable.
on the branch pipe shall be applied before the run pipe (2) The minimum thickness of the reinforced region
reinforcement layers are applied or shall be uniformly at the junction of the run and branch shall not be less than
interspersed with the run pipe reinforcement layers. 1.5tR. See Figure 2-3.4.3-1.
(3) The length of reinforced thickness of the branch
2-3.4.2 Branch Connections Using Listed Fittings. It
region, LB, shall be greater than or equal to half of the
may be assumed, without calculation, that a branch
branch diameter, 0.5DB, but shall not be less than 100
connection has adequate strength to sustain the internal
mm (4.0 in.).
and external pressures that will be applied to it if it uses a
(4) For DB ≤ 0.25DR, the minimum diameter of the
listed fitting (a tee, lateral, or cross) in accordance with
reinforced thickness of the run region shall not be less
para. 2-3.1.
than 3D B or [D B + 200 mm (8 in.)], whichever is
ð22Þ 2-3.4.3 Integrally Molded Tee Fittings greater, followed by a minimum length-to-thickness
taper of 4:1. See Figure 2-3.4.3-1, illustration (a).
(a) The minimum required pressure design structural (5) For DB > 0.25DR, the reinforced thickness of the
thickness, t, of the main run and branch regions of a main run, tR, shall encompass the entire circumference of
molded tee shall be determined in accordance with the run pipe. The minimum length of the reinforced thick-
eq. (2-3-18): ness of the main run shall not be less than (DB + DR) or [DB +
PDR 200 mm (8 in.)], whichever is greater. See Figure 2-3.4.3-1,
t=m (2-3-18)
2SH(2:1) illustration (b).
(6) The requirements of para. 2-3.4.3 are intended to
where achieve sufficient thickness and length of the reinforced
DR = inside diameter of the main run structural wall, regions to manage pressure stresses at the junction of the
mm (in.) run and branch. The dimensions of the fitting may need to
m = pressure stress multiplier for integral tees be increased to allow for joining methods or thickness
x = 1.4λz0.25 transitions. Refer to para. 2-3.4.4 for additional design
considerations for tees.
The geometry factor, λz, is given by the following equa- 2-3.4.4 Additional Design Considerations. The re-
tions: quirements of paras. 2-3.4.1 through 2-3.4.3 are intended
(1) For equal tees, DB = DR to ensure satisfactory performance of a branch connection
subjected only to uniform static pressure loading. The
DR designer shall also consider the following:
z= (2-3-19)
2tR (a) In addition to static pressure loadings, external
forces and moments are applied to a branch connection
(2) For unequal or reducing tees, DB < DR by dynamic unbalanced pressure, thermal expansion and
contraction, dead and live loads, and movement of piping
2 terminals and supports. Branch connections shall be
jij DB zyz jij 2tR zyz (2-3-20) designed to withstand these forces and moments.
z = jjj zz
z
jj
j D zz
z
(b) Adequate flexibility shall be provided in a small line
k 2tB { k R{
that branches from a large run, to accommodate thermal
where expansion and other movements of the larger line.
DB = inside diameter of the tee branch structural wall, (c) If ribs, gussets, or clamps are used to stiffen the
mm (in.) branch connection, their areas shall not be counted as
tB = minimum structural thickness of the tee branch, contributing to the reinforcement areas determined in
mm (in.); see Figure 2-3.4.3-1 paras. 2-3.4.1 and 2-3.4.3.
tR = minimum structural thickness of the main run of
the tee, mm (in.); see Figure 2-3.4.3-1 2-3.5 Closures
2-3.5.1 General ð22Þ
(b) The following general provisions and requirements
apply to the design of molded tees: (a) Closures not in accordance with para. 2-3.1 or (b)
(1) The design approach is applicable only to molded shall be qualified as required by para. 2-3.9.2.
tees made of Type I or Type II laminates where DR ≤ 600 (b) Ellipsoidal (2:1), hemispherical, and torispherical
mm (24 in.) and the run and branch regions are integrally closures with internal pressure on the concave side
formed with continuous laminates. Fabricated tees shall be as calculated in eq. (2-3-21).
constructed from separate run and branch pipe joined

18
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 2-3.4.3-1
Detail for Integrally Molded Tees
DB
tB

LB = 0.5DB or 100 mm (4 in.), 1.5tR min. 4:1 taper min.

tR
whichever is greater

R 6 mm
(0.25 in.)
min.

DR

3DB, or DB + 200 mm (8 in.),

whichever is greater

(a) DB # 0.25DR

DB
tB

LB = 0.5DB or
100 mm (4 in.), 1.5tR min.
tR 4:1 taper
whichever
min.
is greater
R 6 mm
(0.25 in.) min.

DR

DB + DR, or DB + 200 mm (8 in.),

whichever is greater

(b) DB . 0.25DR

GENERAL NOTE: Corrosion barrier not shown for clarity.

19
 ASME NM.2-2022

2-3.5.2 Openings in Closures. A closure is weakened

tm = t + c (2-3-21) by an opening, and unless the thickness of the closure is
sufficiently in excess of that required to sustain pressure, it
where is necessary to provide added reinforcement.
c = sum of allowances defined in para. 2-3.2.1, mm (a) For openings not larger than one-half the inside
(in.) diameter of the closure, the amount of reinforcement
t = pressure design structural thickness, calculated required shall be determined in accordance with
for the type of closure using eq. (2-3-22), para. 2-3.4.1.
(2-3-23), or (2-3-24), mm (in.) (b) All other openings in closures shall be qualified as
tm = minimum required thickness, including the corro- required by para. 2-3.9.2.
sion-barrier and mechanical and erosion allow-
ances, mm (in.) 2-3.6 Flanges
2-3.6.1 General
(1) For an ellipsoidal (2:1) closure, concave to pres-
sure (a) Flanges not in accordance with para. 2-3.1, para.
2-3.6.2, or (b) shall be qualified as required by para.
PD
t= (2-3-22) 2-3.9.2.
2SH(2:1) (b) Flat-face flanges for use with full-face, flat-ring
gaskets shall be designed in accordance with
where Mandatory Appendix I.
D = inside diameter of pipe structural wall, mm
(in.) 2-3.6.2 Blind Flanges. Blind flanges not in accordance ð22Þ
x = Di + 2c with para. 2-3.1 shall be designed in accordance with eq.
Di = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) (2-3-25). Otherwise, they shall be qualified as required by
P = internal design gauge pressure, MPa (psi) para. 2-3.9.2.
SH(2:1) = allowable stress from applicable table in tm = Dbc 0.25P /S + c (2-3-25)
ASME NM.3.3 or from qualification testing,
MPa (psi) where
c = sum of allowances defined in para. 2-3.2.1, mm
(2) For a hemispherical closure, concave to pressure (in.)
PR s Dbc = bolt circle diameter, mm (in.)
t= (2-3-23) P = internal design gauge pressure, MPa (psi)
2SH(2:1)
S = design stress from applicable table in ASME
NM.3.3 [refer to General Note (c) in Tables
where
1-2.1-1, 1-2.1-2, 1-2.2-1, and 1-2.2-2 (Tables
Rs = inside spherical radius, mm (in.)
1-2.1-1M, 1-2.1-2M,1-2.2-1M, and 1-2.2-2M)
for Type I and Type II laminates] or from quali-
(3) For a torispherical closure, concave to pressure
fication testing, MPa (psi)
MPR c tm = minimum required thickness, including the
t= (2-3-24)
2SH(2:1) corrosion-barrier and mechanical and erosion
allowances, mm (in.)
where
M = 1∕4[3 + (Rc/r)0.5] 2-3.7 Reducers
r = head knuckle radius, mm (in.); r ≥ 0.06Rc
Reducers not in accordance with para. 2-3.1 shall satisfy
Rc = head crown radius, mm (in.); Rc ≤ D
the minimum thickness requirements specified for
straight pipe in para. 2-3.2 based on the diameter at
For torispherical closures, the knuckle radius shall be
any corresponding point along the length of the reducer.
externally reinforced in accordance with Figure 2-3.5.1-1.
The reinforcement thickness shall be equal to the thick- 2-3.8 Joints
ness of the closure as calculated in eq. (2-3-24). The thick-
ness of a joint overlay near the knuckle radius tangent line 2-3.8.1 General. Joints or joining components,
contributes to the knuckle reinforcement. including adhesive joints, not in accordance with
(c) Joint overlays for connections to closures are para. 2-3.1, para. 2-3.6, or para. 2-3.8.2 shall be qualified
subject to the requirements of para. 2-3.8.2. as required by para. 2-3.4.2.

20
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 2-3.5.1-1
Knuckle Reinforcement for Torispherical Closures

Taper to
closure

Full reinforcement
thickness

62 deg

Joint line

ð22Þ 2-3.8.2 Butt Joints Sp

tj tp (2-3-27)
Sj
(a) Joints not in accordance with para. 2-3.1 shall
satisfy the minimum thickness requirements specified
for straight pipe in para. 2-3.2 using the appropriate allow- where
able stress, SH(2:1), and other material properties for the Ej = minimum axial modulus of butt-joint structural
joint laminate type from the applicable table in ASME wall, MPa (psi)
NM.3.3 or from qualification testing. Ep = maximum axial modulus of pipe structural wall,
(b) In addition to meeting the requirements of (a) for MPa (psi)
hoop-direction pressure loading, the butt-joint structural Sj = minimum axial strength of butt-joint structural
thickness shall provide axial-direction strength and stiff- wall, MPa (psi)
ness that is no less than that of the components being Sp = maximum axial strength of pipe structural wall,
joined. The minimum structural thickness of the butt- MPa (psi). If test data are not available for Sp, it is
joint laminate, tj, shall also not be less than that deter- permissible to use 0.015Ep. If the pipe and joint
mined by eqs. (2-3-26) and (2-3-27): are constructed of the same structural laminate
type and sequence, Sp may be taken as equal to Sj.
Ep tj = minimum required structural thickness of the
tj tp (2-3-26)
Ej butt-joint laminate, mm (in.)
tp = minimum required structural thickness of the
pipe, mm (in.)

The minimum full thickness joint length per side shall

not be less than 50 mm (2.0 in.).

21
 ASME NM.2-2022

Beyond the full thickness length, the butt-joint laminate 2-4 PIPE STRESS ANALYSIS
shall taper at a minimum length-to-thickness ratio of 6:1
on each side. 2-4.1 Design Considerations
The length of the butt-joint overlay shall be sufficient to
(a) Piping systems shall be designed to function and
provide average secondary bond shear strength at least
perform as intended. The piping system design shall
equal to the axial tensile strength of the weaker part. The
prevent expansion or contraction, pressure expansion,
minimum secondary bond length of the butt-joint lami-
or movement of piping supports and terminals, or any
nate on each side of the joint centerline, Lj, shall not
other loads from causing
be less than that determined by eq. (2-3-28):
(1) failure of piping or supports from overstrain,
Sp point loads, or fatigue
Lj = t p (2-3-28)
Sss (2) leakage at joints
(3) detrimental stresses or distortion in piping or in
where connected equipment (e.g., pumps) resulting from exces-
Lj = minimum required joint bond length, per side, sive thrusts and moments in the piping
mm (in.) (b) Section 2-4 provides guidance, concepts, and data
Sss = minimum secondary bond shear strength, MPa to assist the designer in ensuring adequate flexibility in
(psi). Sss shall not be taken to be greater than piping systems. As the behavior of FRP differs consider-
10 MPa (1,500 psi). ably from that of metals, care shall be taken to define the
specific laminate to be used and the material properties
No more than 50% of the taper length may be included required.
in the calculations for minimum secondary bond length, Lj. (c) Piping systems should be designed and laid out so
(c) The following general provisions and requirements that stresses resulting from displacement due to expan-
apply to the design of butt joints: sion, contraction, and other movement are minimized.
(1) For all butt joints for which an inside joint is not This concept requires special attention to supports, term-
accessible, a corrosion-barrier laminate shall be applied inals, and other restraints, and to the techniques for devel-
before the structural joint. oping sufficient flexibility outlined in para. 2-4.7. See also
(2) For all butt joints for which an inside joint is para. 2-4.2.2(b).
accessible, 30% to 50% of the required joint structural
thickness shall be applied as an inside lay-up. A corrosion 2-4.2 Concepts and Definition of Pipe Stress
barrier shall be applied internally, over the inside struc- Analysis
tural joint. The requirement for an inside corrosion-
Concepts of pipe stress analysis are covered in
barrier lay-up is mandatory for butt joints where the
paras. 2-4.2.1 through 2-4.2.3. Special consideration is
pipe diameter is ≥ 600 mm (24 in.).
given to displacements (strains) in the piping system,
(3) The requirements of para. 2-3.8.2 are intended to
and to resultant bending and torsional stresses.
provide adequate performance of butt joints connecting
two sections of straight pipe. For butt joints connecting 2-4.2.1 Displacement Strains. The concepts of strain
pipe to fittings, or connecting fittings, additional structural imposed by restraint of expansion or contraction and by
thickness or length may be necessary to account for other external movement apply in principle to FRP piping.
loadings or to satisfy the system analysis requirements as Stresses throughout the piping system may be predicted
defined in section 2-4. from these strains as fully elastic behavior is valid within
the defined working range of the material.
2-3.9 Other Components The piping system should include suitable anchors and
guides; the low moduli of the piping materials may enable
2-3.9.1 Listed Components. Pressure-containing
the system to absorb the displacement strains.
components manufactured in accordance with specifica-
tions in Table 4-1.1-1 but not covered elsewhere in section 2-4.2.2 Displacement Stresses
2-3 may be used in accordance with para. 2-2.2.1.
(a) Elastic Behavior. Displacement strains will produce
2-3.9.2 Unlisted Components. Pressure design of a sufficiently wide range of proportional stresses to justify
unlisted components and joints to which the requirements an elastic stress analysis for FRP piping. Fabrication
elsewhere in section 2-3 do not apply shall be verified by methods and laminate types of pipe and fittings can
proof testing in accordance with para. 2-2.2.2. vary between manufacturers. The designer should under-
stand the construction of components when applying
elastic properties for a piping system.
(b) Overstrained Behavior. Strain and displacements
shall be controlled by system layout, proper support,
special joints, and/or expansion devices (see para. 2-4.7).

22
 ASME NM.2-2022

2-4.2.3 Cold Spring. Cold spring is the intentional (a) The analysis approach herein uses allowable stress
deformation of piping during assembly to produce a envelopes, which relate the allowable axial stress to the
desired initial displacement and stress. Cold spring is applied hoop stress.
beneficial in that it serves to balance the magnitude of (b) See ASME NM.3.3 for allowable stresses of listed
stress under initial and extreme displacement conditions. laminate types for use with Design Method A (see
Cold spring is an acceptable means of controlling para. 2-2.3.2).
thermal loads and displacements in FRP systems.
2-4.3.5 Dimensions. Nominal thicknesses and outside
However, special consideration should be given to the
diameters of pipe and fittings shall be used in pipe stress
design and system layout when cold spring is present,
analysis calculations. Corrosion barrier shall be included
including loads on connections. Consideration should
for weight and thermal considerations although it is not
be given to the effects of construction methods and en-
considered a structural component.
vironmental conditions on the accuracy of cold-spring
design. Cold spring shall not be used for alignment of 2-4.4 Analysis
the piping system during construction.
2-4.4.1 Analysis Not Required. No formal analysis is
2-4.3 Properties for Pipe Stress Analysis required for a piping system that meets any of the
following conditions:
Paragraphs 2-4.3.1 through 2-4.3.5 deal with properties
(a) The piping system duplicates or replaces, without
of FRP piping materials and their application in piping
change to materials, method of construction, system
stress analysis.
arrangement, and operating conditions, a system oper-
2-4.3.1 Thermal Expansion Data. ASME NM.3.3 lists ating with a successful service record.
coefficients of thermal expansion for FRP materials. (b) The piping system is nearly identical in system
More precise values in some instances may be obtained arrangement, piping materials, and operating conditions
from manufacturers of components. If these values are to to an existing system that can readily be judged adequate
be used in stress analysis, the thermal displacements shall by comparison with previously analyzed systems.
be determined as stated in para. 2-4.4. (c) The piping system is laid out with an inherent flex-
ibility that can be judged adequate for the given design
2-4.3.2 Modulus of Elasticity. ASME NM.3.3 lists
conditions, or uses joining methods or expansion joint
representative data on the tensile and flexural
devices, or a combination of these methods, that are
modulus of elasticity, E, in the hoop and axial directions
intended to absorb the majority of thermal displacement
for the defined FRP laminate types as obtained under
throughout the piping system and are selected and
typical laboratory rate of strain (loading) conditions.
installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
More precise values of the short-term and working esti-
As FRP piping has a lower stiffness than metallic piping,
mates of effective moduli of elasticity for given conditions
expansion joints with lower spring rates for ease of acti-
of loading and temperature may be obtained from the
vation shall be selected.
manufacturer. The modulus can also vary with the
fiber content and orientation and type of resin. Addition- 2-4.4.2 Methods of Analysis. For a piping system that
ally, the modulus can vary with the orientation of the does not meet the criteria of para. 2-4.4.1, the designer
specimen during testing, especially for laminates with fila- shall demonstrate that the piping system is adequate
ment-wound reinforcement. for the service by simplified, approximate, or comprehen-
sive piping system analysis, using a method that can be
2-4.3.3 Poisson’s Ratio. The Poisson’s ratio for FRP
shown to be valid for the specific case. Any analysis shall
pipe and fittings can vary depending on a number of
consider the effects of all sustained loads (weight, pres-
factors, including type of resin, fiber content, orientation
sure, etc.) with and without thermal effects, and occasional
of the fiber reinforcement material, and temperature. For
loads (wind, seismic, etc.).
that reason, simplified formulas used in stress analysis for
(a) Simplified. The simplified analysis should include
metals are not generally valid for FRP. More precise values
consideration of the piping system’s flexibility and
in some instances may be obtained from component
thermal displacement. The analysis may be based on
manufacturers. Values for standard materials are listed
table or chart data, such as for spans between supports
in ASME NM.3.3.
or cantilevered transitions. The analysis should determine
2-4.3.4 Allowable Stresses. FRP is an orthotropic the minimum number of anchor points needed to ensure
material with properties that are not necessarily the system stability. A free-floating, anchor-free system shall
same in the axial and hoop directions. However, Type I not be used. The simplified analysis should also determine
and Type II FRP laminates are considered quasi-isotropic a regular occurrence of guide restraint to ensure reason-
materials, since they typically have the same properties in able lateral support and stability. A piping system suitable
the hoop and axial directions. Proper analysis of FRP for a simplified analysis is characterized by the following
piping shall account for differences in material properties. features:

23
 ASME NM.2-2022

(1) The piping system displays reasonable flexibility 2-4.4.4 Pipe Stress Analysis Requirements ð22Þ
with areas of isolated restraint, which would lead to a pure
(a) Pipe Stress Equations
compressive stress condition between rigid restraints,
(1) Hoop Stress. For each load case, the applied hoop
anchors, or terminal points.
stress, SH, shall be calculated using eq. (2-4-1):
(2) There is limited opportunity for thermal dis-
placement, i.e., the differential temperature is less than ÄÅ ÉÑ2
ÅÅ Ñ
40°C (75°F) between the installation temperature and ÅÅ mPDm (iihMi)2 + (iohMo)2 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ 2T + ÑÑ
ÅÅÇ ÑÑ
the minimum or maximum exposure temperature. s Zs
SH = Ö (2-4-1)
(b) Approximate. A piping system that is suitable for an 2
ii M y
approximate evaluation is characterized by the following +jjjj t t zzzz
features: k Zs {
(1) There is a significant differential temperature
between the installation temperature and the mini- where
mum or maximum exposure temperature. Dm = mean diameter of component, mm (in.)
(2) The piping system complies with either of the x = Do – TS
following: Do = outside diameter of component, mm (in.)
(-a) The piping system is substantially restrained iih = stress intensification factor, hoop stress due to
by periodic rigid anchors that maintain the straight in-plane moment (see Mandatory Appendix III)
lengths of piping in a pure tensile or compressive ioh = stress intensification factor, hoop stress due
stress condition between anchor points, isolating terminal to out-of-plane moment (see Mandatory
points and changes in direction from excessive strain. Appendix III)
(-b) The piping system includes flexible joints or it = torsional stress intensification factor (see
other displacement-absorbing devices that are located in a Mandatory Appendix III)
manner to ensure a minimized stress state in the piping m = pressure stress multiplier (see Mandatory
system. Where flexible joints and displacement-absorbing Appendix III)
devices are implemented, sufficient anchor and guide Mi = in-plane moment, N∙mm (in.-lb)
supports shall be incorporated to ensure that the Mo = out-of-plane moment, N∙mm (in.-lb)
piping movement is directed into the flexible joint. Mt = torsional moment, N∙mm (in.-lb)
(c) Comprehensive. A comprehensive piping system P = pressure, MPa (psi)
analysis shall be performed using a formal pipe stress TL = corrosion barrier thickness, mm (in.)
analysis program. The comprehensive piping system TN = nominal thickness of component, mm (in.)
analysis shall include the following elements: x = TS + TL
(1) an accurate model of the piping system routing TS = structural wall thickness of component, mm (in.)
and all components, including weights and dimensions. x = TN − TL
(2) actual orthotropic material properties that ZS = section modulus, mm3 (in.3)
concisely represent the specified piping materials and x = π[(Do4 − (Do − 2TS)4]/32Do
construction, including resin type, wind angle, and
glass content. Material properties may be based on histor- (2) Longitudinal Stress (Axial Tensile Stress). For each
ical test data or calculated properties. load case, the applied longitudinal stress (axial stress), SA,
(3) stress intensification factors and flexibility shall be calculated using eq. (2-4-2a), eq. (2-4-2b), eq.
factors based on tested data or calculated values. (2-4-3a), or eq. (2-4-3b), as applicable.
(4) estimated stiffness of pipe supports and (-a) For All Piping Systems Other Than Restrained
supporting structures. Piping Systems
(5) estimated stiffness of terminal points and PDis 2 F
connecting equipment. Results shall be carefully evalu- (-1) For + ax 0
Do2 Dis 2 As
ated to verify that they are realistic for the FRP system.
(6) an evaluation of all design conditions, including
ÅÄÅ Ñ ÑÉ 2
occasional loading and transient events, if known. ÅÅ PD 2 (iiMi)2 +(ioMo)2 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ is F
+ ax + ÑÑ
Allowable stresses values shall be based on the ÅÅ 2 ÑÑ
ÅÅ Do Dis2 As Zs ÑÑ
methods defined in para. 2-2.3. SA = ÅÇ Ö (2-4-2a)
2
ii M y
2-4.4.3 Basic Assumptions and Requirements. The + jjjj t t zzzz
designer shall treat the piping system as a whole. The k Zs {
designer shall recognize the significance of all parts of
the line and of all restraints introduced to reduce PDis 2 F
moments and forces on equipment or small branch (-2) For + ax < 0
Do2 Dis 2 As
lines, and the restraint introduced by support friction.

24
 ASME NM.2-2022

ÄÅ ÉÑ 2
ÅÅ Ñ Restrained piping systems shall also be checked for
ÅÅ PDis 2 Fax (iiMi)2 +(ioMo)2 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ column-type buckling in accordance with Nonmandatory
ÅÅ D 2 D 2 + A ÑÑ
ÅÅ o is s Zs ÑÑ Appendix A.
SA = Ç Ö (2-4-2b)
2 (b) Acceptance Criteria
ii M y
+ jjjj t t zzzz (1) Stresses Due to Sustained Loads. The stresses due
k Zs { to sustained loads such as pressure and weight shall meet
the following criteria:
where SH k1SH max
As = area, mm2 (in.2)
SA k1SA allow
x = π[Do2 − Dis2]/4
Dis = inside diameter of structural wall, mm (in.)
where
x = Do – 2TS
k1 = 1.0 for sustained loads excluding the effects of
Fax = axial force (excluding pressure), N (lb)
displacement loads such as those induced by
ii = stress intensification factor, axial stress due to in-
thermal displacement
plane moment (see Mandatory Appendix III)
x = 1.1 for sustained loads including the effects of
io = stress intensification factor, axial stress due to
displacement loads such as those induced by
out-of-plane moment (see Mandatory
thermal displacement and settlement
Appendix III)
SAallow = allowable longitudinal stress, MPa (psi). The
allowable longitudinal stress depends on the
(-b) For Restrained Piping Systems
PD F
magnitude of the applied hoop stress, SH (see
m E
(-1) For HAT AT × + ax 0 para. 2-2.3).
EHT 2Ts As
SHmax = maximum allowable hoop stress (see
para. 2-2.3), MPa (psi)
SA =
ÄÅ ÉÑ2 (2) Stresses Due to Occasional Loads. The total stress
ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ (iiMi)2 + (ioMo)2 ÑÑ
ÅÅ HAT EAT × PDm + Fax + ÑÑ (2-4-3a) due to sustained loads and occasional loads such as wind
ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅÅ EHT 2Ts As Zs ÑÑÑ or seismic shall meet the following criteria:
Ç Ö
2 SH k2SH max
ii M y
+ jjjj t t zzzz SA k2SAallow
k Zs {

E PD F
where
m
(-2) For HAT AT × + ax < 0 k2 = 1.20 for occasional loads acting for no more than
EHT 2Ts As
8 h at any one time and no more than 800 h/yr
x = 1.33 for occasional loads acting for no more than
SA =
1 h at any one time and no more than 80 h/yr
ÄÅ ÉÑ2 x = 1.33 for pressure testing and leak testing loads
ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ EAT PDm Fax (iiMi)2 + (ioMo)2 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ (2-4-3b)
ÅÅ HAT E × 2T + A ÑÑ
ÅÅ HT s s Zs ÑÑÑ It is not necessary to consider wind loads, seismic
ÅÇ Ö
2 loads, or testing loads as acting concurrently.
ii M y
+ jjjj t t zzzz (c) Additional Design Requirements
k Zs { (1) Displacement Stresses. Stresses due to displace-
ment strains such as those induced by thermal displace-
where ment shall be calculated using the modulus of elasticity at
EAT = axial modulus of elasticity, MPa (psi) ambient temperature or the modulus of elasticity at design
EHT = hoop modulus of elasticity, MPa (psi) temperature, whichever is higher.
νHAT = Poisson’s ratio for hoop stress causing longitu- (2) Thermal Displacement. Thermal expansion shall
dinal strain be calculated using the maximum exposure temperature
and the minimum expected installation temperature.
Internal pressure produces tensile stress in a Thermal contraction shall be calculated using the
restrained piping system and therefore reduces the minimum exposure temperature and the maximum
compressive axial stress when there are positive expected installation temperature.
changes in temperature. The possibility of low pressure (3) Elongation Due to Pressure. Elongation of the
during such load cases shall be considered. piping due to pressure shall be considered in the analysis.
The strain due to pressure elongation shall be calculated
using eq. (2-4-4):

25
 ASME NM.2-2022

SAp PDm 2-5 PIPING SUPPORT

l= HAT (2-4-4)
EAT 2TSEHT
2-5.1 General
where
The design of supporting structures (not covered by this
EAT = longitudinal (axial) modulus of elasticity, MPa
Standard) and of pipe-supporting elements shall be based
(psi)
on all concurrently acting loads transmitted into such
EHT = hoop modulus of elasticity, MPa (psi)
supports. These loads, defined in section 2-1, include
SAp = longitudinal (axial) stress due to pressure, MPa
weight effects and loads introduced by service pressures
(psi)
and temperatures, vibration, wind, earthquake, shock, and
εl = longitudinal (axial) strain due to pressure
displacement strain (see para. 2-4.2.1).
νHAT = Poisson’s ratio for hoop stress causing longitu-
The weight of liquid may be excluded from the weight
dinal strain
calculations for piping containing gas or vapor if the
designer has taken specific precautions to prevent
2-4.5 Reactions liquid from entering the piping, and if the piping is not
Reaction forces and moments are used in design of to be subjected to hydrostatic testing at initial construc-
restraints and supports for a piping system, and in evalua- tion or subsequent inspections.
tion of the effects of piping displacements on connected 2-5.1.1 Layout Considerations
equipment. See para. 2-4.4.2 for analysis methods to
determine reactions. (a) The layout and design of piping and its supporting
Where dynamic loads are identified, the piping shall be elements shall be directed toward preventing the
evaluated for those defined loads. Dynamic reactions due following:
to pumps or valve actions should be evaluated. Proper (1) piping stresses in excess of those permitted in
restraints shall be added if required by stress analysis. this Standard
(2) leakage at joints
2-4.6 Movements (3) excessive thrusts and moments on connected
equipment (such as pumps and turbines)
Special attention shall be given to movement (displace-
(4) excessive stresses in the supporting (or
ment or rotation) of piping with respect to supports and
restraining) elements
points of close clearance. Movements of the run pipe at the
(5) resonance with imposed or fluid-induced vibra-
junction of a small branch connection shall be considered
tions
in determining the need for flexibility in the branch pipe.
(6) excessive interference with thermal expansion
Large axial movements into a joined fitting can cause the
and contraction in piping that is otherwise adequately
pipe to peel when it is exposed to large displacements.
flexible
Torsional movements should be evaluated.
(7) unintentional disengagement of piping from its
supports
2-4.7 Means of Increasing Flexibility
(8) excessive distortion or sag of piping
Piping layout often provides adequate inherent flex- (9) excessive deflection of pipe-supporting elements
ibility through changes in direction, wherein displace- (b) Piping shall be supported, guided, and anchored in
ments produce chiefly bending and torsional strains of such a manner as to prevent damage to the piping. Point
low magnitude. The amount of tension or compression loads and narrow areas of contact between piping and
strain (which can produce larger reactions) usually is supports shall be avoided. Suitable padding shall be
small. However, due to FRP piping’s large coefficient of placed between piping and supports where damage to
expansion, large displacements are possible. piping may occur.
Where piping lacks inherent flexibility or is unbalanced, (c) Valves and equipment that may transmit excessive
additional flexibility may be provided by one or more of loads to the piping shall be independently supported to
the following means: elbows, loops, or offsets; flexible prevent such loads. The effects from the weight of auto-
joints; bellows expansion joints; or other devices permit- mated actuators at valves and other in-line components
ting angular, rotational, or axial movement. Suitable and from the cantilever moments created by the actuators
anchors, ties, or other devices shall be provided as nec- shall be evaluated in the piping and support system design.
essary to resist end forces produced by fluid pressure, The actuators shall be independently supported as
frictional resistance to movement, and other causes. needed.
(d) Piping manufacturer’s recommendations for
support should be considered.
(e) Pipe-supporting elements shall be designed to
accommodate the expected pipe movement at supporting
structures.

26
 ASME NM.2-2022

(f) Where there are long runs, the low modulus of the (c) Wood or other materials may be used for pipe-
material may be sufficient to accommodate axial expan- supporting elements, provided the supporting element
sion, thus eliminating the need for expansion joints. is properly designed, with consideration given to its
(g) FRP pipe shall not be used to support other piping strength, durability, and suitability for the intended envi-
unless agreed to by the owner. ronment.
(h) FRP piping should be adequately supported to (d) Attachments bonded to the piping shall be of a
ensure that the attachment of hoses at locations such material compatible with the piping and service. For
as utility or loading stations does not result in the pipe other requirements, see para. 2-5.6.2.
being pulled in a manner that could overstress the mate-
rial. 2-5.4 Threads
(i) Where grounding of the pipeline is required, addi- Screw threads shall conform to ASME B1.1 unless other
tional design may be needed to provide a proper path to threads are required for adjustment under heavy loads.
earth. Turnbuckles and adjusting nuts shall have the full length of
2-5.1.2 Analysis of Pipe Support Elements. In general, internal threads engaged. Any threaded adjustment shall
the location and design of pipe-supporting elements may be provided with a locknut, unless locked by other means.
be based on simple calculations and engineering judg-
ment. However, when a more refined analysis is required 2-5.5 Fixtures
and a piping analysis, which may include support stiffness, 2-5.5.1 Anchors and Guides
is performed, the stresses, moments, and reactions deter-
mined thereby shall be used in the design of supporting (a) A supporting element used as an anchor shall be
elements. designed to maintain an essentially fixed position.
(b) To protect terminal equipment or other (weaker)
2-5.2 Allowable Stress Values for Metallic Pipe portions of the system, restraints (such as anchors and
Support Elements guides) shall be provided where necessary to control
movement or to direct expansion into those portions
(a) Allowable stress values tabulated in MSS SP-58 may of the system that are designed to absorb them. The
be used for the base metallic materials of all parts of pipe- design, arrangement, and location of restraints shall
supporting elements. ensure that expansion joint movements occur in the direc-
(b) If allowable stress values for a metallic material tions for which the joint is designed. In addition to the
specification are not listed in MSS SP-58, allowable other thermal forces and moments, the effects of friction
stress values from ASME BPVC, Section II, Part D, in other supports of the system shall be considered in the
Tables 1A and 1B may be used, provided allowable design of such anchors and guides.
stress values in shear shall not exceed 80% of the (c) If expansion joints exist in the piping system, the
values listed and shall not exceed 160% of the values designer shall consider the effects of pressure thrusts
listed in bearing. If there are no stress values given in on anchors and guides.
BPVC Section II, Part D, Tables 1A and 1B, an allowable
stress value of 25% of the minimum tensile strength given 2-5.5.2 Inextensible Supports Other Than Anchors
in the material specification may be used. and Guides
(c) For a steel material of unknown specification, or of a (a) Supporting elements shall be designed to permit
specification not listed in MSS SP-58, an allowable stress the free movement of piping caused by expansion and
value of 30% of yield strength (0.2% offset) at room contraction.
temperature may be used. The yield strength shall be (b) Hangers include pipe and beam clamps, clips,
determined through a tensile test of a specimen of the brackets, rods, straps, chains, and other devices. They
material and shall be the value corresponding to 0.2% shall be proportioned for all required loads. Safe loads
permanent strain (offset) of the specimen. The allowable for threaded parts shall be based on the root area of
stress values for such materials shall not exceed 65.5 MPa the threads.
(9,500 psi). (c) Sliding supports (or shoes) and brackets shall be
designed to resist the forces caused by friction in addition
2-5.3 Materials
to the loads imposed by bearing. The dimensions of the
(a) Permanent supports and restraints shall be of support shall provide for the expected movement of the
material suitable for the service conditions. If steel is supported piping.
cold-formed to a centerline radius less than twice its thick-
ness, it shall be annealed or normalized after forming. 2-5.5.3 Springs
(b) Ductile and malleable iron may be used for pipe and (a) Spring supports shall be designed to exert a
beam clamps, hanger flanges, clips, brackets, and swivel supporting force, at the point of attachment to the
rings. pipe, equal to the load as determined by weight

27
 ASME NM.2-2022

balance calculations. They shall be provided with means to 2-5.8 Support Spacing
prevent misalignment, buckling, or eccentric loading of
the springs, and to prevent unintentional disengagement Supports shall be spaced to avoid excessive sag or defor-
of the load. mation at the design temperature and within the design
(b) The designer shall consider the variation of load life of the piping system. Reduction in the modulus of elas-
from empty to full fluid conditions. Means shall be ticity with increasing temperature and creep of material
provided to prevent overstressing by the spring supports with time shall be considered, when applicable. The coef-
due to excessive deflections. It is recommended that all ficient of thermal expansion shall be considered in the
spring supports be provided with limit stops to design and location of supports. See Nonmandatory
prevent overstressing the pipe in its empty condition. Appendix A.

2-5.5.4 Hydraulic Supports. A hydraulic cylinder may 2-5.9 Pipe-Support Contact Surface
be used to give a constant supporting force. Safety devices 2-5.9.1 General
and stops shall be provided to support the load in case of
hydraulic failure. (a) Supports in all cases should have sufficient axial
length to support the piping without causing significant
2-5.6 Structural Attachments localized stress and should be lined with an elastomer or
other suitable soft material. The minimum saddle axial
External and internal attachments to piping shall be
length should be the greater of one nominal pipe diameter
designed so that they will not cause undue flattening
or 75 mm (3 in.) unless another axial length is justified by
of the pipe, excessive localized bending stresses, or
analysis. Large loads shall be addressed on a case-by-case
harmful thermal gradients in the pipe wall. It is important
basis for design of saddle length along the axis of the pipe.
that attachments be designed to minimize stress concen-
(b) Clamping forces, where applied, shall not cause
tration, particularly in cyclic services.
significant localized stress. Manufacturing tolerances
2-5.6.1 Nonintegral Attachments. Nonintegral attach- for the outer diameter should be provided by the pipe
ments, in which the reaction between the piping and the manufacturer. All clamps shall have an elastomeric
attachment is by contact, include clamps, slings, cradles, U- liner to protect the pipe.
bolts, saddles, straps, and clevises. All metal attachments (c) Supports should be located on straight pipe sections
to the pipe shall be cushioned with an elastomeric liner. If rather than at fittings or joints.
the weight of a vertical pipe is supported by a clamp, the
2-5.9.2 Supports Permitting Pipe Movement. Any
clamp shall be located below a flange, a fitting, or shear
support that allows movement inside the support shall
collars bonded to the pipe.
have wear protection for the pipe in the form of
2-5.6.2 Integral Attachments. Integral attachments, saddles, wear-resistant materials, or sheet metal.
such as anchors, lugs, shoes, shear collars, and stanchions,
2-5.9.3 Anchors and Axial Stops. The anchor and axial
are components that are bonded to the piping. Integral
stops shall be capable of transferring the required axial
attachments shall be of a compatible material [see
loads to the pipe without causing overstress of the FRP
para. 2-5.3(d) for material requirements]. Consideration
pipe material. Shear collars shall be placed on one or both
shall be given to the localized stresses induced in the
sides of 360-deg anchor clamps as required; the shear
piping component by bonding the integral attachment,
collar shall be equal in thickness to the outer diameter
and to the differential thermal displacement strains
of the clamp and long enough to develop shear strength
between the attachment and the component to which
to resist the anchor load.
it is attached.
Intermediate pads, integral reinforcement, complete
encirclement reinforcement, or other means of reinforce- 2-6 SPECIAL CRITERIA
ment bonded or built up on the piping may be used to Section 2-6 provides requirements, guidance, and rec-
distribute stresses. ommendations for specific service conditions.

2-5.7 Structural Connections 2-6.1 Chemical Environment and Erosive Services

The load from piping and pipe-supporting elements 2-6.1.1 Chemical Environment. The following consid-
(including restraints and braces) shall be suitably trans- erations shall be given to the effect of the chemical envi-
mitted to a pressure vessel, building, platform, support ronment on the piping material:
structure, or foundation, or to other piping capable of (a) The FRP pipe materials shall be suitable for and
bearing the load without deleterious effects. compatible with the specific application.
(b) The FRP pipe material suppliers should be
consulted about the selection of materials.

28
 ASME NM.2-2022

(c) A wide body of knowledge in the form of both test to provide a high-level overview of what is required, iden-
results and actual case histories is available for the perfor- tify some potential pitfalls, and provide acceptable refer-
mance of specific materials in many chemical environ- ences for the design and installation of underground FRP
ments. piping.
(d) If the chemical environment is known to degrade
2-6.3.1 Design
the integrity of the piping materials over the life of the
piping system, additional consideration shall be given (a) The designer should consult AWWA M45, Chapter
to enhancing the construction of the liner and increasing 5, for the design of buried FRP pipe. The design of buried
the design factors of the piping. pipe shall account for
(1) external earth loads
2-6.1.2 Erosive Services. For services in which erosive (2) vehicular traffic loads designated by the Amer-
fluids come in contact with internal or external surfaces of ican Association of State Highway and Transportation Offi-
the pipe, consideration shall be given to enhancing the
cials (AASHTO)6 as axle loads HS-20 or HS-25, or similar
erosion resistance of the corrosion/erosion barrier by
vehicular loads designated by other applicable standards
(a) using alternative surfacing veils
(3) buoyant loads from high water table or local
(b) adding erosion-resistant fillers, such as silicon flooding
carbide, to the resin (4) surge pressures from operation
(c) increasing the thickness of the liner
(5) internal pressure
(d) reducing fluid velocities by increasing diameter
(6) frost line
and/or utilizing longer radius fittings for directional
(7) thermal expansion
changes and angled fittings for intersections (8) vacuum condition
(9) differential settlement
2-6.2 Compressed Gas Services
(b) Required information for proper design involves
2-6.2.1 Limitations of Use knowledge of the native earth in which the pipe will
(a) FRP piping should not be used in compressed gas be installed. ASTM D2487 may be used to classify the
services with a design pressure greater than 100 kPa (15 soil types for design purposes.
psig). (c) The design approach in AWWA M45 uses the HDB of
(b) For applications with a design pressure greater the pipe.
than 100 kPa (15 psig), special consideration shall be (1) For FRP pipe for which an HDB has not been
given to the risks associated with the release of established, buried pipe design shall take into account
process fluid and stored energy, including the potential a maximum strain or stress for the design conditions
for injury from fragments, shock waves, or other conse- being considered.
quences due to pressurized system failure. (2) The AWWA M45 equations shall be modified to
meet the criteria for the strain- or stress-limiting design.
2-6.2.2 Pneumatic Testing (d) Strain or stress limits, along with deflection limits,
shall be agreed upon between the supplier and the end
(a) Pneumatic testing shall be performed only when user.
one of the following conditions exists: (1) For corrosive applications, the strain of the liner
(1) Piping systems are to be used in services in which can be the limiting factor for overall design.
traces of the testing medium cannot be tolerated. (2) Each load case shall be clearly identified as occa-
(2) Liquids from a hydrostatic test could damage sional load or sustained load.
linings within the pipe. (e) When butt and strap jointing is used for assembly of
(3) Piping systems or supporting structures are so underground FRP piping, thrust blocks may not be
designed that the pipe cannot be filled with water. required.
(b) The test pressure and holding time shall be the (1) Thrust blocks or anchors may be used at connec-
same as the minimum requirements for hydrostatic tions to sumps, valves, or other control devices.
testing defined in section 6-3. (2) Underground piping connections to valves
(c) A risk assessment and appropriate pneumatic test should incorporate provisions to allow for maintenance
procedure shall be developed based on criteria outlined in and gasket replacement.
ASME PCC-2, Article 501. (f) A stress analysis of the buried piping system shall be
performed to demonstrate that the design strain or stress
2-6.3 Buried Piping
levels are not exceeded.
Design and installation of buried FRP pipe is well docu-
mented in AWWA M45 and in piping manufacturer litera-
ture. It is not the intent of this section to provide details or
step-by-step design and installation procedures but rather
6
AASHTO: www.transportation.org.

29
 ASME NM.2-2022

(1) The stress analysis should be used to determine (d) Underground joints not pressure tested prior to
which areas of the piping require additional reinforce- installation shall remain visible until after they have
ment to address high stresses, such as those near been hydrotested, and shall be examined during the test.
branch connections, tees, and elbows. (1) Long sections of pipe without joints may need to
(2) If the stress analysis determines that additional be buried to secure the pipeline and prevent it from
flexibility is required at branch connections, the pipe may moving during hydrotesting.
be wrapped with compressible material. (2) The hydrotest procedure shall address the provi-
(3) Flanged connections should not be used except in sions described in (1).
valve pits where they can be inspected and serviced as (e) Caution shall be exercised when installing under-
needed. Flanged connections may require a more ground pipe and when open trenches are present
robust design due to the bending and axial loads that during rainstorms.
are applied to the flanges. Analysis of these loads on NOTE: During rainstorms, the trenches can fill up and the empty
the flanges may be undertaken using the equivalent pres- pipe can lift out of the trenches, potentially damaging the pipe
sure analysis method or an alternative analysis method- and surrounding equipment.
ology.
(f) All trenching activities shall follow safe excavation
2-6.3.2 Installation. The designer should refer to procedures to prevent collapse and maintain worker
AWWA M45, Chapter 6, for information on buried FRP safety.
pipe. The following installation requirements shall be (1) Environmental conditions shall be considered
considered to ensure successful performance of the when laying and joining pipe.
piping system: (2) Procedures outlined in AWWA M45 shall be
(a) The bedding, embedment, compaction, and backfill followed to prevent damage to pipe during installation.
used in installation shall comply with that used for the (g) A tracer wire on the top of the FRP pipe should be
design and analysis. installed prior to final burial.
(b) A detailed outline of the requirements for founda- NOTE: The tracer wire will aid in locating the pipes at a later date
tion, haunches, embedment, and final backfill shall be and can help prevent damage to the pipe by external probes that
provided and followed. might otherwise be required to locate the pipe.
(c) During installation, personnel shall inspect the site (h) Where FRP pipe penetrates concrete valve boxes or
to confirm trench condition, haunch condition, compac- sumps, the pipe should be anchored using a water stop or
tion, and installed-pipe deflection. The parties responsible other suitable method.
for the installation shall maintain a written record of the (i) Consideration should be given to fitting structural
inspections and the findings. sleeves around buried pipes installed under roadways,
railways, and areas that are difficult access.

30
 ASME NM.2-2022

Chapter 3
Constituent Materials

3-1 GENERAL replacement is identical to the original in form, fit, and

function and that it satisfies the design requirements.
Chapter 3 states limitations and required qualifications (b) Substitution of Constituent Materials
for constituent materials based on their inherent proper- (1) Substitution of constituent materials shall
ties. Their use in piping shall be subject to requirements require verification by the manufacturer, to the satisfac-
and limitations in other parts of this Standard. tion of the designer and the owner, that the alternative
constituent material is a replacement in kind and function-
3-2 MATERIALS AND SPECIFICATIONS ally equivalent to the constituent materials on which the
original design was based.
3-2.1 Listed Constituent Materials (2) A functionally equivalent determination shall
Listed constituent materials are shown in Table 3-2.1-1. require the following:
Quality assurance procedures related to these constituent (-a) Fitness for Use. The constituent material shall
raw materials may be found in Mandatory Appendices V be deemed suitable for use via testing or experience, or
and VI. judged acceptable by a qualified individual.
(-b) Constituent Material Supplier Data. Consti-
3-2.2 Unlisted Constituent Materials tuent (cured) physical property data shall be at least
90% of the original constituent material data.
Constituent materials not listed in Table 3-2.1-1 may be
(-c) Verification. A functionally equivalent deter-
used provided they conform to a published specification
mination shall be verified by a short-term test (e.g.,
covering chemistry, physical and mechanical properties,
ASTM D1599) using a construction identical to the
and quality control, and otherwise meet the requirements
construction originally built to verify component proper-
of this Standard.
ties. The resulting values shall be at least 90% of those
3-2.3 Unknown Constituent Materials originally determined.
(-d) Record Keeping. The manufacturer shall main-
Materials of unknown specification shall not be used for tain records substantiating the substitution of constituent
pressure-piping components. materials.

3-2.4 Constituent Material Changes 3-3 TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS

(a) General The designer shall verify that materials meeting all
(1) Changes to constituent materials, procedures, other requirements of this Standard are suitable for
and processing-aid materials used in the manufacturing service throughout the design temperature range, the
of component products shall not require complete requal- operating temperature range, and any anticipated
ification as long as they are “replacement in kind.” temperature excursions.
(2) To qualify a material or procedure as a replace-
ment in kind, the manufacturer shall show that the 3-3.1 General
(a) Listed Materials
(1) Upper and lower temperature limits for listed
Table 3-2.1-1 materials are provided in Table 3-3.1-1 and detailed in
Listed Constituent Materials para. 3-3.2.
(2) Listed materials whose temperature limits lie
Quality Assurance
outside those in Table 3-3.1-1 may be used, provided
Constituent Material Appendix Reference
all of the following conditions are satisfied:
E or E–CR glass See Mandatory Appendix V
(-a) Test results shall be provided showing that
Unsaturated polyester resins See Mandatory Appendix VI the physical and mechanical properties meet or exceed
Vinyl ester resins See Mandatory Appendix VI the design requirements.

31
 ASME NM.2-2022

Table 3-3.1-1
Temperature Limits for Acceptable Polymeric Materials
Temperature Limits
Polymeric Material [Note (1)] Lower Upper [Note (2)]
Unsaturated polyester resin (polymer) system −40°C (−40°F) G′Tg − 17°C (30°F) or HDT − 17°C (30°F)
Vinyl ester resin (polymer) system −40°C (−40°F) G′Tg − 17°C (30°F) or HDT − 17°C (30°F)
Epoxy resin (polymer) system (amine or anhydride) −40°C (−40°F) G′Tg − 22°C (40°F) or HDT − 22°C (40°F)
GENERAL NOTE: The requirements in this Table are in addition to the requirements of the applicable material specification.
NOTES:
(1) See para. 3-3.2 for limitations on resin systems.
(2) See para. 3-3.2 for definitions of G′Tg and HDT, and para. 3-3.3 for determination of G′Tg and HDT.

(-b) The use of such materials is not prohibited 3-3.2.1 Temperature Limits for Polyesters and Vinyl
elsewhere in this Standard. Esters. If more than 3% (by weight) of any combination of
(-c) The user’s acceptance of the material shall be non-styrene materials is added to the resin system that
documented prior to its use. was not provided by the resin vendor, the G′Tg or HDT of
(b) Unlisted Materials. Materials other than those the resin system shall be determined, and Table 3-3.1-1
meeting the requirements of (a)(1) and (a)(2) shall be may be used to determine the upper temperature limit.
considered unlisted materials and may be used provided Styrene additions up to 3% (by weight) may be made
they satisfy all of the following requirements: without G′Tg or HDT testing.
(1) Unlisted materials shall be certified by the mate-
3-3.2.2 Temperature Limits for Epoxy Resin Systems.
rial manufacturer as satisfying the requirements of a spec-
If more than 2% of any combination of materials is added
ification listed in the applicable section of ASME NM.2 or
to the resin system, or the stoichiometric ratios vary by
the applicable section of the ASME B31 Code for Pressure
more than 2% from those recommended by the resin
Piping.
(polymer) vendor, the G′T g or HDT of the resin
(2) The allowable stresses of the unlisted materials
(polymer) system shall be determined and
shall be determined in accordance with the requirements
Table 3-3.1-1 shall be used to determine the upper
of para. 2-2.3.
temperature limit.
(3) Unlisted materials shall be qualified for service
within a stated range of minimum and maximum tempera- 3-3.3 Determination of Temperature Limits
tures based on data associated with successful experience,
tests, or analysis, or a combination thereof. G′Tg or HDT is the onset of loss of modulus with a rise in
(4) The designer shall document the user’s accep- temperature. The G′Tg or HDT for polymeric materials
tance of the unlisted material for use. may be determined as follows:
(5) All other requirements of this Standard are satis- (a) G′Tg shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
fied. D4065.
(b) HDT shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
3-3.2 Temperature Limits of Listed and Unlisted D648. When ASTM D648 is used, specimen thickness shall
Polymeric Materials be a nominal 3.2 mm (1 ∕8 in.) with a loading of 1.82 MPa
(264 psi).
Table 3-3.1-1 shall be used for polymeric materials for If the both G′Tg and HDT for the polymeric system are
which the elastic or storage modulus glass transition available from the resin (polymer) provider, then either of
temperature (G′T g ) or heat deflection temperature the two values may be used for determining temperature
(HDT) has been supplied by the resin (polymer) provider. limits per Table 3-3.1-1.

32
 ASME NM.2-2022

Chapter 4
Standards for Piping Components

4-1 DIMENSIONS AND RATINGS OF COMPONENTS 4-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONFORMANCE

4-1.1 Listed Piping Components 4-3.1 Manufacturing Quality Assurance

(a) Specifications for piping components are listed in The degree of cure and the reinforcement content shall
Table 4-1.1-1, and related test methods are listed in Table be verified using the appropriate ASTM standard (see
4-1.1-2. (Procurement information is provided in Table Table 4-1.1-2).
4-1.1-3.)
(b) The pressure–temperature ratings of listed compo- 4-3.2 Final Component Inspection
nents shall meet the requirements of para. 2-2.2.1. (a) Visual and dimensional inspection for each compo-
(c) When conflicts exist between the specific require- nent shall be performed per the requirements of the
ments of this Standard and those of referenced standards appropriate ASME specification (see Table 4-1.1-1).
or specifications, the requirements of this Standard shall (b) Absent an inspection criteria in the component
take precedence. specification or other agreement with the owner, the
inner surface, interior layer, and structural layer of
4-1.2 Unlisted Piping Components
each component shall comply with the Level 2 standard
Piping components not manufactured in compliance defined in Table 4-3.2-1.
with the specifications listed in Table 4-1.1-1 shall
(a) conform to the applicable provisions of 4-3.3 Labeling
para. 2-2.2.2 Components shall be labelled at least once in such a
(b) meet the pressure design requirements described manner that the information remains legible under
in para. 2-2.3.3 or para. 2-2.3.4 normal handling and installation practices. Components
(c) meet the mechanical strength requirements shall be labelled with ASME NM.2-X, nominal pipe size,
described in para. 2-2.3.6 design pressure, and manufacturer's name or trademark,
where X represents the design method for the component,
4-1.3 Threads
i.e., A, B, C, or D as defined in para. 2-2.3. Components may
(a) The dimensions of piping connection threads not also be marked according to the requirements associated
otherwise covered by a governing component standard with the applicable component specifications listed in
or specification shall conform to the requirements of Table 4-1.1-1.
the applicable specification listed in Table 4-1.1-1.
(b) When conflicts exist between the specific require- 4-3.4 Conformance
ments of this Standard and those of referenced standards (a) If requested, the manufacturer shall certify that the
and specifications, the requirements of this Standard shall material conforms to the applicable specification. The
take precedence. certification shall consist of a copy of the manufacturer’s
test report or a statement (accompanied by a copy of the
4-2 REFERENCES test results) that the material has been sampled, tested,
The specifications listed in Table 4-1.1-1 contain refer- and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the
ences to codes, standards, and specifications not listed in specification.
Table 4-1.1-1. Such unlisted codes, standards, and speci- (b) Each certification furnished as described in (a) shall
fications shall be used only in the context of the listed be signed by an authorized agent of the manufacturer.
specifications in which they appear. (c) When original identity of the material cannot be
established, certification shall be based only on the
sampling procedure provided by the applicable specifica-
tion.

33
 ASME NM.2-2022

Table 4-1.1-1
Component Specifications
Designation Title
ASME SC-582 Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment
ASME SD-1763 Specification for Epoxy Resins
ASME SD-2517 Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings
ASME SD-2996 Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
ASME SD-2997 Specification for Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
ASME SD-3517 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe
ASME SD-3754 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe
ASME SD-4024 Specification for Machine Made “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
ASME SD-4161 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASME SD-5421 Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
ASME SD-5677 Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Pipe Fittings, Adhesive Bonded Joint
Type, for Aviation Jet Fuel Lines
ASME SD-5685 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe Fittings
ASME SD-6041 Specification for Contact-Molded “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Corrosion Resistant Pipe and
Fittings
ASME SF-477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASME SF-913 Specification for Thermoplastic Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASME SF-1173 Specification for Thermosetting Resin Fiberglass Pipe Systems to Be Used for Marine Applications

AWWA C950 Fiberglass Pressure Pipe

AWWA M45 Fiberglass Pipe Design
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) See ASME NM.3.2 for the ASME specifications.
(b) See Table 4-1.1-3 for procurement information.

34
 ASME NM.2-2022

Table 4-1.1-2
Test Methods and Other Standards ð22Þ

Designation Title
ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures

ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN, UNR, and UNJ Thread Forms)
ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B18.21.1 Washers: Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)
ASME B31 ASME Code for Pressure Piping
B31.1 Power Piping
B31.3 Process Piping
B31.4 Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquids and Slurries
B31.5 Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
B31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
B31.9 Building Services Piping
ASME BPVC ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Section II Materials, Part D — Properties
Section III Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components; Division I — Subsection ND, Class 3 Components
Section X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
ASME NM.3.2 Nonmetallic Materials, Part 2 — Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Material Specifications
ASME NM.3.3 Nonmetallic Materials, Part 3 — Properties
ASME PCC-1 Guidelines for Pressure Boundary Bolted Flange Joint Assembly
ASME PCC-2 Repair of Pressure Equipment and Piping
ASME RTP-1 Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion-Resistant Equipment

ASQ Z1.4 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes

ASTM C581 Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service
ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D648 Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
ASTM D695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
ASTM D696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C With a
Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials
ASTM D883 Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics
ASTM D1598 Standard Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant Internal Pressure
ASTM D1599 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
ASTM D1600 Standard Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plastics
ASTM D2105 Standard Test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
[Note (1)] Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Tube
ASTM D2143 Standard Test Method for Cyclic Pressure Strength of Reinforced, Thermosetting Plastic Pipe
ASTM D2290 Standard Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate
Loading
ASTM D2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D2563 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
ASTM D2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins
ASTM D2924 Standard Test Method for External Pressure Resistance of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Pipe
ASTM D2925 Standard Test Method for Beam Deflection of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe
Under Full Bore Flow

35
 ASME NM.2-2022

Table 4-1.1-2
Test Methods and Other Standards (Cont’d)
Designation Title
ASTM D2992 Standard Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3039/D3039M Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials
ASTM D3567 Standard Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin)
Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3681 Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Pipe in a Deflected Condition
ASTM D4065 Standard Practice for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Properties: Determination and Report of Procedures
ASTM D5083 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Reinforced Thermosetting Plastics Using Straight-Sided
Specimens
ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
ASTM F336 Standard Practice for Design and Construction of Nonmetallic Enveloped Gaskets for Corrosive Service
ASTM F412 Standard Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

NBIC National Board Inspection Code

PFI ES-3 Fabricating Tolerances

GENERAL NOTE: See Table 4-1.1-3 for procurement information.

NOTE: (1) See Nonmandatory Appendix B for alternative requirements.

Table 4-1.1-3
Procurement Information
Organization Website
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) www.asce.org

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) www.asme.org

American Society for Quality (ASQ) www.asq.org

ASTM International www.astm.org

American Water Works Association (AWWA) www.awwa.org

Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS) www.msshq.org

National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBIC) www.nationalboard.org

Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI) www.pfi-institute.org

36
 Table 4-3.2-1
Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria ð22Þ

Maximum Size and Cumulative Sum of Imperfections Allowable [After Repair. See General Notes (a)
Definition of Visual Inspection Levels and (b). Imperfections Subject to Cumulative Sum Limitation Are Highlighted With an Asterisk.]
(to Be Specified by User or User’s Agent): Interior Layer
Level (1) = Critically Corrosion Resistant Inner Surface Veil(s), (~0.125 in. Thick) Mat or Structural Layer Balance of Laminate
Level (2) = Standard Corrosion Resistant Surfacing Mat Chopped-Strand Spray Layers (Including Outer Surface)
Imperfection Definition of
Name Imperfection Level (1) Level (2) Level (1) Level (2) Level (1) Level (2) Notes
Burned areas Showing evidence of None None None None None Never in more than Discoloration
thermal decomposition one ply and not only, never
through discoloration to exceed 16 in.2 delamination
or heavy distortion in any vessel or
decomposition
Chips (surface) Small pieces broken off an *1∕8 in. diameter max. *1∕8 in. diameter max. … … *1∕4 in. diameter or *1∕2 in. diameter or …
1
edge or surface by 30% of veil(s) by 50% of veil(s) ∕2 in. length max. 1 in. length max.
thickness max. thickness max. by 1∕16 in. deep by 1∕16 in. deep
Cracks Actual ruptures or None None None None None None Not to include
debond of portions areas to be
of the structure covered by
joints
Crazing Fine cracks at the None None … … Max. 1 in. long by Max. 2 in. long by …

37
1 1
(surface) surface of a laminate ∕64 in. deep, max. ∕64 in. deep, max.
density three in density five in
any square foot any square foot
ASME NM.2-2022

Delamination Separation of the layers None None None None None *None in three …
(internal) in a laminate plies adjacent to
interior layer,
none larger than
1 in.2 total area
Dry spot Area of surface where the None None … … None None …
(surface) reinforcement has not
been wetted with resin
Edge exposure Exposure of multiple None None … … None None Edges shall be
layers of the sealed with
reinforcing matrix two coats of
to the piping contents, resin or as
usually as a result of specified in the
shaping or cutting a engineering
section to be design (e.g.,
secondary bonded veil capping or
(interior of piping only) liner capping)
 Table 4-3.2-1
Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria (Cont’d)
Maximum Size and Cumulative Sum of Imperfections Allowable [After Repair. See General Notes (a)
Definition of Visual Inspection Levels and (b). Imperfections Subject to Cumulative Sum Limitation Are Highlighted With an Asterisk.]
(to Be Specified by User or User’s Agent): Interior Layer
Level (1) = Critically Corrosion Resistant Inner Surface Veil(s), (~0.125 in. Thick) Mat or Structural Layer Balance of Laminate
Level (2) = Standard Corrosion Resistant Surfacing Mat Chopped-Strand Spray Layers (Including Outer Surface)
Imperfection Definition of
Name Imperfection Level (1) Level (2) Level (1) Level (2) Level (1) Level (2) Notes
Foreign Particles included in a *3∕16 in. long max. by *1∕4 in. long max. by *1∕2 in. long max. by *1∕2 in. long max. by *Dime size, never to *Nickel size, never Shall be fully
inclusion laminate that are dia. or thickness dia. or thickness dia. or thickness dia. or thickness penetrate to penetrate resin wetted
foreign to its not more than not more than not more than not more than lamination to lamination to and
composition (not a 30% of veil(s) 50% of veil(s) 30% of 50% of lamination lamination encapsulated
minute speck of dust) thickness thickness interior layer interior layer
thickness thickness
Gaseous Air entrapment within, *Max. diameter 1∕16 *Max. diameter *Max. diameter *Max. diameter *Max. diameter *Max. diameter Shall not be
1 1 1 3 1
bubbles or on, or between plies in. by 30% of veil ∕16 in. by 50% of ∕8 in. ∕8 in. ∕16 in. ∕4 in. breakable with
blisters of reinforcement, 0.015 (s) thickness deep veil(s) thickness a sharp point
in. diameter and larger deep
Refer to User’s Specification for quantity limitations
Pimples Small, sharp, conical *Max. height or *Max. height or … … No limit Shall be fully
(surface) elevations on the diameter 1∕64 in. diameter 1∕32 in. resin filled and

38
surface of a laminate wetted;
generally,
captured
ASME NM.2-2022

sanding dust
Pit (surface) Small crater in the surface *1∕8 in. diameter max. *1∕8 in. diameter max. … … *1∕4 in. diameter *1∕4 in. diameter No fibers may be
of a laminate by 30% of veil(s) by 50% of veil(s) max. by 1∕16 in. max. by 3∕32 in. exposed
thickness max. thickness max. deep max. deep max.
Porosity Presence of numerous None more than 30% None more than … … None to fully penetrate the exterior No fibers may be
(surface) visible tiny pits of veil(s) thickness 50% of veil(s) gel coat or gel-coated exterior veil; exposed
(pinholes), thickness no quantity limit
approximate
dimension 0.005 in.
(for example, five in
any square inch)
Scratches Shallow marks, grooves, *None *None … … *None more than *None more than No fibers may be
(surface) furrows, or channels 6 in. long 12 in. long exposed
caused by improper
handling
 Table 4-3.2-1
Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria (Cont’d)
Maximum Size and Cumulative Sum of Imperfections Allowable [After Repair. See General Notes (a)
Definition of Visual Inspection Levels and (b). Imperfections Subject to Cumulative Sum Limitation Are Highlighted With an Asterisk.]
(to Be Specified by User or User’s Agent): Interior Layer
Level (1) = Critically Corrosion Resistant Inner Surface Veil(s), (~0.125 in. Thick) Mat or Structural Layer Balance of Laminate
Level (2) = Standard Corrosion Resistant Surfacing Mat Chopped-Strand Spray Layers (Including Outer Surface)
Imperfection Definition of
Name Imperfection Level (1) Level (2) Level (1) Level (2) Level (1) Level (2) Notes
3 3
Wet blisters Rounded elevations of the *None over ∕16 in. *None over ∕16 in. … … No limit Shall be fully
(surface) surface, somewhat diameter by 1∕16 in. diameter by 1∕16 in. resin filled, not
resembling a blister in height in height drips loosely
on the human skin; glued to
not reinforced surface, which
are to be
removed
Wet-out Resin has failed to None None None None Dry mat or prominent and dry woven roving Split tests on
inadequate saturate reinforcing pattern not acceptable; discernible but cutouts may be
(particularly woven fully saturated woven pattern acceptable used to discern
roving) degree of
saturation on
reinforcing
layers

39
Wrinkles and Generally linear, abrupt Max. deviation 20% Max. deviation 20% … … Max. deviation 20% of wall or 1∕8 in., Not to cause a
creases changes in surface of wall or 1∕16 in., of wall or 1∕8 in., whichever is less cumulative
ASME NM.2-2022

plane caused by laps of whichever is less whichever is less linear defect

reinforcing layers, (outside defect
irregular mold shape, adding to
or Mylar overlap inside defect)
Allowable Maximum allowable in 3 5 3 5 5 5 …
cumulative any square foot
sum Maximum allowable in 15 20 20 30 30 40 …
of highlighted any square yard
imperfections
Maximum The maximum allowable 3% 10% 3% 10% 3% to structural, 10% to structural, Debond tests
% repairs area of repairs made no limit to outer no limit to outer required prior
in order to pass surface repairs surface repairs to inner
visual inspection surface repairs
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Above acceptance criteria apply to condition of laminate after repair.
(b) Noncatalyzed resin is not permissible to any extent in any area of the laminate.
(c) See Nonmandatory Appendix C for guidance on repairs.
 ASME NM.2-2022

Chapter 5
Fabrication, Assembly, and Erection

5-1 GENERAL (9) acceptance criteria for the completed test

assembly
Manufactured FRP piping materials and components (c) A separate BPS is required when one or any combi-
are assembled and joined by one or more of the nation of the following thermoset resins is used:
methods covered in this Chapter. The materials used (1) polyester
shall be as defined in Chapter 3. Only manufacturing (2) vinyl ester
processes as defined in Chapter 1 shall be used. (3) epoxy

5-2 BONDING 5-2.2.2 Procedure Qualification by Others. Subject to

the specific approval of the Inspector, a BPS qualified by an
Bonding shall conform to paras. 5-2.1 through 5-2.6 and organization other than the employer may be used
shall comply with other applicable requirements of this provided
Standard. (a) the Inspector verifies that the proposed qualified
BPS has been prepared and executed by a responsible
5-2.1 Bonding Responsibility recognized organization with expertise in the field of
Each employer is responsible for the bonding done by bonding
its personnel and, except as provided in paras. 5-2.2 and (b) by signature, the employer accepts as its own both
5-2.3, shall conduct the required performance qualifica- the BPS and Procedure Qualification Record
tion tests to qualify the Bonding Procedure Specifications (c) the employer currently employs at least one bonder
(BPSs) and bonders. who, while working for the employer, has satisfactorily
passed a performance qualification test using the
5-2.2 Bonding Qualifications proposed qualified BPS
5-2.2.1 Qualification Requirements 5-2.2.3 Performance Qualification by Others.
Without the Inspector’s specific approval, an employer
(a) Qualification of the BPS to be used and of the
shall not accept a performance qualification test made
bonders’ performance is required. Qualification of a
by a bonder for another employer. If approval is given,
BPS requires that all tests and examinations specified
it is limited to work on piping using the same or equivalent
therein and in para. 5-2.2.5 be completed successfully.
BPS. An employer accepting such performance qualifica-
(b) In addition to the procedure for making the bonds,
tion tests shall obtain a copy of the performance qualifica-
the BPS shall include the following information:
tion test record from the previous employer showing the
(1) all materials and supplies (including storage re-
name of the employer by whom the bonder or bonding
quirements)
operator was qualified, the date of such qualification,
(2) tools and fixtures (including instructions for
and the date the bonder or bonding operator last
proper care and handling)
bonded pressure piping under such performance qualifi-
(3) environmental requirements (e.g., temperature,
cation.
humidity, and methods of measurement)
(4) joint preparation (e.g., joint type, cleanliness of 5-2.2.4 Qualification Records. The employer shall
joint surfaces, sealed cut surfaces, required surface maintain a self-certified record, available to the owner
profile) or owner’s agent and to the Inspector, showing the
(5) dimensional requirements and tolerances (e.g., BPS used, the bonders or bonding operators employed,
squareness of ends, gap width, offset and angular align- and the dates and results of BPS qualifications and
ment, strap thickness and width) bonding performance qualifications.
(6) required cure time
5-2.2.5 Qualification Tests. Tests shall be performed
(7) methods for protection of work
to qualify each BPS and the performance of each bonder.
(8) tests and examinations other than those required
Test assemblies shall conform to (a), and the test method
by para. 5-2.2.5
shall be in accordance with either (b) or (c).

40
 ASME NM.2-2022

(a) Test Assembly. The test assembly shall be fabricated (b) Glass Reinforcement
in accordance with the BPS and shall contain at least one of (1) The glass shall be checked to ensure that it is the
each different type of joint identified in the BPS. More than product ordered. The glass shall have proper labeling.
one test assembly may be prepared if necessary to accom- (2) The glass shall be dry and clean. It shall be kept in
modate all of the joint types or to ensure that at least one of its packaging container until time of use.
each joint type is loaded in both circumferential and lon- (c) Curing Agents
gitudinal directions. Test assemblies shall not have been (1) Curing agents shall be checked to ensure they are
pretested or pre-stress-relieved prior to first loadings and the products ordered. They shall have proper labeling.
testing. The size of pipe and fittings in the test assembly (2) Curing agents shall have no layering or separa-
shall be as follows: tion.
(1) When the largest size to be joined is DN 100
5-2.3.2 Equipment. Fixtures and tools used in making
(NPS 4) or smaller, the test assembly shall be the
joints shall be in such condition as to perform their func-
largest size to be joined.
tions satisfactorily. Fixtures, tools, equipment, and other
(2) When the largest size to be joined is greater than
devices used to hold or apply forces to the pipe shall func-
DN 100 (NPS 4) and less than or equal to DN 1200 (NPS
tion in a way that does not damage the pipe surface.
48), the size of the test assembly shall be between 25% and
100% of the largest piping size to be joined, but shall be a 5-2.4 Preparation for Bonding
minimum of DN 100 (NPS 4).
(3) When the largest size to be joined is greater than Preparation shall be defined in the BPS and shall specify
DN 1200 (NPS 48), the size of the test assembly shall be the following requirements at minimum:
agreed upon between the owner and the employer. (a) cutting
(b) Burst Test Method. The test assembly shall be (b) cleaning
subjected to a burst test in accordance with ASTM (c) preheat
D1599, Procedure B. The burst pressure shall be, as a (d) end preparation
minimum, 6 times pipe rated pressure. The time to (e) fit-up
burst may be extended as indicated in ASTM D1599.
(c) Hydrostatic Test Method. The test assembly shall be 5-2.5 Bonding Requirements
subjected to a hydrostatic pressure, PT , for not less than 5-2.5.1 General ð22Þ
1 h with no leakage or separation of joints.
(1) P T shall be 3 times design pressure for the (a) Production joints shall be made only in accordance
components being joined. with a written BPS that has been qualified in accordance
(2) The test shall be conducted so that the joint is with para. 5-2.2. Manufacturers of piping materials,
loaded in both the circumferential and longitudinal direc- bonding materials, and bonding equipment should be
tions. All joints tested shall be unrestrained. consulted in the preparation of the BPS. When joints
are accessible, an interior joint liner shall be considered.
5-2.2.6 Performance Requalification. Renewal of a For nonaccessible joints, the cut edges shall be sealed with
bonding performance qualification shall be performed two coats of resin or as specified in the engineering design
when (e.g., veil capping or liner capping).
(a) a bonder has not used the specific bonding process (b) Production joints shall be made only by qualified
for a period of 6 months or more, or bonders who have appropriate training or experience
(b) there is specific reason to question the individual’s in the use of the applicable BPS and have satisfactorily
ability to make bonds that meet the BPS passed a performance qualification test that was
performed in accordance with a qualified BPS.
5-2.3 Bonding Materials and Equipment (c) Each qualified bonder shall be assigned an identi-
5-2.3.1 Materials fication symbol. Unless otherwise specified in the engi-
neering design, each pressure-containing bond or
(a) Thermoset Resins adjacent area shall be stenciled or otherwise suitably
(1) The resin shall be checked to ensure that it is the marked with the identification symbol of the bonder. Iden-
product ordered. The resin shall be properly labeled. tification stamping shall not be used, and any marking
(2) The resin shall be within the manufacturer’s rec- paint or ink shall not be detrimental to the piping material.
ommended usable viscosity range. It shall be of normal In lieu of marking the bond, the bonder may be identified
color and clarity, and free from solid or gelled particles on appropriate quality control records.
and dirt as determined by visual examination. There shall (d) Qualification in one BPS shall not qualify a bonder
be no layering or separation of the resin. for any other bonding procedure.
(3) The resin shall be within the manufacturer’s (e) Longitudinal joints shall not be used.
specification for room-temperature gel time as deter-
mined by the manufacturer’s prescribed method.

41
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 5-2.5.2-1 the surfaces to be joined shall produce a continuous struc-

Adhesive Joint ture with them. Cuts shall be sealed to protect the rein-
forcement from the fluid service. See Figure 5-2.5.3-1. A
fabricated branch connection shall be made by inserting
the branch pipe into a hole in the run pipe and applying
reinforcement to the run pipe and attachment lay-up to
the branch pipe.

GENERAL NOTE: Figure is for illustrative purposes only. 5-2.6 Bonding Repair
Defective material, joints, and other workmanship that
fail to meet the requirements of this Standard and of the
engineering design shall be repaired or replaced, and the
5-2.5.2 For Adhesive Joints
new work shall be examined to the same extent and by use
(a) Procedure. Adhesive joints shall be made in accor- of the same methods and acceptance criteria as were
dance with the qualified BPS. Application of adhesive to required for the original work.
the surfaces to be joined and assembly of these surfaces
shall produce a continuous bond between them and shall 5-2.7 Seal Bonds
seal over all cuts to protect the reinforcement from the Threaded joints may be seal bonded only to prevent
fluid service. See Figure 5-2.5.2-1. leakage of a joint and only if it has been demonstrated
(b) Branch Connections. The cut edges of the hole in the that there will be no deleterious effect on the materials
run pipe shall be sealed with adhesive at the same time the bonded. The work shall be done by qualified bonders, and
saddle or branch pipe is bonded to the run pipe. all exposed threads shall be covered by the seal bond.
5-2.5.3 For Wrapped Joints. Wrapped joints shall be
made in accordance with the qualified BPS. Application of
plies of reinforcement saturated with catalyzed resin to

Figure 5-2.5.3-1
Wrapped Joints

(a) Overwrapped (b) Butt and Wrapped Joint (c) Overwrapped Tapered Joint
Bell-and-Spigot Joint

GENERAL NOTE: Figure is for illustrative purposes only.

42
 ASME NM.2-2022

5-3 ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION 5-3.2 Flanged and Mechanical Joints ð22Þ

5-3.1 Tolerances and Alignment The preferred flanged joint assembly shall be one with
two flat-face flanges with full-face gaskets having a 50 to
5-3.1.1 Piping Distortions. Any alignment of pipe that 70 Shore A durometer. When other combinations of
produces detrimental strain in equipment or piping flanges and gaskets are used, the additional requirements
components shall not be permitted. of para. 5-3.2.5 shall be considered.
Mechanical joints that are not flanged shall be
5-3.1.2 Linear, Angular, and Rotational Tolerances assembled in accordance with the manufacturer’s require-
5-3.1.2.1 The tolerances on linear dimensions (inter- ments and as shown on engineering documents.
mediate or overall) shall apply to the face-to-face, face-to- Bolting torque sequence and limits shall be specified by
end, and end-to-end measurements of fabricated straight the manufacturer for a particular flange and approved by
pipe and headers; center-to-end or center-to-face the designer. Type of compound or lubricant shall directly
measurements of nozzles or other attachments; or relate to specified torqueing values and gasket material.
center-to-face measurements of bends, as illustrated in Additional guidance for flanged joints is offered in ASME
Figure 5-3.1.2.1-1. These tolerances shall not be cumula- PCC-1.
tive. 5-3.2.1 Preparation for Assembly. Any damage to the
5-3.1.2.2 When fittings or flanges are joined without gasket seating surface that would prevent gasket seating
intervening pipe segments, deviations greater than those shall be repaired, or the flange shall be replaced.
specified in Figure 5-3.1.2.1-1 may occur due to the cumu-
lative effects of tolerances on such components; these 5-3.2.2 Bolting Torque
deviations are acceptable. (a) During assembly of flanged joints, the gasket shall
5-3.1.2.3 Angularity tolerances across the face, end be uniformly compressed to the proper design loading.
preparation, and rotation of flanges are shown in (b) Bolts shall be tightened to a predetermined torque.
Figure 5-3.1.2.1-1. (c) Narrow flat washers (see ASME B18.21.1, Type A)
shall be used under all bolt heads and nuts.
5-3.1.2.4 Flange Face Tolerances. Flange face draw-
back and waviness shall not exceed 0.8 mm (1∕32 in.) as 5-3.2.3 Bolt Length. Bolt length should consider the
measured at or inside the bolt circle. No reverse drawback presence of washers, nut height, and required thread
is permitted. See Figure 5-3.1.2.4-1. protrusion. Nuts should engage the bolt threads for the
full depth of the nut. The nut may be considered acceptably
5-3.1.3 Closer Tolerances. When closer tolerances engaged if the lack of complete engagement is not more
than those given in paras. 5-3.1.2.1 through 5-3.1.2.3 than one thread. The use of bolt tensioners requires that
are necessary, they shall be subject to agreement the threaded portion of the bolt extend at least one bolt
between the designer and the fabricator. diameter beyond the outside nut face on the tensioner side
5-3.1.4 Flanged Joints. Unless otherwise specified in of the joint. Galvanized or coated bolts may require special
the engineering design, flanged joints shall be aligned as tensioner puller sleeves.
follows: 5-3.2.4 Gaskets. No more than one gasket shall be used
(a) Before bolting, mating gasket contact surfaces shall between contact faces in assembling a flanged joint.
be aligned to each other within 1 mm/200 mm (1∕16 in./ft)
measured across any diameter. 5-3.2.5 Nonstandard Flanged Joints. When other
(b) The flanged joint shall be capable of being bolted than flat-face flanges with full-face gaskets having a
such that the gasket contact surfaces bear uniformly on the 50–70 Shore A durometer are used, the following shall
gasket. apply:
(c) Flange bolt holes shall be aligned within 3 mm (1∕8 (a) Consideration shall be given to the strength of the
in.) maximum offset. flanges, and to sustained loads, displacement strains, and
occasional loads described in Chapter 2.
5-3.1.5 Irregularities. Irregularities (i.e., gap, angular (b) When mating raised-face to flat-face flanges, the
deflection, and misalignment) between two field- following shall occur:
connected pipes and/or alignment of flange facings (1) The flange connection shall be designed to with-
shall be within the tolerances as set in the engineering stand the stresses during bolt-up.
documentation and approved by the owner. (2) The appropriate spacer or filler rings shall be
used to prevent overstressing of the flat-face flange.
(c) An appropriate bolt-up sequence shall be specified.

43
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 5-3.1.2.1-1
Assembly Tolerances and Alignment
"A"

"A"

Squareness end preparation shall not

deviate from indicated position
by more than 1.0 mm ( 32 in.)
"A"

"A"
"A"
Rotation of flange from
indicated position
measured as shown, 2.0 mm
8
( 16 in.) max.

X X

"A"

"A"

"A"
Section X–X
Before bolting, mating gasket
"A"
contact surfaces shall be aligned
to each other within 1 mm/200 mm
( 6 in./ft) when measured
across any diameter

"A"

"A" "A"

Pipe Sizes, DN (NPS) Linear Assembly Tolerances at A, mm (in.)

<300 (12) ±3.0 (±1∕8)
300 (12) through 600 (24) ±5.0 (±3∕16)
650 (26) through 900 (36) ±6.0 (±1∕4)
>900 (36) ±6.0 (±1∕4) deviating ±2.0 (±1∕16) for each 300 mm (12 in.) in diameter over 900 mm (36 in.)

GENERAL NOTE: Figure adapted from PFI ES-3, Figure 1, by permission of the Pipe Fabrication Institute, New York, NY.

44
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure 5-3.1.2.4-1
Flange Tolerances

Flange waviness
(a)

(b) Reverse Drawback (c) Flange Drawback

(d) Appropriate bolt-up torque limits specified by the compound or lubricant directly relates to specified
manufacturer shall be approved by the designer, and those torqueing values.
limits shall not be exceeded.
5-3.3.2 Joints for Seal Bonding. A threaded joint to be
5-3.3 Threaded Joints seal bonded shall be made up without thread compound. A
joint containing thread compound that leaks during leak
Where threads may be exposed to fluids that can attack testing may be seal bonded in accordance with para. 5-2.7,
the reinforcing material, threads shall be coated with suffi- provided all compound is removed from exposed threads.
cient resin to cover the threads and completely fill the
clearance between the pipe and the fitting. 5-3.3.3 Tools. Either strap wrenches or other full-
Threaded joints shall conform to the following: circumference wrenches shall be used to tighten threaded
(a) External threads shall be factory cut or molded on pipe joints. Tools, equipment, and other devices used to
special thick-walled pipe ends. hold or apply forces to the pipe shall function in a manner
(b) Matching internal threads shall be factory cut or that does not score or deeply scratch the pipe surface.
molded in the fittings.
5-3.4 Special Joints
(c) Threading of plain ends is not permitted, except
where such threads are limited to the function of a 5-3.4.1 General. Special joints shall be installed and
mechanical lock to matching internal threads factory assembled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-
cut or molded in the bottom portions of fittings with tions, as modified by the engineering design. Care shall be
deep sockets. taken to ensure adequate engagement of joint members.
(d) Factory-cut or factory-molded threaded nipples,
5-3.4.2 Packed Joints. If a packed joint is used to
couplings, or adapters bonded to plain-end pipe and
absorb thermal expansion, proper clearance shall be
fittings may be used where it is necessary to provide
provided at the bottom of the socket to permit this move-
connections to threaded metallic piping.
ment.
5-3.3.1 Thread Compound or Lubricant. Compound or
lubricant shall be used on threads, shall be suitable for the
service conditions, and shall not react unfavorably with
either the fluid service or the piping material. The type of

45
 ASME NM.2-2022

5-3.4.3 Flexible Elastomeric-Sealed Joints. Assembly examined or inspected for compliance with applicable
of flexible elastomeric-sealed joints shall be in accordance acceptance criteria defined in this Standard.
with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the
following: 5-3.6 Cleaning of Piping
(a) Seal and bearing surfaces shall be free from injur- Piping shall be cleaned per the manufacturer’s recom-
ious imperfections. mendation.
(b) Any lubricant used to facilitate joint assembly shall
be compatible with the joint components and the intended 5-3.7 Identification of Piping
service.
(c) Proper joint clearances and piping restraints (if not Each pipe section, fitting, and accessory shall be clearly
integral in the joint design) shall be provided to prevent marked with the following information:
joint separation when expansion can occur due to thermal (a) manufacturer’s name or trademark and identity
and/or pressure effects. code
(b) date of manufacturing
5-3.5 Handling of Piping (c) nominal pipe size, pipe classification, and diameter
series
FRP piping shall be handled and supported in a manner (d) pressure class
that prevents scratching of and mechanical damage to the (e) manufacturer’s examination mark
piping. Any scratched or chipped components shall be See also para. 5-2.5.1(c).

46
 ASME NM.2-2022

Chapter 6
Inspection, Examination, and Testing

6-1 INSPECTION 6-2 EXAMINATION

This Standard distinguishes between examination (see Examination applies to quality control functions
section 6-2) and inspection. Inspection applies to func- performed by the manufacturer (for components only),
tions performed for the owner by the owner’s Inspector fabricator, or erector. Reference in this Standard to an
or the Inspector’s delegates. References in this Standard to examiner shall be to a person who performs quality
the “Inspector” are to the owner’s Inspector or the Inspec- control examinations.
tor’s delegates.
6-2.1 Responsibility for Examination
6-1.1 Responsibility for Inspection
Inspection shall not relieve the manufacturer, fabri-
It is the owner’s responsibility, exercised through the cator, or erector of the responsibility for
Inspector, to verify that all required examinations and (a) providing materials, components, and workman-
testing have been completed and to inspect the piping ship in accordance with the requirements of this Standard
to the extent necessary to be satisfied that it conforms and of the engineering design
to all applicable examination requirements of this Stan- (b) performing all required examinations
dard. (c) preparing suitable records of examinations and
tests for the Inspector’s use
6-1.2 Rights of the Owner’s Inspector
6-2.2 Examination Requirements
The owner’s Inspector and the Inspector’s delegates
shall have access to any place where work is being 6-2.2.1 General. Prior to initial operation, each piping
performed. This work shall include manufacture, fabrica- installation, including components and workmanship,
tion, assembly, erection, installation, examination, and shall be examined in accordance with the applicable re-
testing of the piping. They shall have the right to audit quirements of section 6-2. The type and extent of any addi-
any examination, to inspect the piping using any exami- tional examination required by the engineering design,
nation method specified by the engineering design, and to and the acceptance criteria to be applied, shall be speci-
review all certifications and records necessary to satisfy fied. Joints not included in examinations required by para.
the owner’s responsibility stated in para. 6-1.1. 6-2.3 or by the engineering design may be accepted if they
pass the leak test required by section 6-3.
6-1.3 Qualifications of the Owner’s Inspector
6-2.2.2 Acceptance Criteria
(a) The Inspector shall be designated by the owner and
shall be the owner, an employee of the owner, an employee (a) The acceptance criteria for imperfections in bonds
of an engineering or scientific organization, or an shall be as listed in Table 6-2.2.2-1.
employee of a recognized insurance or inspection (b) Acceptance criteria should be defined in the engi-
company acting as the owner’s agent. The Inspector neering design or other agreement with the owner. For
shall not represent nor be an employee of the piping cases in which failure or substantial leakage of the
manufacturer, fabricator, or erector unless the owner piping could pose high risk to the health or safety of per-
is also the manufacturer, fabricator, or erector. sonnel or cause significant economic loss, acceptance
(b) The owner’s Inspector shall have not less than 10 yr criteria should comply with para. 6-2.7.2(c)(3).
of experience in the design, fabrication, examination, and
6-2.2.3 Defective Components and Workmanship
inspection of FRP pressure piping. An individual may
count each satisfactorily completed year of an ABET-ac- (a) An examined item with one or more defects (imper-
credited engineering degree program as 1 yr of experi- fections) of a type or magnitude exceeding the acceptance
ence, up to a maximum of 4 yr. criteria of this Standard shall be repaired or replaced.
(c) Alternatively, the Inspector shall meet the Inspector (b) The new work shall be examined to the same extent
qualifications of the National Board Inspection Code and by use of the same methods and acceptance criteria as
(NBIC), Part 2, Supplement 4, S4.5. required for the original work.

47
 ASME NM.2-2022

Table 6-2.2.2-1 6-2.3 Extent of Examination

Acceptance Criteria for Bonds
6-2.3.1 Required Examination. Piping and piping
Type of Imperfection Acceptance Criteria components shall be examined to the extent specified
Cracks None permitted herein or to any greater extent specified in the engineering
Unfilled areas in joint None permitted design. Acceptance criteria shall be as stated in
Unbonded areas in joint None permitted para. 6-2.2.2 unless otherwise specified.
Inclusions of foreign material None permitted (a) Visual Examination. Visual examination in accor-
Protrusion of adhesive into pipe bore, 25% dance with para. 6-2.7.2 shall include the following at
% of total pipe wall thickness minimum:
Incomplete joint makeup None permitted (1) examination of materials and components,
selected at random, to satisfy the examiner that they
conform to specifications and are free from defects.
(2) examination of at least 20% of fabrication. For
6-2.2.4 Progressive Sampling for Examination. When
bonds, each type of bond made by each bonder shall
required spot or random examination reveals a defect, the
be represented.
following steps shall be used:
(3) examination of 100% of fabrication for bonds
Step 1. Two additional samples of the same kind (if
other than circumferential.
bonded joints, by the same bonder) shall be given the
(4) random examination of the assembly of
same type of examination.
threaded, bolted, and other joints to satisfy the examiner
Step 2
that they conform to the applicable requirements of
(a) If the items examined as required by Step 1 are
section 5-3. When pneumatic testing is to be performed,
acceptable, the defective item shall be repaired or
all threaded, bolted, and other mechanical joints shall be
replaced. The repaired or replaced item shall be reexam-
examined.
ined as specified in para. 6-2.2.3, and all items represented
(5) random examination during erection of piping,
by these two additional samples shall be accepted.
including checking of alignment, supports, and cold
(b) If any of the items examined as required by Step 1
spring.
reveals a defect, a double number of further samples of the
(6) examination of erected piping and assembled
same kind shall be examined for each defective item found
joints for evidence of defects that would require repair
by that sampling.
or replacement, and for other evident deviations from
Step 3
the intent of the design.
(a) If all the items examined as required by Step 2(b)
(b) Other Types of Examination
are acceptable, the defective item(s) shall be repaired or
(1) Not less than 5% of all bonded joints shall be
replaced. The repaired or replaced item shall be reexam-
examined by in-process examination in accordance
ined as specified in para. 6-2.2.3, and all items represented
with para. 6-2.7.4.
by the additional sampling shall be accepted.
(2) The joints to be examined shall be selected to
(b) If any of the items examined as required by
ensure that the work of each bonder and bonding operator
Step 2(b) reveals a defect, all items represented by
making the production joints is examined.
the progressive sampling shall be either
(c) Certifications and Records
(1) repaired or replaced and reexamined as
(1) The examiner shall be assured, by examination of
required, or
certifications, records, and other evidence, that the mate-
(2) fully examined and repaired or replaced as
rials and components are of the specified grades and that
necessary, and reexamined as necessary to meet the re-
they have received the required manufacturing processes,
quirements of this Standard
examination, and testing.
Step 4. If any of the defective items are repaired or
(2) The examiner shall provide the Inspector with a
replaced and then reexamined, and a defect is again
certification that all the quality control requirements of
detected in the repaired or replaced item, continued
this Standard and of the engineering design have been
progressive sampling in accordance with Steps 1, 2(b),
carried out.
and 3 shall not be required based on the defects found
in the repair. The defective item(s) shall be repaired or 6-2.3.2 Additional Required Examination. Piping
replaced. The repaired or replaced item shall be reexam- systems and associated piping components designated
ined until acceptance as specified in para. 6-2.2.3. Spot or in the governing Code as requiring examination
random examination (whichever is applicable) shall then beyond that specified in para. 6-2.3.1 shall be examined
be performed on the remaining unexamined joints. to the extent necessary to satisfy the examiner that compo-
nents, materials, and workmanship conform to the re-
quirements of this Standard, the governing Code, and
the engineering design.

48
 ASME NM.2-2022

6-2.4 Supplementary Examination 6-2.7.2 Visual Examination

6-2.4.1 General. Any applicable method of examina- (a) Definition. Visual examination is observation of the
tion described in para. 6-2.7 may be specified by the engi- portion of components, joints, and other piping compo-
neering design to supplement the examination required nents that are or can be exposed to view during fabrica-
by para. 6-2.3. The extent of supplementary examination tion, assembly, erection, examination, or testing. This
to be performed and any acceptance criteria that differ examination includes verification of materials, compo-
from those in para. 6-2.2.2 shall be specified in the engi- nents, dimensions, joint preparation, alignment,
neering design. bonding, bolting, threading, or other joining method,
supports, assembly, and erection.
6-2.4.2 Examinations to Resolve Uncertainty. Any (b) Method. Visual examination shall be performed in
method of examination may be used to resolve uncertainty accordance with the following:
of results from the required examinations. Acceptance (1) During the course of fabrication, assembly, or
criteria shall be those for the required examination. erection, the examiner shall make all such checks neces-
sary to ensure that laminate imperfections (as defined in
6-2.5 Examination Personnel
Table 4-3.2-1) are within the requirements of this Stan-
6-2.5.1 Personnel Qualification and Certification dard.
(a) Examiners shall have training and experience (2) The Quality Control Program shall include proce-
commensurate with the needs of the specified examina- dures and forms to be used to control the ongoing process
tions. of lamination so as to ensure that imperfections are within
(b) The employer shall certify records of the examiners required tolerances prior to the final inspection.
employed, showing dates and results of personnel quali- (3) Visual examination shall be made before an ex-
fications, and maintain them and make them available to terior pigmented coating or insulation is applied to the
the Inspector. piping system and/or components. If exterior pigmenta-
tion or insulation has been specified, the fabricator, owner,
6-2.5.2 Personnel for In-Process Examinations. In- and Inspector shall discuss and agree on visual methods
process examinations shall be performed by personnel and arrange for closely timed and scheduled inspections.
other than those performing the production work. (c) Acceptance Criteria
(1) The visual acceptance criteria shall be as stated in
6-2.6 Examination Procedures Table 4-3.2-1.
(a) Any examination shall be performed in accordance (2) In general, the acceptable quality level should be
with a written procedure that conforms to one of the Level 2, as defined in Table 4-3.2-1.
methods specified in para. 6-2.7, including special (3) For cases in which failure or substantial leakage
methods defined in para. 6-2.7.1(b). of the piping could pose high risk to the health or safety of
(b) The employer shall certify records of the examina- personnel or cause significant economic loss, the designer
tion procedures employed, showing dates and results of or owner should consider specifying the acceptable
procedure qualifications, and maintain them and make quality level as Level 1, as defined in Table 4-3.2-1.
them available to the Inspector. (d) Records. Records of individual visual examinations
shall not be required, except for those of in-process ex-
6-2.7 Types of Examination amination as specified in para. 6-2.7.4.
6-2.7.1 General 6-2.7.3 Degree of Cure
(a) Methods Specified in This Standard. Except as (a) Method. The degree of cure shall be determined by
provided in (b), any examination required by this Stan- Barcol hardness in accordance with ASTM D2583.
dard, the engineering design, or the Inspector shall be (b) Criteria. The reported Barcol hardness value shall
performed in accordance with one of the methods speci- be at least 90% of resin manufacturer’s specified hardness
fied herein. for the cured resin.
(b) Methods Not Specified in This Standard. If a method
not specified herein is to be used, it and its acceptance 6-2.7.4 In-Process Examination
criteria shall be specified in the engineering design in (a) Definition. In-process examination shall comprise,
enough detail to permit qualification of the necessary but not be limited to, examination of the following:
procedures and examiners. (1) joint preparation and cleanliness
(2) fit-up, joint clearance, and internal alignment
prior to joining
(3) materials specified by the joining procedure
(4) appearance of the finished joint

49
 ASME NM.2-2022

(b) Method. The in-process examination shall be a 6-3.2.3 Special Provisions for Testing
visual examination in accordance with para. 6-2.7.2
(a) Piping Subassemblies, Segments of System, and Full
unless additional methods are specified in the engineering
System. The full piping system may be tested as a whole, or
design.
subassemblies or segments of the system may be tested
individually.
6-3 TESTING (b) Flanged Joints. Flanged joints used to connect piping
components and subassemblies that have previously been
6-3.1 Required Leak Test
tested, and flanged joints at which a blank or blind is used
Prior to initial operation, each piping system shall be to isolate equipment or other piping during a test shall not
tested to ensure tightness. The test shall be a hydrostatic be required to be retested in accordance with para. 6-3.1.
leak test in accordance with para. 6-3.4, except as provided (c) Closure Bonds. The final bond connecting piping
herein. systems or components that have been successfully
(a) At the owner’s option, a piping system may be tested in accordance with section 6-3 shall not be required
subjected to an initial service leak test in accordance to be tested provided the bond is examined in-process in
with para. 6-3.6 in lieu of the hydrostatic leak test. accordance with para. 6-2.7.4.
(b) If the owner considers a hydrostatic leak test
6-3.2.4 Externally Pressured Piping. Unjacketed
impracticable, a pneumatic test in accordance with
piping designed for external pressure shall be tested at
para. 6-3.5 may be substituted. When such tests are
an internal gauge pressure 1.5 times the external differ-
performed, consideration shall be given to the hazard
ential pressure but not at less than 105 kPa (15 psi).
of energy stored in compressed gas. FRP piping tests
carry much higher risks than those for metallic pipe 6-3.2.5 Repairs or Additions After Leak Testing. If
because FRP material by its nature possesses less ductility repairs or additions are made following the leak test,
than steel. the affected piping shall be retested, except that for
NOTE: See ASME PCC-2, Article 501 for detailed guidance on minor repairs or additions the owner may waive retest
pneumatic testing. requirements when precautionary measures are taken
to ensure sound construction.
(c) Lines open to the atmosphere, such as vents or
drains downstream of the last shutoff valve, should be 6-3.2.6 Test Records. The following information shall
closed with temporary end closures and leak tested. be recorded for each piping system tested:
(a) date of test
6-3.2 General Requirements for Leak Test (b) identification of piping system tested
6-3.2.1 Limitations on Pressure (c) test fluid
(d) test pressure
(a) Pressure Limits. Test pressure limits shall be as indi- (e) certification of results by examiner
cated in para. 2-2.3.8(b) or as agreed to by the owner and These records need not be retained after completion of
the contractor. the test if the owner retains the Inspector’s certification
(b) Test Fluid Expansion. If a pressure test is to be main- that the piping has satisfactorily passed the pressure
tained for a period of time and the test fluid in the system is testing required by this Standard.
subject to thermal expansion, precautions shall be taken to
avoid excessive pressure. 6-3.3 Preparation for Leak Test
(c) Preliminary Pneumatic Test. A preliminary test
6-3.3.1 Joints Exposed
using air at no more than 70 kPa (10 psi) gauge pressure
may be made prior to hydrostatic testing to locate major (a) All joints and bonds (including structural and
leaks. attachment bonds to pressure-containing components)
shall be left uninsulated and exposed for examination
6-3.2.2 Other Test Requirements during leak testing, except that joints and bonds
(a) A leak test shall be maintained for no less than 10 previously tested in accordance with this Standard
min, after which time all joints and connections shall be may be insulated or covered.
examined for leaks. (b) All joints and bonds may be primed and painted
(b) The possibility of brittle fracture shall be consid- prior to leak testing unless a sensitive leak test (see
ered when leak tests are conducted at low temperature. para. 6-3.7) is required.
6-3.3.2 Temporary Supports. Piping designed for
vapor or gas shall be provided with additional temporary
supports, if necessary, to support the weight of test liquid.

50
 ASME NM.2-2022

ð22Þ 6-3.3.3 Piping With Expansion Joints 6-3.4.3 Hydrostatic Test of Piping With Vessels as a
System. The following provisions do not affect the pres-
(a) Unrestrained expansion joints depend on external
sure test requirements of any applicable vessel code:
main anchors to resist pressure thrust forces. Except as
(a) If the test pressure of piping attached to a vessel is
limited in (c), a piping system containing unrestrained
the same as or less than the test pressure for the vessel, the
expansion joints shall be leak tested without any
piping may be tested with the vessel at the piping test
temporary restraints in accordance with section 6-3 up
pressure.
to 150% of the expansion joint design pressure. If the
(b) If the test pressure of the piping exceeds the vessel
required test pressure exceeds 150% of the expansion
test pressure, and it is not considered practicable to isolate
joint design pressure and the main anchors are not
the piping from the vessel, the piping and the vessel may
designed to resist the pressure thrust forces at the
be tested together at the vessel test pressure, provided the
required test pressure, for that portion of the test
owner approves and the vessel test pressure is not less
when the pressure exceeds 150% of the expansion
than 77% of the piping test pressure calculated in accor-
joint design pressure, either the expansion joint shall
dance with ASME B31.3, para. 345.4.2(b).
be temporarily removed or temporary restraints shall
be added to resist the pressure thrust forces. 6-3.5 Pneumatic Leak Test
(b) Except as limited in (c), a piping system containing
self-restrained expansion joints shall be leak tested in (a) Pneumatic leak tests shall be permitted only with
accordance with section 6-3. the owner’s approval and as allowed by the referenced
(1) A self-restrained expansion joint previously shop code.
tested by the manufacturer in accordance with applicable (b) In general, with the exception of testing low-pres-
provisions of ASME B31.1, Appendix P or ASME B31.3, sure piping systems, pneumatic testing should be avoided.
Appendix X may be excluded from the system to be (c) For gas fluid requirements and limitations, see
leak tested, except when a sensitive leak test in accordance section 2-6.
with para. 6-3.7 is required. 6-3.5.1 Precautions
(2) Restraint hardware for all types of expansion
joints shall be designed for the pressure thrust forces (a) Pneumatic testing involves the hazard that energy
at the test pressure. stored in compressed gas could be released.
(c) When a bellows expansion joint is installed in a (b) Particular care shall be taken to minimize the
piping system that is subject to a leak test and the leak chance of brittle failure during a pneumatic leak test.
test pressure determined in accordance with (c) Material properties and test temperature shall be
section 6-3 exceeds the pressure of the test performed considered when the hazards associated with pneumatic
by the manufacturer in accordance with applicable provi- testing are evaluated.
sions of ASME B31.3, Appendix X, the required leak test (d) See also paras. 6-3.1(b) and 6-3.2.2(b).
pressure shall be reduced to the manufacturer’s test pres- NOTE: See ASME PCC-2, Article 501 for more detailed guidance
sure. on pneumatic testing.
6-3.3.4 Limits of Tested Piping. Equipment that is not 6-3.5.2 Pressure Relief Device. A pressure relief
to be tested shall be either disconnected from the piping or device having a set pressure not higher than the test pres-
isolated by blinds or other means during the test. A valve sure shall be provided.
may be used provided the valve (including its closure
mechanism) is suitable for the test pressure. 6-3.5.3 Test Fluid. The gas used as test fluid, if not air,
shall be nonflammable, noncombustible, and nontoxic.
6-3.4 Hydrostatic Leak Test
6-3.5.4 Test Pressure. Unless otherwise defined by the
6-3.4.1 Test Fluid. The test fluid for a hydrostatic leak governing code, the test pressure shall not be less than 1.1
test shall be water unless there is the possibility of damage times the design pressure and shall not exceed 1.33 times
due to freezing or to adverse effects of water on the piping the design pressure.
or the process. In those cases, another suitable nontoxic
liquid that is compatible with the pipe material may be 6-3.5.5 Procedure
used. Step 1. The pressure shall be gradually increased until a
6-3.4.2 Test Pressure. Except as provided in gauge pressure that is the lesser of one-half the test pres-
para. 6-3.4.3, the hydrostatic test pressure at any point sure or 105 kPa (15 psi) is attained, at which time a pre-
in the piping system shall not be less than 1.33 times liminary check shall be made, including examination of
the design pressure. joints in accordance with para. 6-2.4.1.

51
 ASME NM.2-2022

Step 2. The pressure shall be gradually increased in (b) Options of one or more of the test methods from
steps until the test pressure is reached; at each step, ASME BPVC, Section V, Article 10, which allow the engi-
the pressure shall be held long enough to equalize neering design to modify specified requirements of the
piping strains. Mandatory Appendices V and VI test methods (such as
Step 3. The test pressure should be maintained as indi- acceptability limits for system leak tightness), may be
cated in para. 6-3.2.2(a). used. Such options may be exercised only to make
Step 4. The pressure shall then be reduced to the design these requirements more sensitive or more conservative.
pressure before the system is examined for leakage in (c) The design specification shall identify the accep-
accordance with para. 6-3.2.2(a). tance criteria for the specified sensitive leak testing tech-
niques.
6-3.6 Initial Service Leak Test
An initial service leak test shall be applicable only when 6-4 RECORDS
specifically allowed by the governing code and at the
owner’s option [see para. 6-3.1(a)]. 6-4.1 Responsibility
It shall be the responsibility of the piping designer,
6-3.7 Sensitive Leak Test manufacturer, fabricator, and erector, as applicable, to
(a) The test pressure shall be in accordance with the prepare the records required by this Standard, the
following: governing code, and the engineering design.
(1) The test pressure shall be at least the lesser of
105 kPa (15 psi) gauge or 25% of the design pressure. 6-4.2 Retention of Records
(2) The pressure shall be gradually increased until a Unless otherwise specified by the engineering design,
gauge pressure the lesser of one-half the test pressure or the following records shall be retained for at least 5 yr after
105 kPa (15 psi) is attained, at which time a preliminary the record is generated for the project:
check shall be made. Then the pressure shall be gradually (a) examination procedures
increased in steps until the test pressure is reached; at (b) examination personnel qualifications
each step, the pressure shall be held long enough to (c) examination data
equalize piping strains.

52
 ASME NM.2-2022

MANDATORY APPENDIX I
DESIGN OF INTEGRAL FLAT-FACE FLANGES

I-1 SCOPE extending from the outside diameter (O.D.) of the

flange to the inside of the pipe. See Figure I-2.3-1, illus-
This Appendix provides a design method for integral tration (a).
flat-face FRP flanges that use full-face gaskets. These re- (b) Flanges also may be integrally molded, including a
quirements may be used to design flanges having ASME pipe neck. See Figure I-2.3-1, illustration (b).
B16.5 or ASME B16.47 bolt circle and bolt hole diameters
or to custom design flanges not meeting those standards. I-2.4 Material
NOTE: The design method herein is derived from a design
method given in ASME BPVC, Section X, and Section VIII, Division
Flanges greater than or equal to DN 100 (NPS 4) shall be
1, Mandatory Appendix 2. constructed of Type II laminates using alternate plies of
chopped-strand mat and woven roving. Flanges less than
DN 100 (NPS 4) may be constructed of Type I all-mat lami-
I-2 LIMITATIONS nates or Type II laminates. Compression molding, filament
winding, or tape winding shall not be used to manufacture
I-2.1 Size and Pressure flanges designed in accordance with this Appendix.
There is no size or pressure limitation for this design
method, but in a larger flange at higher pressures the spot I-2.5 Adhesives
facing for the washers on the back side of the flange may Flanges that require the use of adhesives shall not be
thin out the hub more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.), which is permitted.
unacceptable. For custom designs of such flanges, the
use of stress analysis procedures such as finite I-2.6 Hub Reinforcement
element analysis, found in ASME BPVC, Section VIII, Divi-
For all flanges manufactured using Type II laminates,
sion 2, Part 2, using the allowable stresses for FRP given in
the hub reinforcement shall consist of alternating
ASME NM.3.3 shall be considered.
layers of mat and woven roving that are continuous
I-2.2 Hardness from the hub to the O.D. of the flange.

Only full-face, soft elastomeric-type gaskets with or I-2.7 Ring Plies

without reinforcement and with a maximum hardness
For all types of flange construction, the ring plies from
of Shore A60 + 5 shall be used for flanges designed
the O.D. to the inside diameter (I.D.) of the flange shall be
per section I-3. Harder gaskets are acceptable only if
interspersed between the reinforcement plies that extend
stress analysis methods are used to design the flange
from the hub to the O.D. of the flange.
and empirical testing is used to verify leak tightness.
NOTE: When the flange is assembled, the guidelines outlined in
I-3 DESIGN OF FLANGES
ASME PCC-1 should be followed.
I-3.1 Nomenclature
I-2.3 Construction
The following symbols are used in the equations for the
Flange construction shall be of either of the following design of flat-face flanges employing full-face gaskets (see
styles: Figure I-3.3-1):
(a) Flanges may be integral with the pipe neck where A = outside diameter of flange, mm (in.)
the flange is built up with laminate coming from the back Am = total required cross‐sectional area of bolts; the
side of the flange onto the pipe and forming a secondary greater of Wm1/Sb or Wm2/Sa, mm2 (in.2)
bonded tapered hub on the back side to both attach the B = inside diameter of flange, mm (in.)
flange to the pipe and to provide the required flange thick- b = effective gasket width or joint‐contact‐surface
ness. The face of the flange is then covered with several seating width, mm (in.)
plies of mat and one or more plies of surfacing veil C = diameter of bolt circle, mm (in.)

53
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure I-2.3-1
Typical Flange Designs

g1 g1
Flange hub Flange hub
reinforcement reinforcement
thickness $t/3 thickness $t/3
[Note (1)] [Note (1)]

t t

Spot face Spot face

[Notes (2) and (3)] [Notes (2) and (3)]
6 mm (1/4 in.) radius (min.)
h L L h 6 mm (1/4 in.)
CL [Note (4)] [Note (4)] radius (min.) CL
Flange Flange

g0 g0

(a) Typical Integral Flange on Pipe Design (b) Typical Integrally Molded Flange Design

NOTES:
(1) Hub reinforcement thickness shall be calculated, but in no case shall it be less than t/3.
(2) Spot face for washers per ASME B18.21.1 Type A narrow plain washers. Spot facing should not cut into the hub thickness g1 by more than
1.5 mm (0.06 in.). If this is unavoidable, then reinforcement shall be added to the flange inner diameter to compensate.
(3) The minimum flange thickness t shall be taken from the flange face to the surface of the spot face with a tolerance of +3 mm (−0 + 1∕8 in.). Flange
thickness includes corrosion barrier.
(4) Hub length, h, shall be greater than or equal to 3t and shall have a minimum 3:1 slope.

d = shape factor for integral-type flanges hG = radial distance from bolt circle to circle on
x = which HG acts, mm (in.)
(U /V )h0g02
h′G = radial distance from bolt circle to gasket load
d1 = bolt hole diameter, mm (in.) reaction, mm (in.)
e = shape factor h″G = flange lever arm, mm (in.)
x = F/h0 HGy = bolt load for gasket yielding, N (lb)
F = shape factor (see Figure I-3.3-3) x = bπGy
f = hub stress correction factor (see Figure H′Gy = compression load required to seat gasket
I-3.3-4) outside G diameter, N (lb)
x = 1 for calculated values less than 1 Hp = total joint‐contact‐surface compression load,
G = diameter of gasket load reaction, mm (in.) N (lb)
g0 = thickness of hub at small end, mm (in.) x = 2bπGmp
g1 = thickness of hub at back of flange, mm (in.) H′p = total adjusted joint‐contact‐surface compres-
H = hydrostatic end force, N (lb) sion for full‐face gasketed flange, N (lb)
h = length of hub, mm (in.) x = (hG / h G)Hp
h0 = factor
x = (Bg0)0.5 HT = difference between total hydrostatic end force
HD = hydrostatic end force on area inside of flange, and the hydrostatic end force area inside of
N (lb) flange, N (lb)
hD = radial distance from bolt circle to circle on x = H − HD
which HD acts, mm (in.) hT = radial distance from bolt circle to circle on
HG = difference between bolt load and hydrostatic which HT acts, mm (in.)
end force, N (lb)

54
 ASME NM.2-2022

K = ratio of inside flange diameter to outside flange (a) Determine design conditions, material properties,
diameter and dimensions of flange, bolts, and gasket.
L = length of flange including hub, mm (in.) (b) Determine the lever arms of the inner and outer
M = unit load, operating, N (lb) parts of the gasket:
x = Mmax/B
m = gasket factor
x = 0 to 0.50 for soft gaskets; use manufacturer’s
recommendations (C B)(2B + C)
M0 = total moment hG =
Ma = moment under bolt‐up conditions 6(B + C ) (I-3-1)
MD = component of moment due to HD
MG = component of moment due to HG
Mmax = max(M0, MG)
MT = component of moment due to HT
N = number of bolts
p = design pressure, kPa (psi)
R = radial distance from bolt circle to point of inter- (A C )(2A + C)
hG =
section to hub and back of flange, mm (in.) 6(C + A) (I-3-2)
x = (C − B)/2 − g1
Sa = allowable bolt stress at ambient temperature,
kPa (psi)
Sb = allowable bolt stress at design temperature, (c) Determine the gasket dimensions:
kPa (psi)
SFa = allowable flange stress at ambient tempera-
ture, kPa (psi) G=C 2hG (I-3-3)
SFo = allowable flange stress at design temperature,
kPa (psi)
SH = longitudinal hub stress, kPa (psi)
b = (C B)/4 (I-3-4)
SR = radial flange stress, kPa (psi)
SRAD = radial stress at bolt circle, kPa (psi)
(d) Determine loads:
ST = tangential flange stress, kPa (psi)
T = shape factor (see Figure I-3.3-5)
t = flange thickness, mm (in.)
U = shape factor (see Figure I-3.3-5) H = G2 p/4 (I-3-5)
V = shape factor (see Figure I-3.3-2)
Wa = flange design bolt load for operating conditions
or gasket seating as may apply, N (lb) Hp = 2b Gmp (I-3-6)
Wm1 = minimum bolt loading for design conditions,
N (lb)
Wm2 = minimum bolt loading for bolt‐up conditions,
H p = (hG / h G)Hp (I-3-7)
N (lb)
Y = shape factor (see Figure I-3.3-5)
y = gasket unit seating load, kPa (psi)
x = 345 kPa to 1 379 kPa (50 psi to 200 psi) for soft Wm1 = Hp + H + H p (I-3-8)
gaskets; use manufacturer’s recommendations
Z = shape factor (see Figure I-3.3-5)

HGy = b Gy (I-3-9)
I-3.2 Allowable Flange Stress
The flange thickness shall be designed such that the
allowable stress does not exceed the allowable flexural
HGy = (hG /hG )HGy (I-3-10)
stress given in ASME NM.3.3.

ð22Þ I-3.3 Calculation Procedure

Wm2 = HGy + HGy (I-3-11)
Calculation procedures are as follows (see also
Figures I-3.3-1 through I-3.3-5, and Table I-3.3-1):

55
 ASME NM.2-2022

(e) Determine the bolting requirements: (i) Calculate stress and compare to allowable stress:
6MG
(I-3-12) SRAD = 2 < allowable (I-3-24)
A1 = Wm1/Sb t ( C Nd1)

A2 = Wm2/ Sa (I-3-13)
SH = f M / g12 < allowable (I-3-25)

Am = greater of A1 or A2.
Wa = 1.25 (greater of Wm1 or Wm2).
NOTE: To ensure that the flange is not overstressed, the bolts SR = M / t 2 < allowable (I-3-26)
shall be tightened using a procedure that controls torque in a
manner that ensures Wa is not exceeded.
(f) Determine flange load, moments, and lever arms: ST = MY / t 2
( ) ZSR < allowable (I-3-27)

where f, β, and λ are defined in Figure I-3.3-1 and M =

HD = B2 p/4 (I-3-14)
Mmax/B.

HT = H HD (I-3-15)

hD = R + 0.5g1 (I-3-16)

hT = 0.5(R + g1 + hG) (I-3-17)

MD = HDhD (I-3-18)

MT = HT hT (I-3-19)

M0 = MD + MT (I-3-20)

(g) Determine flange moment at gasket seating condi-

tion:

HG = Wa H (I-3-21)

hGh G
hG = (I-3-22)
hG + hG

MG = HGhG (I-3-23)

(h) Assume a flange thickness, t.

56
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure I-3.3-1
Design of Flat-Face Integral Flanges

Design Conditions Gasket and Bolting Calculations

Design pressure, p kPa (psi) Gasket details G C – 2hG
Design temp. ˚C (˚F) b (C – B) /4
Atmospheric temp. ˚C (˚F) Facing details y
Flange material m
Bolting material (C – B)(2B + C) (A – C)(2A + C)
hG h ¢G
A B C 6(B + C) 6(C + A)

Allowable Oper. temp. Sb kPa (psi) Hp 2b Gmp HGy b Gy

bolt
2
stress Atm. temp. Sa G p hG
kPa (psi) H H ¢Gy H
4 h ¢G Gy
Allowable Oper. temp. SFo kPa (psi) H ¢ hG
p H
flange h ¢G p Wm 2 HGy + H ¢Gy
stress Atm. temp SFa kPa (psi)
Wm 1 Hp + H + H ¢p
Wm 1 Wm 2
Bolting requirement
Am greater of and AB Wa 1.25 (greater of Wm 1 or Wm 2 )
Sb Sa
Flange Moment at Operating Conditions
Flange Loads (Operating Condition) Lever Arms Flange Moments (Operating Condition)
2
HD B p /4 hD R + 0.5g 1 MD HD hD
HT H – HD hT 0.5(R + g 1 + hG) MT HT hT
M0 MD + MT
Flange Moment at Gasket Seating Conditions
Flange Load (Bolting-Up Condition) Lever Arm Flange Moment (Bolting-Up Condition)
HG Wa – H h ¢¢G hGh ¢G /(hG + h ¢G) MG HG h ¢¢G
SFo (Equivalent to checking for M0 at allowable flange Mmax
Mmax greater of M0 or Ma stress of SFo and separately for Ma at allowable M
SFa B
flange stress of SFa)
Stress Calculation Shape Constants
2
Longitudinal hub stress SH p fM /lg1 K p A /B p h0 p !Bg0 p

Radial flange stress SR p b M / lt 2

T p p h/h0 p
Tangential flange stress ST p (MY /t 2) – ZSR Z p p F p
Greater of 0.5 (SH + SR ) or 0.5(SH + ST) Y p p V p
6MG U p p f p
Radial stress at bolt circle SRAD p
2
t ( C – Nd1) g1/g0 p e p F/h0

g0 = U 2
dp hg p
V 0 0
t (assumed)
A= g1 =
a p te + 1
h R B=
b p 4/3te + 1
Wa g p a /T
d p t 3/d
hD l pg +d
t HD
C=

hT HT
h'G hG G=
H'G HG
N p No. bolts p
d1p Dia. bolt holes p

GENERAL NOTE: See Table I-3.3-1 for equations.

57
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure I-3.3-2
Values of V (Integral Flange Factor)

GENERAL NOTE: See Table I-3.3-1 for equations.

58
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure I-3.3-3
Values of F (Integral Flange Factor)

GENERAL NOTE: See Table I-3.3-1 for equations.

59
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure I-3.3-4
Values of f (Hub Stress Correction Factor)

GENERAL NOTE: See Table I-3.3-1 for equations.

60
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure I-3.3-5
Values of T, U, Y, and Z (Terms Involving K)

GENERAL NOTE: See Table I-3.3-1 for equations.

61
 Table I-3.3-1
Flange Factors in Formula Form
Integral Flange
Factor V per Figure I-3.3-2 is then solved by

E4
V= 1/4
ij 2.73 yz
jj z (1 + A 0)3
j C zz
k 0 {

Factor F per Figure I-3.3-3 is then solved by

E6
F=
C0 1/4 (1 + A 0)3
( )
2.73 C0

Factor f per Figure I-3.3-4 is then solved by

C36
f=
(1 + A 0)

62
The values used in the above equations are solved using eqs. (1) through (45) below based on the values g1, g0, h, and h0 as defined by para. I-3.1. When g1 = g0, F = 0.908920, V = 0.550103, and f = 1; thus eqs. (1)
through (45) need not be solved.
ASME NM.2-2022

Equations
(1) A0 = (g1/g0) − 1
(2) C0 = 43.68(h/h0)4
(3) C1 = 1/3 + A0/12
(4) C2 = 5/42 + 17A0/336
(5) C3 = 1/210 + A0/360
(6) C4 = 11/360 + 59A0/5 040 + (1 + 3A0)/C0
(7) C5 = 1/90 + 5A0/1 008 − (1 + A0)3/C0
(8) C6 = 1/120 + 17A0/5 040 + 1/C0
(9) C7 = 215/2 772 + 51A0/1 232 + (60/7 + 225A0/14 + 75A02/7 + 5A03/2)/C0
(10) C8 = 31/6 930 + 128A0/45 045 + (6/7 + 15A0/7 + 12A02/7 + 5A03/11)/C0
(11) C9 = 533/30 240 + 653A0/73 920 + (1/2 + 33A0/14 + 39A02/28 + 25A03/84)/C0
(12) C10 = 29/3 780 + 3A0/704 − (1/2 + 33A0/14 + 81A02/28 + 13A03/12)/C0
(13) C11 = 31/6 048 + 1 763A0/665 280 + (1/2 + 6A0/7 + 15A02/28 + 5A03/42)/C0
(14) C12 = 1/2 925 + 71A0/300 300 + (8/35 + 18A0/35 + 156A02/385 + 6A03/55)/C0
(15) C13 = 761/831 600 + 937A0/1 663 200 + (1/35 + 6A0/35 + 11A02/70 + 3A03/70)/C0
(16) C14 = 197/415 800 + 103A0/332 640 − (1/35 + 6A0/35 + 17A02/70 + A03/10)/C0
(17) C15 = 233/831 600 + 97A0/554 400 + (1/35 + 3A0/35 + A02/14 + 2A03/105)/C0
 Table I-3.3-1
Flange Factors in Formula Form (Cont’d)
Equations (Cont’d)
(18) C16 = C1C7C12 + C2C8C3 + C3C8C2 − (C32C7 + C82C1 + C22C12)
(19) C17 = [C4C7C12 + C2C8C13 + C3C8C9 − (C13C7C3 + C82C4 + C12C2C9)]/C16
(20) C18 = [C5C7C12 + C2C8C14 + C3C8C10 − (C14C7C3 + C82C5 + C12C2C10)]/C16
(21) C19 = [C6C7C12 + C2C8C15 + C3C8C11 − (C15C7C3 + C82C6 + C12C2C11)]/C16
(22) C20 = [C1C9C12 + C4C8C3 + C3C13C2 − (C32C9 + C13C8C1 + C12C4C2)]/C16
(23) C21 = [C1C10C12 + C5C8C3 + C3C14C2 − (C32C10 + C14C8C1 + C12C5C2)]/C16
(24) C22 = [C1C11C12 + C6C8C3 + C3C15C2 − (C32C11 + C15C8C1 + C12C6C2)]/C16
(25) C23 = [C1C7C13 + C2C9C3 + C4C8C2 − (C3C7C4 + C8C9C1 + C22C13)]/C16
(26) C24 = [C1C7C14 + C2C10C3 + C5C8C2 − (C3C7C5 + C8C10C1 + C22C14)]/C16
(27) C25 = [C1C7C15 + C2C11C3 + C6C8C2 − (C3C7C6 + C8C11C1 + C22C15)]/C16
(28) C26 = −(C0/4)1/4
(29) C27 = C20 − C17 − 5/12 + C17C26
(30) C28 = C22 − C19 − 1/12 + C19C26
(31) C29 = −(C0/4)1/2
(32) C30 = −(C0/4)3/4
(33) C31 = 3A0/2 − C17C30
(34) C32 = 1/2 − C19C30

63
(35) C33 = 0.5C26C32 + C28C31C29 − (0.5C30C28 + C32C27C29)
(36) C34 = 1/12 + C18 − C21 − C18C26
ASME NM.2-2022

(37) C35 = −C18(C0/4)3/4

(38) C36 = (C28C35C29 − C32C34C29)/C33
(39) C37 = [0.5C26C35 + C34 C31C29 − (0.5C30C34 + C35C27C29)]/C33
(40) E1 = C17C36 + C18 + C19C37
(41) E2 = C20C36 + C21 + C22C37
(42) E3 = C23C36 + C24 + C25C37
(43) E4 = 1/4 + C37/12 + C36/4 − E3/5 − 3E2/2 − E1
(44) E5 = E1(1/2 + A0/6) + E2(1/4 + 11A0/84) + E3(1/70 + A0/105)
(45) E6 = E5 − C36(7/120 + A0/36 + 3A0/C0) − 1/40 − A0/72 − C37(1/60 + A0/120 + 1/C0)
 ASME NM.2-2022

MANDATORY APPENDIX II
CALCULATION OF PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
USING THE LAMINATE ANALYSIS METHOD

II-1 SCOPE
This Appendix details the use of micromechanics and classical lamination theory (CLT) analysis methods to calculate
the laminate properties needed for design. The application of the principals of micromechanics allows the physical and
mechanical properties of a lamina to be determined based on its constituent materials. The CLT method consists of
integrating the physical and mechanical properties of each lamina through the thickness of the laminate allowing the
physical and mechanical properties of the laminate to be determined. Once the properties of the laminate have been
determined, the laminate can be analyzed for various load inputs. The analysis allows the stresses and strains to be
determined, and the computation of the strength ratios of each lamina using the Tsai-Wu interaction criteria.

II-2 COORDINATE SYSTEMS

Two coordinate systems, as illustrated in Figure II-2-1, are used in the application of micromechanics and CLT of flat
plates. When relating to the local coordinates of a material, the principal axes are identified as directions 1, 2, and 3. Within
the local coordinate system, direction 1 is aligned along the length of the fiber, direction 2 is perpendicular to direction 1,
and within the plane of the lamina. Direction 3 is normal to the 1–2 plane. Notations for in-plane shear are commonly
simplified to direction 6.
The second coordinate system relates to the global, or structural coordinate system. While referencing the global
coordinate system, the principal axes are identified as x, y, and z. Within the global coordinate system, axes x and y
represent the laminate in-plane directions, and z is oriented through the thickness of the lamina or laminate. Axes x and y
can be oriented for convenience; however, it is typical in the analysis of cylinders that x is aligned with the axial direction,
and y with hoop.
The material coordinate system can be related to the global coordinate system by conducting a rotation through the
angle theta. Using the conventions described above for the orientations of the global coordinate system on a cylinder, a
unidirectional layer oriented at an angle of 0 deg would represent an axial reinforcement; an orientation of 90 deg would
therefore represent a hoop reinforcement.

Figure II-2-1
Coordinate System
Z, 3

u
X 1

Legend:
1, 2, 3 = material coordinates
x, y, z = piping coordinates

64
 ASME NM.2-2022

II-3 DETERMINATION OF LAMINA PROPERTIES

The physical properties of a lamina can be determined by testing or when test data is not available, the physical
properties of a lamina can be predicted by the application of micromechanics. This section details the methods
that are to be used to predict the properties of a lamina in the absence of test data.

II-3.1 Volume and Weight Fractions

(a) General. Two conditions typically exist when defining a lamina; either
(1) the thickness and the fiber weight fraction are known (such as the application of a unidirectional roving), or
(2) the thickness and reinforcement weight are known (such as a layer of woven roving or chopped strand mat)
In both cases, information such as the lamina thickness, fiber density, and the matrix (resin) density must be known to
predict the properties of the lamina. The lamina thicknesses shall be based on measurement unless the lamina has not yet
been produced. In such cases it will be necessary to estimate the expected thickness. Thicknesses shall, however, be
confirmed once the lamina has been produced.
(b) In cases where the lamina thickness and fiber weight fraction are known [(a)(1)], the following approach is used:
Step 1. First, determine the volume fractions from the following equations:

Wf m
Vf =
f Wf f + W f m

Vm = 1 Vf

where
Vf = volume fraction of the fiber, dimensionless
Vm = volume fraction of the matrix, dimensionless
Wf = weight fraction of the reinforcing fiber, dimensionless
ρm = density of the matrix, kg/mm3 (lb/in.3)
ρf = density of the reinforcement, kg/mm3 (lb/in.3)

Step 2. Next, determine the volume per unit area of the constituent materials from the following equations:

vAf = V f (t kA u)

vAm = t kA u vAf

where
Au = unit area, mm2/mm2 (144 in.2/ft2)
tk = thickness of the layer k, mm (in.)
vAf = volume of the reinforcing fibers per unit area, mm3/mm2 (in.3/ft2)
vAm = volume of the matrix per unit area, mm3/mm2 (in.3/ft2)

Step 3. Then, determine the reinforcement weight, W, kg/mm2 (lb/ft2)

W = vAf f

65
 ASME NM.2-2022

(c) In cases where the thickness and the reinforcement weight are known [(a)(2)], the following approach is used:
Step 1. First, determine the volume per unit area of the constituent materials
W
vAf =
f

vAm = t kA u vAf

Step 2. Next, the volume fractions are determined

vAf
Vf =
vAf + vAm

Vm = 1 Vf

Step 3. Then the fiber weight fraction is determined

Vf f
Wf =
V f f + (1 V f ) m

(d) Determining Density of the Lamina. Once the above computations have been completed, the density of the lamina, ρc,
kg/mm3 (lb/in.3), can be determined
c = m (1 Vf ) + Vf f

II-3.2 Mechanical Properties for a Lamina With Unidirectional Reinforcement

II-3.2.1 Elastic Properties
(a) The formulas necessary to determine the elastic properties of a lamina with unidirectional reinforcement are
included herein. It should be noted that it is assumed that a uniform fiber orientation and distribution exists throughout
the thickness of the lamina.
(1) Knowing the mechanical properties of the constituent materials, the plane strain bulk moduli are first computed.
These are
The plane strain bulk modulus for isotropic fibers, MPa (psi)

Ef
Kf =
2(1 f 2 f 2)

The plane strain bulk modulus for an isotropic matrix, MPa (psi)

Em
Km =
2(1 m 2 m 2)

where
Ef = the modulus of elasticity of the fiber, MPa (psi)
Em = the modulus of elasticity of the matrix, MPa (psi)
νf = the Poisson’s ratio of the fiber, dimensionless
νm = the Poisson’s ratio of the matrix, dimensionless

If the shear moduli of the constituent materials are not available, and they can be assumed to be isotropic, then the
following relations can be used:

66
 ASME NM.2-2022

The shear modulus of the fiber, MPa (psi)

Ef
Gf =
2(1 f)

The shear modulus of the matrix, MPa (psi)

Em
Gm =
2(1 m)

(2) Next, the following relations must be determined:

The plane strain bulk modulus for the lamina, MPa (psi)

Kstar =
( )
Vm· K m· K f + Gm + V f · K f · (K m + Gm)

Vm· (K f + Gm) + V f ·(K m + Gm)

To simplify the remainder of the analysis the following are used:

Gf
=
Gm

m= 3 4m

f = 3 4 f

ÄÅ ÉÑ ÄÅ ÉÑ
A = 3 ·V f ·Vm 2· ( 1) · ( + f ) + ÅÅÅÅÅÅÇ · m + f· m (·m ) 3Ñ ÅÅ Ñ
f ·V f ÑÑÑÑÖ· ÅÅÇV f · m · ( 1) ( · m + 1)ÑÑÑÑ
Ö

1 ÄÅ ÉÑ ÅÄÅ 3ÑÑÑ
É
B= 3 ·V f ·Vm 2· ( 1) · ( + f + ÅÅÅÅ · m + (
) 1) ·V f + 1ÑÑÑÑ· ÅÅÅ( m 1) · ( + f ) 2· (·m )
f · V f ÑÑÑÖÑ
2Ç Ö ÅÇÅ
Vf ÄÅ ÉÑ
Å 3ÑÑ
+ · ( m + 1) ·( 1) · ÅÅÅÅ + f + · m (
f · V f ÑÑÑÖÑ )
2 ÅÇ

ÅÄ ÑÉ ÄÅÅ É
3ÑÑÑÑ
C = 3 ·V f ·Vm 2·( 1) · ( + f ) + ÅÅÅÅ · m + ( 1) ·V f + 1ÑÑÑ ·ÅÅÅÅ + f + ( · m )· V f ÑÑ
Ç ÑÖ ÇÅ f ÑÖ

(3) Finally, the mechanical properties of the lamina can be determined by the following:
The modulus of elasticity in the fiber direction, MPa (psi)

4· ( f 2
m) · Vm·V f
E11 = Em ·Vm + Ef ·V f +
Vm Vf 1
+ +
Kf Km Gm

67
 ASME NM.2-2022

The major in-plane Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

ij 1 1 yzz
j
( f m) ·jjj K zz · V · V
Kf z m f
k m {
12 = m·Vm + f · V f + Vm Vf 1
+ +
Kf Km Gm

The in-plane shear modulus, MPa (psi)

Vf
G12 = Gm + Vm
1
+
( Gf Gm ) 2·Gm

The transverse interlaminar shear modulus, MPa (psi)

ÅÄÅ ÑÉÑ
Gm ·ÅÅÅÅ 4· B2 4· A· C + 2 ·BÑÑÑÑ
ÅÇ ÑÖ
G 23 =
2 ·A

The modulus of elasticity transverse to the fiber direction, MPa (psi)

4· K star · G23
E 22 =
ij 4·K star· 12 2 yz
K star + jjj1 + zz· G
zz 23
j E11
k {

The minor in-plane Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

E 22
21 = · 12
E11

Properties normal to the plane of the lamina can also be computed using the following:
The modulus of elasticity through the thickness of the lamina, MPa (psi)
E33 = E 22

The fiber direction interlaminar shear modulus, MPa (psi)

G13 = G12

The fiber direction interlaminar Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

13 = 12

The transverse interlaminar Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

ij 2 y
K starjj1 + 4·Kstar· 12 zzz ·G
jj E1 zz 23
= k {
23
jij 4·Kstar· 12 2 zyz
Kstar + jj1 + zz·G 23
j E1 z
k {

The minor out-of-plane Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

31 = 21

68
 ASME NM.2-2022

The transverse interlaminar Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

32 = 23

II-3.2.2 Thermal Mechanical Properties. The formulas necessary to determine the thermal mechanical properties of a
lamina with unidirectional reinforcement are included herein. As indicated in para. II-3.2.1, it is assumed that a uniform
fiber orientation and distribution exists throughout the thickness of the lamina.
The coefficient of thermal expansion along the direction of the fiber, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)
V f Ef f + 1 ( )
V f Em m
11 =
V f E f + (1 V f )Em

The coefficient of thermal expansion transverse to the direction of the fiber, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)

(
22 = V f f 1 + v f ) + (1 Vf ) m(1 + vm) 11v12

where
αf = the coefficient of thermal expansion of the fiber, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)
αm = the coefficient of thermal expansion of the matrix, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)

II-3.3 Mechanical Properties for a Lamina With Randomly Oriented Reinforcement

When a lamina is reinforced with randomly oriented fibers, the in-plane properties can be considered isotropic. To
determine the properties of a lamina with randomly oriented reinforcements, it is necessary to first compute the proper-
ties of a representative lamina with unidirectional reinforcements. The approach detailed herein assumes that the
properties of the representative lamina with unidirectional reinforcements have already been determined.
II-3.3.1 Elastic Properties for Lamina With Randomly Oriented Reinforcements. The formulas necessary to deter-
mine the elastic properties of a lamina with randomly oriented reinforcement are included herein. It is important to note
that in order for the formulas to remain valid, the following conditions must be met:
(a) The elastic properties of the representative lamina with unidirectional reinforcement must be of the same consti-
tuent materials and weight fractions of the intended lamina with randomly oriented reinforcements.
(b) The lengths of the glass reinforcement exceed the critical fiber length [approximately 10 mm (0.40 in.) with 2.76
GPa (400 ksi) strength in the fiber] and exceed 1.4 MPa (200 psi) shear strength at the fiber to resin interface.
The in-plane modulus of elasticity, MPa (psi)
E 22 2 + 2· E22 · E11 + 4· E22 · G12 · + E11 2 + 4· E11·G12 · 4 · 12 2·E 22 2 + 8· 12· E 22 ·G12 ·
E=
(3· E 22 + 3 ·E11 + 2· 12·E 22 + 4 ·G12 · ) ·

The in-plane shear modulus, MPa (psi)

1 E11 1 E 1 12· E 22 1
G= · + · 22 · + · G12
8 8 4 2

The in-plane Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

E11 + E 22 4 ·G12 · + 6· 12·E 22
=
3 ·E 22 + 3· E11 + 2 · 12· E22 + 4· G12 ·

where
Δ = 1 − ν12ν21

II-3.3.2 Thermal Mechanical Properties for Lamina With Randomly Oriented Reinforcements. The coefficient of
thermal expansion for a lamina with randomly oriented reinforcements, α mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F), can be determined by
the following. The conditions detailed in para. II-3.3.1 must be satisfied for the formula below to be valid.

= 11
+ 22
+ 11 22 ijjj E11 E 22 yz
zz
2 2 j
j zz
k E11 + (1 + 2v12 )E 22 {

69
 ASME NM.2-2022

II-3.4 Stress–Strain Relations for an Orthotropic Lamina

In the proceeding section the stress and strain behavior of an orthotropic lamina will be discussed. It is important to
note that the results of this analysis are applicable only to flat laminates subject to a state of plane stress. It is possible to
adapt this analysis for curved surfaces; however, it is the responsibility of the designer to ensure the deformations are
appropriate for the surface under review.
The response of an orthotropic lamina subject to a three-dimensional stress tensor is described by the equation below:
ÄÅ ÉÑ ÅÄÅ S É
0 ÑÑÑÑ ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ 11 ÑÑ Å 11 S12 S13 0
Å 0
ÅÅ 11 ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å
Å ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ 22 ÑÑ Å
ÅÅ S12 S22 S23 0 0 0 ÑÑ Ñ ÅÅ 22 ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å
ÅÅ S Ñ
Ñ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ 33 ÑÑ Ñ
ÅÅ ÑÑ = ÅÅ
ÅÅ 23 ÑÑ
Å 13 S 23 S33 0 0 0 ÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ 33 ÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å
ÅÅ 0 0 0 S44 0 0 ÑÑ Ñ ÅÅÅ 23 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ 13 ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ 13 ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å 0
Å 0 0 0 S 0 Ñ
Ñ ÅÅÅ ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ 55 ÑÑ ÅÅÇ 12 ÑÑÖ
ÅÅÇ 12 ÑÑÖk ÅÅ 0 Å Ñ
Ñ
ÅÇ 0 0 0 0 S66 ÑÖk Ñ k

Subscript k denotes that the relation applies to layer “k.” In the analysis of flat laminated thin plates, the loadings are
simplified to a condition of plane stress, i.e., σ33, τ23 and τ13 all equal zero. The equation above is then simplified to the
equations below:
ÄÅ ÉÑ ÅÄÅ S ÑÉÑ ÅÄÅ 11 ÑÉÑ
ÅÅÅ 11 ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ 11 S12 0 ÑÑÑ Å Ñ
ÅÅÅ 22 ÑÑÑ = ÅÅÅ S12 S22 0 ÑÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ 22 ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅÇ 12 ÑÑÖk ÅÅÅÇ 0 0 S66 ÑÑÑÖ ÅÅÇ 12 ÑÑÖk
k

33k = S13k 11k + S23k 22k

The 3 × 3 matrix above is commonly known as the reduced compliance matrix. The second equation is necessary to
maintain a condition of plane stress.
Typically, the strains are known, and the stresses are desired. Therefore, the equation above is then re-arranged to the
following:
ÄÅ É
ÅÄÅ 11 ÑÉÑ ÅÅ Q11 Q12 0 ÑÑÑ ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ
Å
ÑÑ
Ñ ÅÅÅ 11 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅÅ 22 ÑÑÑ = ÅÅÅQ12 Q 22 0 ÑÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ 22 ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅÇ 12 ÑÑÖk ÅÅÅÅ 0 0 Q 66 ÑÑÑÑ
Ñ ÅÅ ÑÑ
Å 12 Ñ
ÅÇ Ök Ç Ök

The 3 × 3 matrix above is commonly known as the reduced stiffness matrix and it is the inverse of the reduced
compliance matrix.
The reduced stiffness coefficients, Qij, MPa (psi), from the equations above can be related to Engineering constants by
the following:
E11
Q11 =
(1 12 21)

E 22
Q 22 =
(1 12 21)

Q12 = 12Q 22

Q 66 = G12

70
 ASME NM.2-2022

The approach detailed above can be used to relate the stresses and strains of a lamina within its principal material
coordinate system. It is typical for laminates to be comprised of several layers each with their own material coordinate
system. As a result, it is necessary to define an arbitrary global coordinate system. This allows the laminate, and
comprising lamina, to be evaluated within a common coordinate system.
The stress resultants from the material coordinate system can be rotated to the global coordinate system, and vice
versa, by applying a transformation matrix as defined below:
ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÄÅ 11 ÑÉÑ ÅÅ xx ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å Ñ
ÅÅ 22 ÑÑ = [T ] ÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ k ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ 12 ÑÑ ÅÅ xy ÑÑÑ
ÅÇ ÑÖk ÅÅÇ ÑÑÖk

ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ xx ÑÑ ÅÄÅ 11 ÑÉÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å Ñ
ÅÅ yy ÑÑ = [T ] ÅÅÅ 22 ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ k ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ xy ÑÑ
ÅÅÇ ÑÑÖk ÅÅÅÇ 12 ÑÑÑÖk

where
ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ cos 2 sin 2 ÑÑ
ÅÅ 2cos sin ÑÑ
Å ÑÑ
[T ] = ÅÅÅ sin 2 cos 2 2cos sin ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÅÅÇ cos sin cos sin cos 2 sin 2 ÑÑÖÑ

The following is produced by applying the transformation matrix to the reduced stiffness matrix. The 3 × 3 matrix below
is known as the transformed reduced stiffness matrix.
ÄÅ É
ÅÄÅ xx ÑÉÑ ÅÅQ bar Q bar Q bar ÑÑÑ ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ xx ÑÑ
ÅÅ yy ÑÑ Å
11 12 16 Ñ
Ñ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ = ÅÅÅQ bar12 Q bar22 Q bar26 ÑÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å
Å Ñ
Ñ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅÅÇ xy ÑÑÑÖk ÅÅÅQ bar Q bar Q bar ÑÑÑ ÅÅÇ xy ÑÑÖ
ÅÅÇ 16 26 66 ÑÑÖk k

The transformed reduced stiffness coefficients, Qbarij, MPa (psi), can be determined by the following:
Q bar = Q11cos 4 + Q 22 sin 4 + 2(Q12 + 2Q 66)cos 2 sin 2
11

Q bar = (Q11 + Q 22 4Q 66)cos 2 sin 2 + Q12 cos 4 + sin 4 ( )

12

Q bar = Q11sin 4 + Q 22cos 4 + 2(Q12 + 2Q 66)cos 2 sin 2

22

Q bar = Q11cos 3 sin Q 22cos sin 3 + (Q12 + 2Q 66) cos ( sin 3 cos 3 sin )
16

Q bar = Q11cos sin 3 Q 22cos 3 sin + (Q12 + 2Q 66) cos 3 sin ( cos sin 3 )
26

2
Q bar = (Q11 + Q 22 2Q12)cos 2 sin 2 + Q 66 cos 2 ( sin 2)
66

71
 ASME NM.2-2022

II-4 CLASSICAL LAMINATION THEORY

The methods and equations detailed herein allows the response of a multilayered laminate subject to a state of plane
stress to be quantified. The results of this analysis are only applicable to a thin flat laminate subject to a state of plane stress
resulting from a uniformly distributed load. It is possible to adapt the analysis for curved surfaces; however, it is the
responsibility of the designer to ensure the deformations are appropriate for the surface under review. Other methods of
laminate analysis may be used in place of the equations herein, but it is the responsibility of the designer to prove that they
are valid.
In the preceding section the stresses of any lamina within the global coordinate system were found to be related to the
strains as detailed below.
ÅÄÅQ ÑÉ
ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ xx ÑÑ ÅÅ bar11 Q bar12 Q bar16 ÑÑÑ ÅÄÅ xx ÑÉÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
Å Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑ = ÅÅÅQ bar12 Q bar22 Q bar26 ÑÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ xy ÑÑ Å Ñ ÅÅ xy ÑÑ
ÅÇ ÑÖk ÅÅÅQ bar16 Q bar26 Q bar66 ÑÑÑ
ÅÇ ÑÖk Ç Ök

Knowing that the loads applied to the laminate are uniform, the assessment of the laminate is simplified and conducted
on a unit length basis. After applying a series of sums and integrations, the following relationship is established for the
laminate.
ÄÅ É
ÅÅ Nxx ÑÑÑ ÄÅÅ É Ä ÉÑ
ÅÅ Ñ B ÑÑ ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ N ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ 11 12 16 11 12 16 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ xx 0 ÑÑÑÑ
A A A B B
ÅÅ yy ÑÑ ÅÅ A12 A22 A26 B12 B22 B26 ÑÑ ÅÅ yy0 ÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ Nxy ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ A ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ 16 A26 A 66 B16 B26 B66 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ xy 0 ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ Mxx ÑÑÑ = ÅÅÅÅ B11 B12 B16 D11 D12 D16 ÑÑÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ xx ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ Å Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÅÅ M yy ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ B12 B22 B26 D12 D22 D26 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÅÅ Mxy ÑÑÑ ÅÅÇ B16 B26 B66 D16 D26 D66 ÑÑÑÖ ÅÅÅÇ xy ÑÑÑÖ
ÅÅÇ ÑÑÖ

where
Nxx, Nyy, Nxy = the distributed force resultants as illustrated in Figure II-4-1, N/mm (lbf/in.)
Mxx, Myy, Mxy = the distributed moment resultants as illustrated in Figure II-4-2, N/mm/mm (lbf/in./in.)
εxx0, εyy0, εxy0 = the midplane strains of the laminate, mm/mm (in./in.)
κxx0, κyy0, κxy0 = the midplane curvatures of the laminate, radians/mm (radians/in.)

The matrix containing terms A11 through D66 describes how a laminate will deform under the various in-plane loadings
Aij = the extensional stiffness coefficients, N/mm (lbf/in.)
Bij = the coupling stiffness coefficients that result in out-of-plane deformations due to in-plane loads, N/mm/mm (lbf
in./in.)
Dij = the bending stiffness coefficients, N/mm (lbf/in.)

Figure II-4-1
In-Place Force Resultants
y

Nyy

Nxy

Nxy

Nxx
x

72
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure II-4-2
Moment Resultants
y

Mxy Myy
Mxy

Mxx

The stiffness coefficients of the laminate are determined using the following relations:
n
ÅÄÅ ÑÉÑ
A ij = ÅÅQ zk 1]ÑÑÑ
ÅÅÇ bar ijk[zk ÑÖ
k=1

n
ÄÅ ÄÅ ÉÑÉÑÑ
ÅÅ
ÅÅQ bar ij ÅÅÅÅzk 2 zk 1 2ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
1
Bij =
2 ÅÇ kÇ ÑÖÑÖ
k=1

n
ÅÄÅ ÄÅ
Å 3
ÉÑÑÉÑ
zk 1 3ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
1 ÅÅQ
Dij = ÅÅÇ bar ijkÅÅÅÇzk ÖÑÖ
3
k=1

where
i, j = 1, 2, and 6
n = the total number of layers
zk = the distance from the geometric midplane of the laminate to the upper surface of the nth lamina, as detailed in
Figure II-4-3. The geometric midplane of the laminate is defined as z = 0. Dimension z0 is the distance from the
midplane to the bottom of the laminate and is negative. Conversely the dimension for any lamina located above
the geometric midplane is positive.

During the design process the forces and moments are typically known and the strains are desired. It is therefore
necessary to invert the 6 × 6 ABD matrix. The result of this operation is detailed below:

ÄÅ É ÅÄÅ a É ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ xx 0 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅ 11 a12 a16 b11 b12 b16 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ Nxx ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ ÅÅ Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ yy0 ÑÑÑ ÅÅ a a22 a26 b21 b22 b26 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ Nyy ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅÅ 12 ÑÑ ÅÅ N ÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ
xy 0 ÑÑ ÅÅÅ a16 a26 a66 b61 b62 b66 ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ xy ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ = ÅÅ Ñ×Å Ñ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ xx ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ b11 b21 b61 d11 d12 d16 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ Mxx ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ Å ÑÑ ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ yy ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅb12 b22 b62 d12 d22 d26 ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ M yy ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅÇ xy ÑÑÑÖ ÅÅÅb b26 b66 d16 d26 d66 ÑÑÑÖ ÅÅÅ Mxy ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÇ 16 ÅÇ ÑÖ

73
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure II-4-3
Notations for Ply Positions and Laminate Stacking Sequence
Bottom of Laminate

1
2
z0 3 t/2
z2
4
z4 5
Midsurface

zk-2
t/2
zk zk-1

k–1
k

where
ÅÄÅ a É Ä
b16 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ A11 A12 A16
É 1
ÅÅ 11 a12 a16 b11 b12 B11 B12 B16 ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ a12
ÅÅ a22 a26 b21 b22 b26 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ A12 A22 A26 B12 B22 B26 ÑÑÑ
Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÅ a
ÅÅ 16 a26 a66 b61 b62 b66 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ A16 A26 A 66 B16 B26 B66 ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ=Å Ñ
ÅÅÅ b11 b21 b61 d11 d12 d16 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ B11 B12 B16 D11 D12 D16 ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÅb12
ÅÅ b22 b62 d12 d22 d26 ÑÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ B12 B22 B26 D12 D22 D26 ÑÑÑÑ
Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÅÅb16
ÅÇ b26 b66 d16 d26 d66 ÑÑÑÑÖ ÅÅÅÇ B16 B26 B66 D16 D26 D66 ÑÑÖÑ

Once the midplane strains and curvatures have been quantified, the strains [mm/mm (in./in.)] can be computed for
each lamina in the global coordinate system using the relationship below:
ÄÅ ÉÑ ÄÅ É ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ xx ÑÑ ÅÅ xx 0 ÑÑÑ ÅÅ xx ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ i Å Ñ
ÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑ = ÅÅÅ yy0 ÑÑÑ + jjjz + w zzzÅÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑÑ
y
t
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ k 2 {ÅÅÅ xy ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ xy ÑÑ Å Ñ
ÅÇ ÑÖk ÅÅÇ xy 0 ÑÑÖ ÅÅÇ ÑÑÖ

where w is a term to specify the location within the lamina where the strains are to be computed. Setting w to 0 will allow
for the computation of the lamina midplane strains. Setting w to 1 or −1 will allow for the computation of the strains at the
upper, and lower surfaces respectively.
Repeated for convenience, the layer stresses in the global coordinate system [MPa (psi)] are then computed using the
following:
ÄÅ ÉÑ ÅÄÅQ ÑÉÑ ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ xx ÑÑ ÅÅÅ bar11 Q bar12 Q bar16 ÑÑÑ ÅÅ xx ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ Å Ñ
ÅÅ yy ÑÑ = ÅÅQ bar Q bar Q bar ÑÑ × ÅÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ 12 22 26 ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅÅ xy ÑÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ xy ÑÑ
ÅÇ ÑÖk ÅÅÅQ bar16 Q bar26 Q bar66 ÑÑÑ Å Ñ
ÅÇ ÑÖk Ç Ök

The lamina strains in the global coordinate system are then transformed into the material coordinate system using the
transformation matrix as follows:
ÄÅ É ÅÄÅ ÑÉÑ ÅÄÅ É
ÅÅ 11 ÑÑÑ ÅÅ cos 2 sin 2 2cos sin ÑÑ ÅÅ xx ÑÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ Ñ
ÅÅ 22 ÑÑ = ÅÅ Ñ yy ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ sin 2 cos 2 2cos sin ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ /2 ÑÑ Å Ñ Å Ñ
ÅÇ 12 ÑÖk ÅÅÅÅÇ cos sin cos sin cos 2 sin 2 ÑÑÑÑÖ ÅÅÅÇ xy /2 ÑÑÑÖ
k k

And finally, also repeated for convenience, the layer stresses in the material coordinate system [MPa (psi)] are
computed as follows:

74
 ASME NM.2-2022

ÄÅ ÉÑ Ä É
ÄÅ ÉÑ ÅÅ cos 2 ÑÑ ÅÅ xx ÑÑ
ÅÅ 11 ÑÑ ÅÅ sin 2 2cos sin ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅ 22 ÑÑ = ÅÅÅÅ sin 2 cos 2 2cos sin ÑÑÑ ÅÅÅ yy ÑÑÑ
ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅÇ 12 ÑÑÖk ÅÅÅÅ ÑÑ ÅÅ ÑÑ
ÅÅÇ cos sin cos sin cos 2 sin 2 ÑÑÑÖk ÅÅÇ xy ÑÑÖk

II-4.1 Effective Laminate Elastic Properties

The following relations shall be used to determine the effective elastic properties for a symmetric laminate in the global
coordinate system:
The modulus of elasticity in the x direction, MPa (psi)
1 12
Exx = , Exx f = 3
ta11 t d11

NOTE: This is typically defined as the axial direction for cylinders.

The modulus of elasticity in the y direction, MPa (psi)
1 12
E yy = , E yy f = 3
ta22 t d22

NOTE: This is typically defined as the hoop direction for cylinders.

The in-plane shear modulus, MPa (psi)
1
Gxy =
ta66

The major in-plane Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

a12 d12
xy = , xy f =
a11 d11

The minor in-plane Poisson’s ratio, mm/mm (in./in.)

a12 d12
yx = , yx f =
a22 d22

where
aij, dij = the terms from the inverted 6 × 6 ABD matrix
t = the total laminate thickness

Superscript f indicates flexural properties.

For the laminate to be symmetric, the B matrix must be zero. This indicates that there is no coupling between extension
and bending.
In cases where the laminate is not symmetric, and the laminate is on a curved cylindrical surface, the following relations
shall be used:
A11A22 A12 2
Exx =
tA22

A11A22 A12 2
E yy =
tA11

A 66
Gxy =
t

75
 ASME NM.2-2022

A12
xy =
A22

A12
yx =
A11

where
Aij = the terms from the 6 × 6 ABD matrix
t = the total laminate thickness

II-4.2 Effective Laminate Thermal Mechanical Properties

The following relations shall be used to determine the effective thermal mechanical properties for a laminate in the
global coordinate system:
Once the thermal mechanical properties for each lamina have been determined it will be necessary to rotate the
properties into the global coordinate system. The rotation is conducted by the following:
The coefficient of thermal expansion of a lamina in the global x direction, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)
2 2
xxk = 11k cos ( ) + 22k sin ( )

The coefficient of thermal expansion of a lamina in the global y direction, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)
2 2
yyk = 11k sin ( ) + 22k cos ( )

The coefficient of thermal expansion for in-plane shear of a lamina in the global coordinate system, mm/mm/°C (in./
in./°F)
xyk = 2cos ( ) sin ( )( 11k 22k)

Assuming the perimeter of the laminate is constrained, the loads generated by the application of a unit temperature are
determined by the following.
n
lÄÅÅ
o
ÉÑ |
o
T1 =
Nxx mÅÅÅQ bar xx + Q bar yy + Q bar xy ÑÑÑÑ [zk
o }
zk 1]o
nÅÇ 11 12 16 ÖÑk ~
k=1

n
l Ä ÉÑ |
oÅÅÅ ÑÑ o
NT1
yy = m
oÅÅÅÇQ bar12 xx + Q bar22 yy + Q bar26 xy ÑÑÑÖk [zk zk 1]}
o
n ~
k= 1

n
lÄÅÅ
o
ÉÑ |
o
T1 =
Nxy mÅÅÅQ bar xx + Q bar yy + Q bar xy ÑÑÑÑ [zk
o }
zk 1]o
nÅÇ 16 26 66 ÖÑk ~
k=1

n
l Ä ÑÉÑ ÅÄÅ 2 ÑÉ|
oÅÅÅ o
T1 = 1
Mxx m Ñ Å
oÅÅÇÅQ bar11 xx + Q bar12 yy + Q bar16 xy ÑÑÑÖk ÅÅÇzk zk2 1ÑÑÑÑ}
2 n Öo
~
k=1

n
lÄÅÅ
o
ÉÑ ÄÅ
ÑÑ ÅÅz 2 ÉÑo
|
zk2 1ÑÑÑÑ}
1 ÅÅQ
MT1
yy = m
oÅÇ Å + Q + Q ÑÑ ÅÅ k
2 n
bar12 xx bar22 yy bar26 xy ÖÑk Ç Öo
~
k=1

76
 ASME NM.2-2022

n ÄÅ ÉÑ
ÅÅ Ñ
T1 = 1
Mxy ( ÅÅ Q )(
2
ÅÅ bar16 xx + Q bar26 yy + Q bar66 xy zk zk2 1 ÑÑÑÑ
)
2 ÅÇ k ÑÑÖ
k=1

If the perimeter of the laminate is free to displace and the loads from above are applied to the laminate, then the
resulting strains, and coefficients of thermal expansion, can be determined by the following:
The coefficient of thermal expansion for the laminate in the global x direction, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
xx = Nxxa11 + N yya12 + Nxya16 + Mxxb11 + M yyb12 + Mxyb16

The coefficient of thermal expansion for the laminate in the global y direction, mm/mm/°C (in./in./°F)
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
yy = N xxa12 + N yya22 + Nxya26 + Mxxb21 + M yyb22 + Mxyb26

The coefficient of thermal expansion for the laminate for in-plane shear in the global coordinate system, mm/mm/°C
(in./in./°F)
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
xy = Nxxa16 + N yya26 + Nxya66 + Mxxb61 + M yyb62 + Mxyb66

II-5 LAMINA FAILURE PREDICTION

In general, a lamina has five independent uniaxial ultimate strengths; tensile and compressive strengths in the direction
of the fiber, tensile and compressive strengths in the direction transverse to the fiber, and shear strength with respect to a
pure shear stress in the principal directions. Furthermore, the five strengths can be unequal.
Each lamina within the laminate is to be analyzed separately based on computing the lamina stresses resulting from the
midplane deformations of the laminate. If any lamina is found to fail the criteria, then the corresponding load on the
laminate shall not be allowed.
The interaction between the in-plane stresses and lamina strengths is performed using the Tsai-Wu interaction criteria,
shown below:
2 2 2
FI = 11F1 + 22F2 + 11 F11 + 22 F22 + 12 F66 + 2F12 11 22

If the failure index (FI) is ≥ 1.0 then failure of the lamina is expected. It is useful to note that each of the terms in the above
equation can be used to assess the relative influence that each stress term has on the index.
To achieve the minimum strength ratios that are detailed in Chapter 2, it is necessary to modify the Tsai-Wu interaction
criteria to report a strength ratio, rather than a failure index. To do so, each stress in the Tsai-Wu interaction criteria is
divided by the strength ratio to yield:
ÅÄÅ 2 2 2 ÑÉÑ 2
[ 11F1 + 22F2 ]R + ÅÅÇÅ 11 F11 + 22 F22 + 12 F66 + 2F12 11 22 ÑÑÖÑR 1=0

The strength ratio for each lamina is then determined by the following:

H± H 2 + 4G
R=
2G

where
G = 11 2F11 + 2 2
22 F22 + 12 F66 + 2F12 11 22

H = 11F1 + 22F2

The strength interaction terms are detailed below:

The fiber direction second order term, 1/MPa (1/psi)
1 1
F1 = T C
11 11

77
 ASME NM.2-2022

The fiber direction fourth order term, 1/MPa2 (1/psi2)

1
F11 = T C
11 11

The transverse direction second order term, 1/MPa (1/psi)

1 1
F2 = T C
22 22

The transverse direction fourth order term, 1/MPa2 (1/psi2)

1
F22 = T C
22 22

The fourth order in-plane shear term, 1/MPa2 (1/psi2)

1
F66 = 2
( 12 S)

The F12 coupling term [1/MPa2 (1/psi2)] is approximated by the following expression but it is the responsibility of the
designer to ensure it is applicable for the lamina under evaluation:
1
F12 = F11F22
2

The strength terms may be determined from a test or predicted from the relations below. It is important to note that it is
assumed that the tensile and compressive moduli are equal in the relations below.
The ultimate in-plane shear strength, MPa (psi)
S S
12 = 12 G12

The ultimate tensile strength in the fiber direction, MPa (psi)

T = T
11 11 E11

The ultimate compressive strength in the fiber direction, MPa (psi)

C= C
11 11 E11

The ultimate tensile strength transverse to the fiber direction, MPa (psi)
T = T
22 22 E22

The ultimate compressive strength transverse to the fiber direction, MPa (psi)
C= C
22 22 E 22

If test data is not available, then the following strain limits may be used:

Strain Direction Randomly Oriented Fibers Oriented Fiber

ε11T 0.0150 0.0200
ε11C 0.0200 0.0120
T
ε22 0.0150 0.00150
ε22C 0.0200 0.0080
γ12S 0.0268 0.0268

It can be seen from the table above that the permissible transverse strain limits for an oriented fiber are lower than the
limits along the direction of the fiber. As a result, if a laminate comprising of angled laminae is subject to a load that places
some of the laminae in a state of transverse stress it is likely that those laminae will govern the analysis. In such cases, if the
governing stress state for the remaining adjacent laminae is along the direction of the fiber, and the strength ratios for
these laminae comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, then the lamina under transverse stress may be exhibiting a

78
 ASME NM.2-2022

state of resin crazing. This type of response is common with woven roving, axial/hoop laminates, and FW laminates, and it
is permitted.
With these types of responses, it is permissible to analyze the laminate using macro layers. A macro layer is one where
the properties of two or more lamina are combined into a single layer. To use a macro layer, the designer must demon-
strate that the layer is able to achieve the predicted load-carrying capacity for the stress state under review.

79
 ASME NM.2-2022

MANDATORY APPENDIX III

STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORS, FLEXIBILITY FACTORS,
AND PRESSURE STRESS MULTIPLIERS

III-1 SCOPE In addition, historical values for fittings that have been
documented to have provided successful performance for
This Appendix provides methods for determining the a minimum of 5 yr may be used for fittings of similar mate-
stress intensification factors, flexibility factors, and pres- rial, construction, and geometry.
sure stress multipliers needed to predict stresses and These values shall then be incorporated in a pipe stress
deformation in piping components other than pipe. analysis in accordance with section 2-4.
These factors are applied to the results calculated for
pipe to find relevant values for piping components. Speci-
fically, the calculated stiffness of a pipe needs to be
III-2 ELBOWS
adjusted by the appropriate flexibility factor, k, to deter-
III-2.1 Flexibility Factors for Elbows
mine the stiffness of the component; the calculated
bending moment on a pipe needs to be multiplied by (a) Due to the ovalization of an elbow that occurs when
the appropriate stress intensification factor (SIF), i, to the elbow is exposed to a bending moment, the flexibility
determine the bending stress of the component; and of an elbow is typically greater than that of an equivalent
the pressure stress of a pipe needs to be multiplied by pipe.
the pressure stress multiplier, m, to determine the pres- (b) The flexibility factor, k, of an elbow is defined by the
sure stress of the component. following equation, and is not less than 1.0:
k = E/ P (III-2-1)
III-1.1 Definitions
flexibility factor, k: the ratio of the bending flexibility of a where
component to the bending flexibility of an equivalent pipe. θE = rotation of an elbow when the elbow is exposed to
It is used to predict the magnitude of the deformation of a bending moment, rad
the component relative to that of the equivalent pipe θP = rotation of an equivalent pipe (see Note) when the
under the same loading. pipe is exposed to the same bending moment, rad
stress intensification factor (SIF), i: the ratio of the peak x = R1
M
stress in a component to the peak stress in an equivalent EI
pipe. It is used to predict the magnitude of the peak stress E = axial modulus of elasticity of total wall,
in the component relative to that in the equivalent pipe MPa (psi)
under the same loading. I = moment of inertia of total wall, mm 4
(in.4)
pressure stress multiplier, m: the ratio of the pressure M = bending moment, N·mm (lb-in.)
stress in a component to that in an equivalent pipe. It R1 = radius of bend, mm (in.); R1 > the inside
is used to predict the pressure stress in the component diameter of the pipe, D
relative to that in an equivalent pipe under the same pres- α = angle of elbow in radians (e.g., π/2)
sure loading.
NOTE: An equivalent pipe is one that has the same
modulus of elasticity, E, the same second moment of
III-1.2 Sources of Factors area, I, and the same midline length, L = R × α, as
Appropriate values for k, i, and m can be determined by the elbow that it is intended to represent. These prop-
several methods, including erties are the properties that should be entered into a
(a) testing pipe stress analysis.
(b) finite element analysis (FEA)
(c) methods detailed in this Appendix (c) The same pipe properties that are intended to be
used to represent the elbow in a pipe stress analysis shall
be used in eq. (III-2-1) to determine the elbow’s flexibility
factor, k.

80
 ASME NM.2-2022

(d) In the absence of more directly applicable data, the (a) For elbows with one flanged end
flexibility factor for elbows may be determined as 1/6
i tR y
described in paras. III-2.1.1 through III-2.1.3. c = jjjj e 12 zzzz (III-2-4)
jj D zz
III-2.1.1 Type I and Type II Elbows. The equations
below may be used to calculate the flexibility factor, k,
( )
jj
k 2 {
zz

for Type I and Type II long-radius elbows that comply (b) For elbows with two flanged ends
with the following criteria:
1/3
(a) The diameter-to-total-thickness ratio is not greater i tR y
c = jjjj e 12 zzzz (III-2-5)
than 140. jj D zz
(b) The pipe size does not exceed 1 200 mm (48 in.) ( )
jj
k 2 {
zz
diameter.
(c) The butt joint between the elbow and the pipe is a where
Type II laminate, and the connected pipe is Type II or fila- D = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.)
ment-wound laminate. R1 = radius of bend, mm (in.)
For Type I elbows x = 1.5D
1.04 te = thickness of the total wall of the elbow measured
ji D zyji t zy
k = 0.22 jjj zzzjjj i zzz (III-2-2) at the extrados, mm (in.)
j te zj te z
k {k {
NOTE: k shall not be taken as less than 1.0.
For Type II elbows

ÄÅ ÉÑ III-2.2 Stress Intensification Factors for Elbows

ÅÅ i D y ÑÑi t y 0.98
j z j z
k = ÅÅÅÅ0.2jjj zzz 0.7ÑÑÑÑjjj i zzz (III-2-3)
(a) Due to the ovalization of an elbow that occurs when
ÅÅ j te z ÑÑj te z
ÅÇ k { ÖÑk { the elbow is exposed to a bending moment, the maximum
bending stress in an elbow is typically greater than that of
where an equivalent pipe.
D = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) (b) The SIF, i, of an elbow is defined as follows, and is
te = thickness of the total wall of the elbow measured not less than 1.0:
at the extrados [including a corrosion-barrier
i = E/ P (III-2-6)
thickness of at least 2.8 mm (0.11 in.)],
mm (in.)
where
ti = thickness of the total wall of the elbow measured
σE = maximum stress in an elbow when the elbow is
at the intrados [including a corrosion barrier
exposed to a bending moment, MPa (psi)
thickness of at least 2.8 mm (0.11 in.)],
σP = stress in an equivalent pipe (see Note) when the
mm (in.)
pipe is exposed to the same bending moment,
γ = correction factor for reduction in flexibility due to
MPa (psi)
internal pressure
x = M/Zs
x = i 1
jj Pr r yz M = bending moment, N·mm (in.-lb)
jj1 + 2.53 × R1 0.333 1.333 zzz
j Ehte te z Zs = section modulus, mm4 (in.4)
k {
Eh = hoop modulus of the elbow, MPa (psi) NOTE: An equivalent pipe is one that has the same
P = pressure, MPa (psi) section modulus, Zs, as the elbow that it is intended
R1 = radius of the bend, mm (in.) to represent. This is the section modulus that
should be entered into a pipe stress analysis.
x = 1.5D
r = inside radius of the elbow, mm (in.)
(c) The same section modulus that is intended to be
NOTE: k shall not be taken as less than 1.0. used to represent the elbow in a pipe stress analysis
shall be used in eq. (III-2-6) to determine the elbow’s
III-2.1.2 Elbows Other Than Type I and Type II. In the SIF, i.
absence of more directly applicable data, the flexibility (d) The magnitudes of SIFs typically depend on direc-
factor, k, for elbows other than Type I and Type II tion of the applied moment, i.e., in-plane, out-of-plane, or
shall be taken as 1.0. torsional, and are typically determined for both the hoop
and axial directions.
III-2.1.3 Flanged Elbows. The flexibility factor for (e) In the absence of more directly applicable data, the
flanged elbows shall be reduced by multiplying k by SIFs for elbows may be determined as described in
one of the following factors, c: paras. III-2.2.1 through III-2.2.3.

81
 ASME NM.2-2022

III-2.2.1 Type I and Type II Elbows (1) Type I Elbows

(-a) For iih
(a) The following equation shall be used to calculate i
for Type I and Type II long-radius elbows for which the it y
2 = 3.59 1.30 × jjjj is zzzz
diameter-to-structural-thickness ratio is not greater than k tes {
140, and for which the pipe size does not exceed 1 200 mm t
(48 in.) diameter: = 1.64 if is > 1.50
tes
i = 2 (III-2-7)
h0.667 (-b) For ioh
it y
where 2 = 2.37 0.78 × jjjj is zzzz
k tes {
t
= 1.20 if is > 1.50
h = flexibility characteristic tes
x = tesR1
r2 (-c) For iix and iox
r = inside radius of the elbow, mm (in.)
it y
R1 = radius of the bend, mm (in.) 2 = 2.15 0.74 × jjjj is zzzz
x = 1.5D where D is the inside diameter of the k tes {
pipe t
= 1.04 if is > 1.50
tes = thickness of the structural wall of the tes
elbow measured at the extrados, mm
(in.) where
α2 = correction factor for reduction in SIF due to tes = thickness of the structural wall measured at the
increased thickness at the intrados compared extrados, mm (in.)
to the extrados; see (c) below tis = thickness of the structural wall measured at the
γ = correction factor for reduction in SIF due to intrados, mm (in.)
internal pressure
x = i 1 (2) Type II Elbows
jj Pr r yz
jj1 + 2.53 × R10.333 1.333 zzz (-a) For iih
j Ehte te z
k { it y
Eh = hoop modulus of the elbow, MPa (psi) 2 = 3.03 1.02 × jjjj is zzzz
P = pressure, MPa (psi) k tes {
t
te = thickness of the total wall of the elbow = 1.50 if is > 1.50
tes
measured at the extrados [including a
corrosion-barrier thickness of at least
(-b) For ioh
2.8 mm (0.11 in.)], mm (in.)
it y
2 = 1.70 0.50 × jjjj is zzzz
(b) Five SIFs are required to quantify the stresses in an k tes {
elbow. t
(1) longitudinal SIF due to in-plane moment, iix. = 0.95 if is > 1.50
tes
(2) longitudinal SIF due to out-of-plane moment,
iox. (-c) For iix and iox
(3) hoop SIF due to in-plane moment, iih.
it y
(4) hoop SIF due to out-of-plane moment, ioh.
2 = 1.62 0.52 × jjjj is zzzz
(5) shear stress SIF due to torsional moment, it. k tes {
For Type I and Type II elbows, it may be taken to be t
= 0.84 if is > 1.50
1.0. tes
(c) FRP elbows are often manufactured such that the
thickness varies uniformly around the circumference of III-2.2.2 Elbows Other Than Type I and Type II. For
the elbow from a minimum at the extrados to a elbows other than Type I and Type II long-radius
maximum at the intrados. An elbow with this additional elbows, the SIFs shall be determined by testing or FEA,
thickness will have lower SIFs than an elbow that has a or by using historical values that have been documented
uniform thickness around its entire circumference. For to have been used successfully for a minimum of 5 yr.
Type I and Type II long-radius elbows, this reduction III-2.2.3 Flanged Elbows. The SIFs for flanged elbows
in SIF may be accounted for using the following values may be reduced by multiplying i by one of the following
of α2: factors, c:

82
 ASME NM.2-2022

(a) For elbows with one flanged end α3 = correction factor for reduction in m due to
1/6 increased thickness at the intrados compared
i t R y
c = jjjj es 12 zzzz (III-2-8)
to the extrados; see (b)
jj D zz
( )
jj
k 2 {
zz
(b) FRP elbows are often manufactured such that the
thickness varies uniformly around the circumference of
(b) For elbows with two flanged ends the elbow from a minimum at the extrados to a
1/3 maximum at the intrados. This additional thickness
i t R y
c = jjjj es 12 zzzz (III-2-9) will reduce the maximum hoop pressure stress of the
jj D zz
( )
jj
k 2 {
zz elbow compared to an elbow that has a uniform thickness
around the entire circumference. The following values for
where α3 may be used for Type I and Type II elbows:
D = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) (1) α3 = 0.8 if tis/tes > 1.25
R1 = radius of bend, mm (in.) (2) α3 = [−0.8(tis/tes) + 1.8] if 1.0 < tis/tes < 1.25
x = 1.5D where
tes = thickness of the structural wall of the elbow tes = thickness of the structural wall measured at the
measured at the extrados, mm (in.) extrados, mm (in.)
tis = thickness of the structural wall measured at the
III-2.3 Pressure Stress Multipliers for Elbows intrados (not less than tes), mm (in.)
(a) An elbow will experience higher hoop stresses
when exposed to pressure than will an equivalent pipe. III-2.3.2 Elbows Other Than Type I and Type II. For
(b) The pressure stress multiplier, m, of an elbow is elbows other than Type I and Type II, the pressure
defined as follows, and is not less than 1.0: stress multiplier shall be determined by testing or FEA,
(III-2-10)
or by using historical values that have been documented
m = HE / HP
to have been used successfully for a minimum of 5 yr.
where
σHE = maximum hoop stress in an elbow when the III-3 TEES
elbow is exposed to pressure, MPa (psi)
III-3.1 Flexibility Factors for Tees
σHP = hoop stress in an equivalent pipe (see Note)
when the pipe is exposed to the same pressure, The flexibility factor, k, for tees shall be taken to be 1.0.
MPa (psi)
NOTE: An equivalent pipe is one that has the same III-3.2 SIFs for Tees
structural thickness, ts, as the elbow that it is intended In the absence of more directly applicable data, the SIFs,
to represent. This is the structural thickness that i, for tees may be determined as described in
should be entered into a pipe stress analysis.
paras. III-3.2.1 and III-3.2.2. In no case shall i be less
than 1.0.
(c) The same thickness that is intended to be used to
III-3.2.1 Type I and Type II Tees
represent the elbow in a pipe stress analysis shall be used
in eq. (III-2-10) for σHP to determine the elbow’s pressure (a) For Type I and Type II tees and reducing tees for
stress multiplier, m. which the diameter does not exceed 600 mm (24 in.), the
(d) In the absence of more directly applicable data, the SIF, i, is a function of the pipe factor, λt. The pipe factor, λt, is
pressure stress multipliers for elbows may be determined defined as follows:
as described in paras. III-2.3.1 and III-2.3.2. 2tR
t = (III-2-12)
III-2.3.1 Type I and Type II Elbows DR
(a) The following equation may be used to calculate m where
for Type I and Type II elbows: DR = inside diameter of the main run structural wall,
ij R1 y mm (in.)
jj 4 1 zzz
m = 3 jjjj RD zz
zz (III-2-11) tR = thickness of the structural layer of the main run of
jj 1 z
j4 2 zz the tee, mm (in.)
k D {
where
(b) The longitudinal SIFs shall be determined by
D = inside diameter of elbow, mm (in.)
R1 = bend radius of the elbow, mm (in.); R1 > D iix = iox = 0.66( t ) 0.5 (III-2-13)

(c) The hoop SIFs, iih and ioh, may be taken to be 0.0.

83
 ASME NM.2-2022

(d) The torsional SIF, it, may be taken to be 1.5. III-4.1 Flexibility Factors for Concentric Reducers
III-3.2.2 Tees Other Than Type I and Type II. For other The flexibility factor, k, for concentric reducers shall be
than Type I and Type II tees, the SIFs shall be determined taken to be 1.0.
by testing or FEA, or by using historical values that have
been documented to have been used successfully for a III-4.2 SIFs for Concentric Reducers
minimum of 5 yr.
In the absence of more directly applicable data, the SIFs,
III-3.3 Pressure Stress Multipliers for Tees i, for concentric reducers may be determined as described
in paras. III-4.2.1 and III-4.2.2. In no case shall i be less than
In the absence of more directly applicable data, the pres- 1.0 except that the hoop SIFs, iih and ioh, may be taken to be
sure stress multiplier for tees may be determined as 0.0.
described in paras. III-3.3.1 and III-3.3.2. In no case
shall m be less than 1.0. III-4.2.1 Type I and Type II Concentric Reducers. The
following values for SIFs may be used for Type I and Type II
III-3.3.1 Type I and Type II Tees concentric reducers for which the diameter-to-structural-
(a) For Type I and Type II tees and reducing tees for thickness ratio is not greater than 120, and for which the
which the diameter does not exceed 600 mm (24 in.), the pipe size does not exceed 1 200 mm (48 in.) diameter:
pressure stress multiplier, m, is a function of the pipe SIF
factor, λt. The pipe factor, λt, is defined as follows:
Concentric Reducer Large Diameter Small Diameter
(1) For equal tees, DB = DR Type End End
I 2.5 1.3
2tR II 2.5 1.3
t = (III-2-14)
DR

(2) For reducing tees, DB < DR III-4.2.2 Concentric Reducers Other Than Type I and
Type II. For other than Type I and Type II concentric redu-
2 cers, the SIFs shall be determined by testing or FEA, or by
ij 2tB yz
j zz × DR (III-2-15) using historical values that have been documented to have
t = jjj zz been used successfully for a minimum of 5 yr.
D
k B{ 2tR

where III-4.3 Pressure Stress Multipliers for Concentric

DB = inside diameter of the branch structural wall, mm Reducers
(in.) The pressure stress multiplier, m, for concentric redu-
DR = inside diameter of the main run structural wall, cers shall be taken to be 1.0.
mm (in.)
tB = thickness of the structural layer of the branch of
III-5 FLANGES
the tee, mm (in.)
tR = thickness of the structural layer of the main run of III-5.1 Flexibility Factors for Flanges
the tee, mm (in.)
Flanges shall be considered to be rigid elements.
(b) The pressure stress multiplier, m, shall be deter-
mined by III-5.2 SIFs for Flanges
In the absence of more directly applicable data, the SIFs,
m = 1.4( t ) 0.25 (III-2-16) i, for flanges may be determined as described in
paras. III-5.2.1 and III-5.2.2. In no case shall i be less
III-3.3.2 Tees Other Than Type I and Type II. For other than 1.0 except that the hoop SIFs, iih and ioh, may be
than Type I and Type II tees, the pressure stress multiplier, taken to be 0.0.
m, shall be determined by testing or FEA, or by using III-5.2.1 Type I and Type II Flanges. For Type I or Type
historical values that have been documented to have II flanges designed in accordance with Mandatory
been used successfully for a minimum of 5 yr. Appendix I, the SIF may be taken to be 1.0.

III-4 CONCENTRIC REDUCERS III-5.2.2 Flanges Other Than Type I and Type II. For
other than Type I and Type II flanges, the SIFs shall be
The minimum length for concentric reducers is 2.5 determined by testing or FEA, or by using historical
times the difference in diameters. values that have been documented to have been used
successfully for a minimum of 5 yr.

84
 ASME NM.2-2022

III-5.3 Pressure Stress Multipliers for Flanges

The pressure stress multiplier, m, for flanges shall be
taken to be 1.0.

85
 ASME NM.2-2022

MANDATORY APPENDIX IV
SPECIFICATION FOR 55-deg FILAMENT-WOUND
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED THERMOSETTING-RESIN PIPE

IV-1 SCOPE ASTM D2105. Standard Test Method for Longitudinal

Tensile Properties of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Rein-
(a) This Appendix covers pipe fabricated by filament forced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Tube. ASTM
winding and made of a commercial-grade polyester International.
resin. Included are requirements for materials, properties, ASTM D2412. Standard Test Method for Determination of
construction, dimensions, tolerances, workmanship, and External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by
appearance. This Appendix applies to 55-deg machine fila- Parallel-Plate Loading. ASTM International.
ment-wound pipe described as Type III pipe in ASME ASTM D2583. Standard Test Method for Indentation Hard-
NM.3.3. ness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
(b) This Appendix covers pipe made from both polye- ASTM International.
ster and vinyl ester resins and glass-fiber-reinforcing ASTM D2584. Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of
materials. See para. IV-5.2 for reinforcing materials Cured Reinforced Resins. ASTM International.
allowed in the corrosion barrier. ASTM D3039/D3039M. Standard Test Method for Tensile
NOTE: For the purposes of this Appendix, the term “polyester Properties of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials.
resin” includes both polyester and vinyl ester resins. ASTM International.
ASTM D3567. Standard Practice for Determining Dimen-
IV-2 SAFETY sions of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermo-
setting Resin) Pipe and Fittings. ASTM International.
This specification does not purport to address all of the ASTM F412. Standard Terminology Relating to Plastic
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the Piping Systems. ASTM International.
responsibility of the user to establish appropriate
safety and health practices and determine the applicability
of regulatory limitations prior to use. IV-4 TERMINOLOGY

IV-3 REFERENCED STANDARDS IV-4.1 General

Definitions are in accordance with ASTM D883 and
ASTM C581. Standard Practice for Determining Chemical
ASTM F412, and abbreviations are in accordance with
Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-
ASTM D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid
Service. ASTM International.
IV-4.2 Definitions
ASTM D638. Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties
of Plastics. ASTM International. complete cover: two layers of winding, one at the plus
ASTM D790. Standard Test Methods for Flexural Proper- winding angle and one at the minus winding angle.
ties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Elec- fiberglass pipe: a tubular product containing glass-fiber
trical Insulating Materials. ASTM International. reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured
ASTM D883. Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics. thermosetting resin.
ASTM International.
filament winding: a process used to manufacture tubular
ASTM D1599. Standard Test Method for Resistance to
goods by winding continuous fibrous glass-strand roving,
Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe,
saturated with liquid resin or pre-impregnated with
Tubing, and Fittings. ASTM International.
partially cured resin, onto the outside of a mandrel in
ASTM D1600. Standard Terminology for Abbreviated
a predetermined pattern under controlled tension. The
Terms Relating to Plastics. ASTM International.
inside diameter (I.D.) of the pipe is fixed by the
mandrel diameter, and the outside diameter (O.D.) of

86
 ASME NM.2-2022

the pipe is determined by the amount of material that is (2) The catalyst/promoter system, diluents, flame retardants,
wound on the mandrel. or thixotropic agents used in the resin can affect its chemical
resistance.
helical winding: filament winding where the reinforce- (3) Antimony compounds or other fire-retardant agents may be
ment is placed at a specified angle (other than 0 deg added to halogenated resins for improved fire resistance, if
or 90 deg) to the axis of rotation. agreed to by the manufacturer and the purchaser. These
interior layer: resin-rich layer that is between the surfa- compounds usually impact the translucency of the resin
and do not improve the flame retardancy of nonhalogenated
cing veil and the structural layers of a reinforced plastic
resins.
laminate.
polyester: resin produced by the polycondensation of dihy- IV-5.1.3 Additives for Abrasion Resistance
droxy glycols and dibasic organic acids or anhydrides,
(a) Additives may be added to the interior and/or ex-
where at least one component contributes ethylenic unsa-
terior corrosion barrier to increase abrasion resistance as
turation, yielding resins that can react with styrol mono-
agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
mers to give highly cross-linked thermoset copolymers.
purchaser.
structural layer: the portion of the laminate construction (b) Additives to enhance abrasion resistance may be
providing the primary mechanical strength. added to the resin, up to 5% by weight of the resin
surfacing veil: a thin mat of fine fibers used primarily to system in the filament winding, without impacting allow-
produce a smooth, corrosion-resistant, resin-rich surface able stresses per ASME NM.3.3.
on a reinforced plastic laminate.
IV-5.2 Fiber Reinforcements
vinyl ester: resin characterized by reactive unsaturation
located predominately in terminal positions that can IV-5.2.1 Surfacing Veil
react with styrol monomers to give highly cross-linked (a) The surfacing veil used in a laminate shall be a
thermoset copolymers. chemical-resistant glass or organic fiber determined to
be acceptable for the chemical service by either ASTM
IV-5 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE C581 or verified case history.
(b) The surfacing veil shall be a minimum of 0.254 mm
IV-5.1 Resin System (10 mils) in dry thickness.
IV-5.1.1 Resin
IV-5.2.2 Chopped-Strand Reinforcements
(a) The resin used shall be a commercial-grade, corro-
sion-resistant polyester that has been determined to be (a) Chopped-strand reinforcements shall be E-type or
acceptable for the service by either test (see ASTM C581) E-CR-type glass fibers 25 mm to 50 mm (1 in. to 2 in.) long,
or previous documented service. applied in a uniform layer with random orientation.
(b) Where service conditions have not been evaluated, (b) The fibers shall have a sizing compatible with the
a suitable resin may also be selected by agreement selected resin.
between the manufacturer and the purchaser. (c) Chopped-strand reinforcements may be applied as
(c) The use of one resin in the corrosion barrier and a a mat or as continuous strand roving that is chopped into
different resin in the structural layer (see section IV-7) is short lengths and sprayed onto the laminate in a process
permitted if acceptable to the purchaser. known as “spray up.” Either form is most commonly
applied in layers weighing 460 g/m2 (1.5 oz/ft2 ), although
IV-5.1.2 Additives other weights are available and may be used.
(a) Additives such as thixotropic agents or flame retar- IV-5.2.3 Continuous Roving
dants may be used when agreed upon by both the manu-
facturer and the purchaser. (a) Continuous roving shall be E-type or E-CR-type
(b) Additional styrene may be added to the resin for glass roving, with a maximum 4 400 tex (minimum
viscosity control. yield of 110 yd/lb).
(c) No material shall be added to the resin used in the (b) The sizing on the roving shall be compatible with
filament winding for the sole purpose of changing the the resin.
color or translucency of the resin.
IV-6 LAMINATES
NOTES:
(1) The addition of flame retardants and thixotropic agents can
affect laminate properties and visual inspection of laminate
IV-6.1 Laminate Construction
quality. The pipe wall shall consist of a corrosion barrier
(comprising an inner surface and interior layer), a struc-
tural layer, and an outer surface.

87
 ASME NM.2-2022

IV-6.1.1 Erosion Allowance IV-6.1.3 Structural Layer

(a) An erosion allowance shall be specified to suit the (a) The structural reinforcement shall be helical fila-
service conditions. ment winding per para. IV-4.2, using resin per para.
(b) The erosion allowance consists of the portion of the IV-5.1 and continuous-roving reinforcement per para.
corrosion barrier (see para. IV-6.1.2) that is assumed to IV-5.2.3.
corrode or erode away during the service life of the pipe. (b) The required parameters for the winding process
(c) The thickness of the erosion allowance shall not be shall be as follows:
included in the pipe wall thickness calculation and may be (1) The winding angle shall be 55 deg ± 2 deg.
less than the thickness of the corrosion barrier but shall (2) The reinforcement content of the filament-
not exceed the thickness of the corrosion barrier. wound layers shall be 60% to 75% by weight for a
resin with a cured specific gravity of 1.1.
IV-6.1.2 Corrosion Barrier. The corrosion barrier
(3) The rovings of each layer shall be placed parallel
consists of the specified inner surface and interior layers.
and close together with little or no gap.
IV-6.1.2.1 Inner Surface (-a) No single gap within the band or between
(a) The inner surface exposed to the chemical environ- adjacent bands shall exceed 3 mm (1∕8 in.).
ment shall be resin rich and reinforced with at least one (-b) During winding, if more than 5% of the
layer of a suitable surfacing veil in accordance with rovings in the winding band break or if two adjacent
para. IV-5.2.1. rovings break, the winding shall be interrupted to
(b) Some chemical environments necessitate the use of replace the broken rovings.
multiple layers of surfacing veil. (4) The winding pattern shall be consistent and shall
(c) This resin-rich inner surface shall contain less than produce a uniform laminate without voids or unreinforced
10% by weight of reinforcing material and have a thick- resin pockets that exceed acceptance criteria. See
ness between 0.25 mm and 0.50 mm (0.010 in. and 0.020 para. IV-6.2.
in.) per layer. (5) The winding pattern of each cover shall be
complete, with the pattern closing at the conclusion of
NOTE: The primary chemical resistance of the reinforced ther- the cover.
mosetting-resin pipe is provided by the resin. In combination
(6) The structural layer shall consist of a minimum of
with the cured resin, the surfacing veil helps determine the thick-
ness of the resin-rich layer and reduces microcracking. two complete covers.

IV-6.1.4 Outer Surface

IV-6.1.2.2 Interior Layer(s)
(a) The outer (exterior) surface shall be smooth with
(a) The inner surface layer shall be followed with a no exposed fibers or sharp projections and shall be resin
layer composed of resin reinforced only with noncontin- rich to prevent fiber prominence.
uous glass fiber. (b) A surfacing mat or similar reinforcement may be
(b) This reinforcement shall be applied as chopped- specified by the purchaser.
strand mat or as chopped roving (spray-up process), in (c) Surface resin may be sealed by the addition of
accordance with para. IV-5.2.2, resulting in a minimum paraffin wax or with a sprayed, wrapped, or overlaid
reinforcement weight of 460 g/m2 (1.5 oz/ft2). film (as required or approved by the resin manufacturer),
(c) The combined thickness of the inner surface and to ensure proper cure.
interior layer shall not be less than specified by design.
(d) Depending on the chemical environment, multiple IV-6.1.5 Ultraviolet Exposure. Piping used for outdoor
layers of 460-g/m2 (1.5-oz/ft2) chopped strand applied as service or otherwise subject to ultraviolet exposure shall
mat or spray-up may be used. incorporate provisions to minimize ultraviolet degrada-
(e) When multiple layers are used, each ply of mat or tion. Suitable methods may include the following:
pass of chopped roving shall be well rolled to eliminate (a) ultraviolet absorbers or screening agents
entrapped air prior to the application of additional rein- (b) opaque pigments in the resin-rich outer-surface
forcement. layer
(f) The reinforcement content of the inner surface and (c) the use of resins inherently resistant to ultraviolet
the interior layer combined shall be 22% to 32% by weight degradation
of the reinforcement and resin, when tested in accordance
with para. IV-9.1.

88
 ASME NM.2-2022

IV-6.2 Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance (e) Results from previously manufactured and tested
pipe may be accepted by the purchaser provided such
The minimum acceptable level for workmanship and pipe was manufactured with the same resin, laminate
finish of the finished laminate shall be specified by the type, and thickness range within the previous 5 yr.
purchaser.
NOTE: A representative laminate sample may be used for deter- IV-7.2 Degree of Cure
mination of an acceptable surface finish and an acceptable level
of visual defects. See Table 4-3.2-1 for acceptance criteria (a) The degree of cure of the laminate shall be deter-
mined from the Barcol hardness test specified in ASTM
D2583.
IV-7 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA (b) The minimum Barcol hardness shall be 90% of the
resin manufacturer’s published value.
IV-7.1 Proof of Design
NOTES:
(a) A test pipe fitted with free-end closures to ensure (1) The use of organic reinforcing materials can reduce the
loading in both the hoop and axial directions shall be pres- Barcol hardness readings without necessarily indicating
sure tested in accordance with ASTM D1599 except that undercure.
(1) only one specimen needs to be tested (2) Due to the size of the Barcol impressor, taking Barcol read-
ings on the inside surface of small pipe sizes is frequently not
(2) the pipe may be tested using water at ambient
possible.
temperature [10°C to 25°C (50°F to 77°F)] as a test (3) A convenient check for the surface cure of polyester resins is
medium in lieu of the conditions required by the test an acetone sensitivity test. Remove mold release or paraffin
method wax, if present, and wipe the surface clean of dust. Then rub
(b) The test pipe shall be made with the same laminate four or five drops of acetone on the laminate surface until it
type and resin used on the production pipe and shall evaporates. Any resulting tackiness or softening of the
include any required barrier layers. surface is an indication of undercure.
(c) The minimum diameter of the test pipe shall be the
lesser of the largest diameter required for the project or IV-8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES
100 mm (4 in.) and shall have a structural wall consisting
of a minimum of two complete covers. IV-8.1 Standard Diameters
(d) The test pipe shall withstand 4 times the design
pressure for 1 h without leaking or cracking of the corro- (a) Standard diameters, based on nominal measure-
sion barrier; testing to destruction is not required. ments, shall be as follows. Other diameters may be
(1) When pipe with a corrosion barrier is tested, the produced.
test pressure shall be increased to stress the structural Pipe Diameter, DN (NPS) Pipe Diameter, DN (NPS)
wall as if there were no corrosion barrier.
25 (1) 350 (14)
(2) The adjusted test pressure may be determined by
40 (11∕2) 400 (16)
use of lamination theory or the rule of mixtures as shown
50 (2) 450 (18)
in eqs. (IV-7-1) through (IV-7-3).
80 (3) 500 (20)
t TOT = (tCB + tS) (IV-7-1)
100 (4) 600 (24)
150 (6) 750 (30)
200 (8) 900 (36)
E TOT = [(tCB × ECB) + (tS × ES)]/ t TOT (IV-7-2)
250 (10) 1 000 (40)
300 (12) 1 200 (48)

P TEST = 4 × PD(t TOT × E TOT) / (tS × ES) (IV-7-3)

(b) The tolerance on the inside diameter including out-
of-roundness shall be ±1.5 mm (±1∕16 in.) for pipe up to and
where
including DN 150 mm (NPS 6) and ±6.5 mm (±1∕4 in.) or
ECB = corrosion-barrier modulus of elasticity, MPa
±1%, whichever is greater, for pipe sizes exceeding DN
(psi)
150 (NPS 6). This measurement shall be made at the
ES = structural wall modulus of elasticity, MPa (psi)
point of manufacture with the pipe in an unstrained hori-
ETOT = total laminate modulus of elasticity, MPa (psi)
zontal position.
PD = design pressure, kPa (psi)
PTEST = adjusted test pressure, kPa (psi) IV-8.2 Wall Thickness
tCB = corrosion-barrier thickness, mm (in.)
tS = structural wall (filament winding) thickness, (a) For pipe walls less than 32 mm (1.25 in.) thick, the
mm (in.) minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be less than
tTOT = total thickness, mm (in.) 90% of the specified thickness. For pipe walls 32 mm

89
 ASME NM.2-2022

(1.25 in.) or thicker, the minimum thickness at any point IV-9.4 Axial Tensile Strength
shall not be less than 3 mm (0.125 in.) less than the speci-
fied wall thickness. (a) Axial tensile strength shall be determined by testing
(b) Wall thickness shall be measured in accordance in accordance with ASTM D638, ASTM D2105, or ASTM
with ASTM D3567. D3039.
(b) The actual laminate thickness shall be tested.
IV-8.3 Length
IV-10 MARKING
The length of each piece of plain end pipe shall not vary
more than 50 mm (2 in.) from the ordered length unless Pipe shall be marked at least once per section with the
arrangements are made to allow for trim in the field. following information in such a manner that it remains
legible under normal handling and installation practices:
IV-8.4 Squareness of Ends (a) ASME NM.2, with which the pipe complies
(b) nominal pipe size [e.g., “300 mm (12 in.) diameter”]
Pipe shall be cut square with the axis of the pipe within 3
(c) pressure rating [e.g., “1 000 kPa (150 psi)”]
mm (1∕8 in.) for all diameters up to and including 600 mm
(d) resin identification (trade name and number)
(24 in.) and within 5 mm (3∕16 in.) for all diameters greater
(e) manufacturer’s name or trademark
than 600 mm (24 in.).
For example, a 300-mm (12-in.) diameter pipe with a
pressure rating of 1 000 kPa (150 psi) would have the
IV-9 TEST METHODS following marking: “ASME NM.2 300 mm (12 in.) Dia.
The purchaser shall specify which test methods, if any, 1 000 kPa (150 psi) Polyeverlast 1234, XYZ Manufacturing
are required. Co.”

IV-9.1 Glass Reinforcement Content IV-11 CERTIFICATION

When required by the purchaser, the glass content shall (a) The seller or manufacturer shall furnish a certifi-
be determined in accordance with ASTM D2584. cate of compliance when such certification is specified
by the purchaser.
IV-9.2 Hoop Tensile Strength (1) A signature is not required on the certificate of
(a) Hoop tensile strength shall be determined by compliance, but the document shall be dated and shall
testing in accordance with ASTM D1599. Specimens clearly identify the organization submitting the document.
shall be tested with unrestrained end closures (which (2) Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the
provide biaxial pressure loading). certifying organization is responsible for the contents of
(b) The pipe may be tested at ambient temperature the document.
using water at ambient temperature [10°C to 25°C (b) The certificate of compliance shall consist of a copy
(50°F to 77°F)] as a test medium in lieu of the conditions of the manufacturer’s test report or a statement by the
required by ASTM D1599. seller (accompanied by a copy of the test results) that
the material has been sampled, tested, and inspected
IV-9.3 Hoop Flexural Modulus in accordance with the provisions of the applicable spec-
ification.
Hoop flexural modulus shall be determined by testing in (c) If the original identity of the material cannot be
accordance with ASTM D790 or ASTM D2412 or by lami- established, certification can be based only on the
nation analysis. sampling procedure provided in this Appendix.

90
 ASME NM.2-2022

MANDATORY APPENDIX V
INSPECTIONS AND TESTING OF REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

V-1 GENERAL (3) Unit Weight. At least one roll shall be inspected
for measurement of unit weight per ASQ Z1.4 criteria. If
(a) All inspections and tests specified in this Appendix the inspected roll or rolls fail the inspection criteria of
shall be performed by manufacturer personnel or an inde- para. V-2.4.3, then each roll in the lot shall be inspected.
pendent testing laboratory on the reinforcement mate- (b) Form V-2.2-1 or a similar form that contains the
rials. provisions to record the results of these required inspec-
(b) Reinforcement materials include tions and certifications, if applicable, shall be used by the
(1) fiberglass surfacing veil (mat) manufacturer and shall be retained in the inspection
(2) organic fiber surfacing veil (mat) records.
(3) carbon fiber veil (mat) (1) A separate form shall be used for each mat consti-
(4) fiberglass chopped-strand mat tuent material manufacturer, mat nomenclature, mat
(5) fiberglass spray-up roving treatment, and mat unit weight.
(6) filament winding roving (2) In lieu of performing the inspections required in
(7) fiberglass woven-roving fabric paras. V-2.4.2 and V-2.4.3, the fabricator may obtain and
(8) fiberglass unidirectional fabric accept from the constituent material manufacturer a certi-
(9) fiberglass nonwoven biaxial fabric ficate of compliance with the requirements and limits
(10) fiberglass milled fibers defined in paras. V-2.4.2 and V-2.4.3. However, the fabri-
cator shall conduct the receiving inspections required in
V-2 FIBERGLASS SURFACING VEIL (MAT), para. V-2.4.1.
ORGANIC FIBER SURFACING VEIL (MAT), (3) The certificate of compliance described in (2)
CARBON FIBER VEIL (MAT), AND FIBERGLASS shall ensure that materials were manufactured, inspected,
CHOPPED-STRAND MAT and tested in accordance with the appropriate specifica-
tions.
V-2.1 Introduction
V-2.3 Equipment and Measuring Tools Required
This section specifies the minimum inspections and
tests that shall be performed on the rolls of fiberglass V-2.3.1 Inspection Table and Lights. An inspection
surfacing veil, organic fiber surfacing veil, and fiberglass table and adequate overhead lighting that are suitable
chopped-strand mat used to fabricate glass-fiber-rein- for the inspection and testing of the mat shall be provided.
forced thermosetting-resin piping systems to this Stan- The equipment used shall not introduce contamination to
dard. the mat during the inspection and testing process.
V-2.3.2 Linear Measuring Tools. A standard linear
V-2.2 Acceptance Inspection
measuring tool (longer than the width of the rolls)
(a) Acceptance inspection of the rolls shall include the that measures the roll widths with minimum accuracy
following: of ±3 mm (±1∕8 in.) shall be used. A 305 mm ± 1 mm
(1) Proper Packaging and Identification. This accep- (12 in. ± 1 ∕ 32 in.) square template shall be used to
tance inspection shall be conducted on the unopened roll. measure the samples of mat for inspection.
Acceptance requirements and limits shall be as defined in
V-2.3.3 Laboratory Balance. A laboratory balance that
para. V-2.4.1.
measures to 0.1 g and has an accuracy of ±0.05 g shall be
(2) Imperfections and Contamination. This inspection
used to weigh the samples of mat.
shall be conducted during use of the rolled goods. Accep-
tance requirements and limits shall be as defined in V-2.4 Procedures and Acceptance Limits
paras. V-2.4.2. If the inspected roll or rolls fail the inspec-
tion criteria of para. V-2.4.2, then each roll in the lot shall V-2.4.1 Roll Identification and Package Inspection
be inspected. (a) The mat shall be packaged as shipped from the mat
constituent material manufacturer’s factory.

91
 ASME NM.2-2022

(b) If repackaging is required, the manufacturer shall (c) Any property measurement shall be conducted by
ensure that a material certificate of compliance traceable unrolling only the quantity of material required to conduct
to the original material is provided. The original labels the test.
may be modified in regard to number and width of (d) The sample of mat shall be placed on the laboratory
rolls only. All other documentation shall remain balance (see para. V-2.3.3) and weighed to the nearest
unchanged. 0.1 g.
(c) The mat rolls, as identified by the mat constituent NOTE: Convert the grams to ounces, if needed, by multiplying by
material manufacturer, shall be verified as having the 0.0352.
same nomenclature as the mat specified to produce
(e) If the sample from a roll falls outside the mat consti-
the laminate.
tuent material manufacturer’s specified weight range, the
(d) The packaging of the mat shall be examined for
roll of mat shall be rejected.
damage that renders the mat unusable.
(f) The values of weighed samples for acceptable and
(e) Acceptable rolls shall be indicated by recording the
unacceptable rolls shall be entered in Form V-2.2-1,
date of the inspection and the inspector’s name in
column 6. The rejected rolls shall be identified by the
Form V-2.2-1, column 4.
word “rejected” written next to the recorded weight.
(f) For packaged mats that are found to be acceptable
for further inspection and tests, the reinforcement
production date and lot number shall be entered in V-3 FIBERGLASS SPRAY-UP ROVING AND
Form V-2.2-1, columns 2 and 3, respectively. FILAMENT-WINDING ROVING

V-2.4.2 Visual Inspection of Mat V-3.1 Introduction

(a) As the mat is used during fabrication, it shall be This section specifies the minimum inspections and
visually inspected for imperfections and contamination. tests that shall be performed on fiberglass spray-up
The date of the inspection and the inspector’s name roving and filament-winding roving used to fabricate
shall be recorded in Form V-2.2-1, column 8. glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting-resin piping
(b) The mat shall be uniform in color, texture, and systems to this Standard.
appearance. Imperfections and contaminants shall be
removed in a manner that does not damage the mat, V-3.2 Acceptance Inspections
or the section of the mat containing the defects may (a) Acceptance inspection of roving shall include the
be removed by making two parallel cuts across the following:
width of the mat and discarding the affected section. (1) Proper Packaging and Identification. This accep-
White or light gray binder spots shall not be considered tance inspection shall be conducted on the unopened roll.
contaminants. Acceptance requirements and limits shall be as defined in
NOTE: Examples of imperfections are holes, cuts, thin spots, and para. V-3.4.1.
delaminations, i.e., separation of the mat into layers during (2) Imperfections and Contamination. This inspection
unrolling. Examples of contaminants are dirt, oil, grease, and shall be conducted during use of the roving balls. Accep-
foreign objects.
tance requirements and limits shall be as defined in
(c) Rolls having any of the following defects shall not be para. V-3.4.2.
used in laminates made to this Standard: (3) Roving Yield. Selected rolls shall be inspected for
(1) wet spots measurement of roving yield per ASQ Z1.4 criteria. Accep-
(2) water contamination tance requirements and limits shall be as defined in
(3) bar marks para. V-3.4.3.
(4) lengthwise wrinkles exceeding 1.5 m (5 ft) (b) Form V-3.2-1 or a similar form that contains the
provisions to record the results of inspections shall be
V-2.4.3 Weight per Square Foot of Mat used by the manufacturer and retained in the inspection
(a) From the leading edge of each roll of mat that will be records.
inspected in accordance with para. V-2.2, a 0.09-m2 (1-ft2) (1) A separate form shall be used for each roving
mat or 0.92-m2 (10-ft2) surfacing veil sample shall be cut constituent material manufacturer, roving nomenclature,
using the template specified in para. V-2.3.2. and roving yield.
(b) If the roll is less than 304.8 mm (12 in.) wide, the full (2) In lieu of performing the inspections required in
width of the roll shall be used, but the length of the sample paras. V-3.4.2 and V-3.4.3, the fabricator may obtain and
shall be adjusted (use the linear measuring tool specified accept from the constituent material manufacturer a certi-
in para. V-2.3.2). ficate of compliance with the requirements defined in
paras. V-3.4.2 and V-3.4.3. However, the fabricator
shall conduct the receiving inspections required in
para. V-3.4.1.

92
 ASME NM.2-2022

(3) The certificate of compliance described in (2) V-3.4.3 Measurement of Roving Yield
shall ensure that materials were manufactured, inspected,
(a) From one roving ball per shipment, a sample of
and tested per the material supplier’s specifications.
roving at least 5 486.4 mm (6 yd) long (length A) shall
V-3.3 Equipment and Measuring Tools Required be obtained as required by para. V-3.3.1.
(1) Roving shall be pulled from the same side of the
V-3.3.1 Wrap Reel. Equipment that provides a sample package as used in the manufacturer’s process.
at least 5 486.4 mm (6 yd) long, measured and cut under (2) If the roving is pulled from the outside of the
sufficient tension to keep the strand taut, shall be used. A package, sufficient material shall be removed and
standard 914.4-mm (1-yd) or 1 371.6-mm (1.5-yd) yarn discarded so that the sample will be taken from undis-
reel with adjustable-transverse, four-skein capacity turbed material.
should be used. (3) The sample shall be removed from the wrap reel.
V-3.3.2 Laboratory Balance. A laboratory balance that (4) The sample shall be doubled several times and
measures to 0.1 g and has an accuracy of ±0.05 g shall be tied with a single knot.
used to weigh the roving samples. (b) The sample shall be placed on the laboratory
balance (see para. V-3.3.2) and weighed to the nearest
V-3.4 Procedures and Acceptance Limits 0.1 g.
NOTE: Convert grams to ounces, if needed, by multiplying by
V-3.4.1 Roving Identification and Package Inspection
0.0352.
(a) The roving shall be packaged as shipped from the (1) Two specimens from each package shall be
constituent material manufacturer’s factory. weighed, and the average of the two weights calculated.
(b) The roving shall not be repackaged in the distribu- (2) The average weight shall be recorded as weight A.
tion of the material after the constituent material manu- (c) The yield, in yards per pound, shall be calculated
facturer has shipped the roving. from the following equation:
(c) The roving balls, as identified by the constituent 16 oz/lb × length, yd
material manufacturer, shall be verified as having the yield, yd/lb = (V-3-1)
weight A , oz
same nomenclature as the roving required.
(d) The packaging of the roving shall be inspected for (d) The yields of acceptable and unacceptable balls of
damage that renders the roving unusable. roving shall be entered in Form V-3.2-1, column 5.
(e) Acceptable roving shall be indicated by recording (e) If the yield of the ball of roving is outside the consti-
the date of the inspection and the name of the person tuent material manufacturer’s specification, the
performing the inspection in Form V-3.2-1, column 4. remaining balls in the shipment shall be inspected per
(f) For packaged rovings that are found to be accept- ASQ Z1.4 criteria, following the procedure specified in
able for further inspection and tests, the reinforcement (a) through (d).
production date and lot number for each ball shall be (f) Balls whose yield is outside the constituent material
entered in Form V-3.2-1, columns 2 and 3, respectively. manufacturer’s specification shall not be used for lami-
V-3.4.2 Visual Inspection of Roving nates made to this Standard.
(g) The rejected roving balls shall be identified by the
(a) The roving ball shall be visually inspected for word “rejected” written next to the yield in Form V-3.2-1,
imperfections and contamination prior to use by the column 5.
manufacturer. (h) The date of the yield measurement and the name of
(1) The date of the inspection and the inspector’s the person who took the measurement shall be recorded
name shall be recorded in Form V-3.2-1, column 7. in Form V-3.2-1, column 6.
(2) If any roving ball is rejected, the reason shall be
recorded in the “Comments” section of Form V-3.2-1. V-4 FIBERGLASS WOVEN ROVING FABRIC,
(b) Roving balls having any of the following defects FIBERGLASS NONWOVEN BIAXIAL FABRIC,
shall not be used for laminates made to this Standard:
AND FIBERGLASS UNIDIRECTIONAL FABRIC
(1) contamination from foreign matter such as dirt,
oil, grease, waste glass fiber, or beads of glass such that it V-4.1 Introduction
would detract from the performance or appearance of the
finished product This section specifies the minimum inspections and
(2) water contamination tests that are to be performed on rolls of fiberglass
woven roving fabric, fiberglass nonwoven biaxial
fabric, and fiberglass unidirectional fabric used to fabri-
cate glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting-resin piping
systems to this Standard.

93
 ASME NM.2-2022

V-4.2 Acceptance Inspections V-4.4 Procedures and Acceptance Limits

(a) Acceptance inspection of fabric rolls shall include V-4.4.1 Roll Identification and Package Inspection
the following: (a) The fabric shall be packaged as shipped from the
(1) Proper Packaging and Identification. This inspec- constituent material manufacturer’s factory.
tion shall be conducted on the unopened roll. Acceptance (b) The fabric shall not be repackaged in the distribu-
requirements and limits shall be as defined in tion of the material after the constituent material manu-
para. V-4.4.1. facturer has shipped the fabric.
(2) Imperfections and Contamination. This inspection (c) The fabric rolls, as identified by the constituent
shall be conducted during use of the rolled goods. Accep- material manufacturer, shall be verified as having the
tance requirements and limits shall be as defined in same nomenclature as the fabric required.
para. V-4.4.2. (d) The packaging of the fabric rolls shall be examined
(3) Width, Unit Weight, and Construction. Selected for damage that renders the fabric unusable.
rolls shall be inspected for measurement of width and (e) Acceptable rolls shall be indicated by recording the
unit weight and for construction of fabric per ASQ Z1.4 date of the inspection and the name of the person
criteria. Acceptance requirements and limits shall be as performing the examination in Form V-4.2-1, column 4.
defined in paras. V-4.4.3 through V-4.4.5. (f) For packaged rolls that are found to be acceptable
(b) Form V-4.2-1 or a similar form that contains the for further inspection and tests, the fabric production date
provisions to record the results of these required inspec- and lot number shall be entered in Form V-4.2-1, columns
tions shall be used by the manufacturer and retained in the 2 and 3, respectively.
inspection records. A separate form shall be used for each
fabric constituent material manufacturer, fabric nomen- V-4.4.2 Visual Inspection of Fabric
clature, fabric unit weight (in ounces per square yard), and
fabric construction. (a) General. As fabric is used, it shall be visually
(c) In lieu of performing the inspections required in inspected for imperfections and contaminations by the
paras. V-4.4.2 and V-4.4.3, the fabricator may obtain manufacturer.
and accept from the constituent material manufacturer (1) The date of the inspection and the inspector’s
a certificate of compliance with the requirements name shall be recorded in Form V-4.2-1, column 9.
defined in paras. V-4.4.2 and V-4.4.3. However, the fabri- (2) If a roll is rejected, the reason shall be recorded
cator shall conduct the receiving inspections required in under the “Comments” section on Form V-4.2-1.
para. V-4.4.1. (b) Fiberglass Woven Roving and Fiberglass Nonwoven
Biaxial Fabric
V-4.3 Equipment and Measuring Tools Required (1) Fabric shall be uniform in color, texture, and
appearance. The following imperfections and/or contam-
V-4.3.1 Inspection Table and Lights. An inspection inations shall be removed from fiberglass woven roving
table and adequate overhead lighting that are suitable and fiberglass nonwoven biaxial fabric by making two
for the inspection and testing of the fabric shall be parallel cuts across the width of the fabric and discarding
used. The equipment used shall not introduce contamina- the rectangular sections of fabric containing the defects:
tion to the fabric during inspection and testing. (-a) dirt spots1 4.76 mm to 19 mm (3∕16 in. to 3∕4 in.)
in diameter in excess of one per 3 linear m (10 linear ft)
V-4.3.2 Linear Measuring, Marking, and Cutting
(-b) missing ends for more than 0.61 consecutive
Tools
m (2 consecutive ft) in length
(a) A standard linear measuring tool (longer than the (-c) fuzz clumps or loops greater than 25 mm (1
width of the roll) that measures the roll widths with in.) in height from the surface
minimum accuracy of ±3.275 mm (± 1 ∕ 8 in.) shall be (2) Fiberglass woven roving and fiberglass
used. A 76.3 mm ± 0.79 mm (3 in. ± 1∕32 in.) square template nonwoven biaxial fabric having any of the following
shall be used to measure the samples for inspection. defects shall not be used for laminates made to this Stan-
(b) A fine-point felt-tip pen and scissors shall be used to dard:
mark and cut the samples. (-a) dirt spots1 in excess of 19 mm (3∕4 in.) in
diameter
V-4.3.3 Laboratory Balance. A laboratory balance that
(-b) more than 11 missing ends, either individual
measures to 0.1 g with an accuracy of ±0.05 g shall be used
picks or any combination of individual and multiple (2, 3,
to weigh the samples.
4, or 5) ends, in any 30.48 consecutive linear m (100 con-
secutive linear ft)

1
“Dirt spots” are defined as all foreign matter, dirt, grease spots, etc.

94
 ASME NM.2-2022

(-c) fuzz clumps or loops that prevent the proper (b) Rolls with variations greater than ±12.7 mm (±1∕2
lay-down of the fabric and that cannot be easily removed in.) shall not be used in laminates made to this Standard.
(-d) water contamination (c) The rejected rolls shall be identified by the word
(c) Fiberglass Unidirectional Fabric “rejected” written next to the width in Form V-4.2-1,
(1) Fiberglass unidirectional fabric shall be uniform column 5.
in color, texture, and appearance. The following imperfec- (d) The date of the width, weight, and construction
tions and/or contaminations shall be removed from the measurements and the name of the person who took
fabric by making two parallel cuts across the width of the the measurements shall be recorded in Form V-4.2-1,
fabric and discarding the rectangular sections of fabric column 8.
containing the defects:
(-a) dirt spots1 4.76 mm to 19 mm (3∕16 in. to 3∕4 in.) V-4.4.4 Weight per Square Yard of Fabric
in diameter in excess of one per 3 linear m (10 linear ft) V-4.4.4.1 Measuring Process
(-b) more than one missing end per 0.3 linear m (1
linear ft) in any direction (a) The fabric shall be unrolled and laid flat on the
(-c) areas of the fabric less than 152.4 mm (6 in.) inspection table.
where rovings are disoriented or looped less than 25 mm (b) One fill pick shall be pulled from the fabric, or a line
(1 in.) in height from the surface. The number of these shall be marked across the width of the fabric.
areas shall not exceed two per 4.6 linear m (5 linear (c) The linear measuring tool specified in para. V-4.3.2
yd) of fabric. If they do, the roll shall not be used for lami- shall be used to measure a fabric sample 914.4 mm (36 in.)
nates made to this Standard. long starting at the pulled pick or marked line specified in
(-d) weft tails greater than 25 mm (1 in.) or less (b). A second pick shall be pulled or line marked to indicate
than 3.2 mm (1∕8 in.) in length. the end of the sample.
(-e) bias exceeding ±10 deg from 0 deg/180 deg in (d) The 914.4-mm (36-in.) long sample shall be cut,
a warp (machine direction) product or from 90 deg/270 using the scissors specified in para. V-4.3.2, across the
deg in a weft (fill direction) product. width of the fabric.
(2) Fiberglass unidirectional fabric rolls having any (e) The width of the fabric shall be measured as
of the following defects shall not be used for laminates described in para. V-4.4.3.
made to this Standard: V-4.4.4.2 Weight Determination Process
(-a) dirt spots1 in excess of 19 mm (3∕4 in.) in
diameter (a) The sample shall be placed on the laboratory
(-b) more than one missing end per 0.3 linear m (1 balance (see para. V-4.3.3) and weighed to the nearest
linear ft) in any direction 0.1 g.
(-c) areas of the fabric greater than 152.4 mm (6 NOTE: Convert the grams to ounces, if needed, by multiplying by
in.) where rovings are disoriented or looped less than 25 0.0352.
mm (1 in.) in height from the surface
(b) The weight, in ounces per square yard, shall be
(-d) areas of the fabric where rovings are disor-
calculated from the following equation:
iented or looped greater than 25 mm (1 in.) in height
from the surface weight, oz/yd2 = 1,296 in.2 /yd2
(-e) contamination from water or other sample weight, oz (V-4-1)
substances ×
sample width, in. × sample length, in.

V-4.4.3 Width Measure of Fabric (c) Rolls whose weight per square yard is outside the
(a) The linear measuring tool specified in para. V-4.3.2 constituent material manufacturer’s specification shall
shall be used to measure the width of the fabric at a posi- not be used for laminates made to this Standard.
tion at least 0.9 m (1 yd) from the beginning (leading) edge (d) The weight per square yard of acceptable and un-
of the roll and at two additional positions at least 152.4 acceptable rolls shall be entered in Form V-4.2-1, column
mm (6 in.) apart. 6. The rejected rolls shall be identified by the word
(1) Follow the constituent material manufacturer’s “rejected” written next to the recorded weight.
definition for the width of the particular fabric.
V-4.4.5 Construction
NOTE: Due to the methods of manufacturing fabrics, there are
different ways of describing widths of fabrics. (a) The following construction process shall be used:
(2) Measure to the nearest 3.175 mm ( ∕8 in.).1 (1) Unroll the fabric on the inspection table and lay
(3) Average the three measurements and enter the flat.
measured width of acceptable and unacceptable rolls in (2) Perform the verification of construction in an
Form V-4.2-1, column 5. area at least 1 yd from the beginning of the roll and
one-tenth of the width from the edge of the fabric. For

95
 ASME NM.2-2022

example, on 1 524-mm (60-in.) material, start at least V-5.3 Equipment Required

152.4 mm (6 in.) from one edge and 914.4 mm (1 yd)
from the beginning of the fabric. An inspection table and adequate overhead lighting that
(3) Using the template required by para. V-4.3.2, are suitable for the inspection of the milled fiber shall be
measure a 76.2-mm (3-in.) square and count the used. The equipment used shall not introduce contamina-
number of warp strands (if applicable) to the nearest tion to the milled fiber during inspection.
half strand in the section. Repeat this three times diagon-
V-5.4 Procedures and Acceptance Limits
ally across the fabric.
(4) Add the total warp strands counted in the three V-5.4.1 Package Identification and Inspection
76.2-mm (3-in.) squares and divide by 9. This will give (a) The milled fiber shall be packaged as shipped from
picks per inch in the warp of the fabric. the constituent material manufacturer’s factory.
(b) The construction process described in (a) shall be (b) The milled fiber shall not be repackaged in the
repeated for the fill (weft) strands, if applicable. distribution of the material after the constituent material
(c) Rolls whose picks per inch in either warp or fill are manufacturer has shipped the milled fiber.
outside the constituent material manufacturer’s specifica- (c) The milled fiber, as identified by the constituent
tion shall not be used for laminates made to this Standard. material manufacturer, shall be verified as having the
(d) The picks per inch in the warp and fill of acceptable same nomenclature as the milled fiber required.
and unacceptable rolls to the nearest 0.1 picks shall be (d) Each package of milled fiber shall be examined for
entered in Form V-4.2-1, column 7. damage that renders it unusable.
(e) Acceptable milled fibers shall be indicated by
V-5 FIBERGLASS MILLED FIBERS recording the date of the inspection and the name of
the person performing the inspection in Form V-5.2-1,
V-5.1 Introduction column 4.
This section specifies the minimum inspections and (f) For packaged milled fiber that is found to be accept-
tests that shall be performed on packages of fiberglass able for further inspection, the reinforcement production
milled fiber used to fabricate glass-fiber-reinforced ther- date and lot number for each package used shall be
mosetting-resin piping systems to this Standard. entered in Form V-5.2-1, columns 2 and 3, respectively.

V-5.2 Acceptance Inspections V-5.4.2 Visual Inspection of Milled Fiber

(a) Acceptance inspections of fiberglass milled fiber (a) As milled fiber is used, it shall be visually inspected
shall include inspection of the milled fiber for proper for contamination by the manufacturer. The the date of the
packaging and identification, and visual inspection for inspection and the inspector’s name shall be recorded
contamination. in Form V-5.2-1, column 5.
(b) Acceptance requirements and limits shall be as (b) Packages having contamination of the milled fiber
defined in paras. V-5.4.1 and V-5.4.2. evident in the form of water, oil, grease, or clumping
(c) Form V-5.2-1 or a similar form that contains the together shall be rejected.
provisions to record the results of these required inspec- (c) The results of the visual inspection of each package
tions shall be used by the manufacturer and retained in the of milled fiber shall be recorded in the “Comments” section
inspection records. A separate form shall be used for each of Form V-5.2-1.
milled fiber constituent material manufacturer, milled
fiber nomenclature, and milled fiber length.

96
 ASME NM.2-2022

Form V-2.2-1 Veil and Mat Reinforcement Log Sheet

Fabricator’s name Mat manufacturer

Address Mat nomenclature

Mat treatment (if given) [Note (1)]

QC file no. Mat weight [Note (2)]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Roll Reinforcement Lot No. Packaging Width Weight of Property Visual
No. Production Date [Note (1)] Inspection sq ft Inspection Inspection
(if Given) Sample (Cols. 5 and 6)
By Date By Date By Date

8
Comments on visual and packaging inspection (indicate which roll):

GENERAL NOTE: This form may be reproduced and used without written permission from ASME if used for purposes other than republication.
NOTES:
(1) Lot, batch, product code, or other label identification.
(2) Manufacturer’s label weight.

97
 ASME NM.2-2022

Form V-3.2-1 Roving Reinforcement Log Sheet

Fabricator’s name Roving manufacturer

Address Roving nomenclature

Roving yield

QC file no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ball Reinforcement Lot No. Packaging Yield Property Visual
No. Production Date [Note (1)] Inspection Inspection Inspection
(if Given) (Column 5)
By Date By Date By Date

8
Comments on visual and packaging inspection (indicate which roll):

GENERAL NOTE: This form may be reproduced and used without written permission from ASME if used for purposes other than republication.
NOTE: (1) Lot, batch, product code, or other label identification.

98
 ASME NM.2-2022

Form V-4.2-1 Fabric Reinforcement Log Sheet

Fabricator’s name Fabric manufacturer

Address Fabric nomenclature

Fabric weight

QC file no. Fabric construction

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Roll Reinforcement Lot No. Packaging Width Weight Construction Property Visual
No. Production [Note (1)] Inspection Inspection Inspection
Date (Cols. 5, 6,
(if Given) and 7)
By Date By Date By Date

8
Comments on visual and packaging inspection (indicate which roll):

GENERAL NOTE: This form may be reproduced and used without written permission from ASME if used for purposes other than republication.
NOTE: (1) Lot, batch, product code, or other label identification.

99
 ASME NM.2-2022

Form V-5.2-1 Milled Fiber Reinforcement Log Sheet

Fabricator’s name Fiber manufacturer

Address Fiber nomenclature

Fiber length

QC file no.

1 2 3 4 5
Package Reinforcement Production Date Lot No. Packaging Visual
No. (if Given) [Note (1)] Inspection Inspection
By Date By Date

8
Comments on visual and packaging inspection (indicate which package):

GENERAL NOTE: This form may be reproduced and used without written permission from ASME if used for purposes other than republication.
NOTE: (1) Lot, batch, product code, or other label identification.

100
 ASME NM.2-2022

MANDATORY APPENDIX VI
EXAMINATION AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS
FOR VINYL ESTER RESIN, POLYESTER RESIN,
AND ADDITIVE MATERIALS

VI-1 INTRODUCTION VI-2 VISUAL INSPECTION ð22Þ

(a) Sections VI-2 through VI-5 of this Appendix specify This section specifies the requirements for the inspec-
the minimum requirements for the inspections and tests tion of resins, curing agents, and additives that will be used
that shall be performed by the fabricator’s personnel or an in fabricating pipe and piping components to this Stan-
independent testing laboratory on resins and curing dard.
agents (curing agents include accelerators, promoters,
and peroxides as required for specific resins systems). VI-2.1 Requirements
(b) The requirements of sections VI-2 through VI-5 (a) Resins
shall be satisfied if the product is accompanied by an ac- (1) Before use, resins shall be checked to ensure they
ceptable certificate of analysis prepared by the constituent are the products ordered and they comply with the
material manufacturer and it is accepted by the fabricator following:
under the following conditions: (-a) They have proper labeling for the specified
(1) The fabricator shall confirm that the products are product, including the constituent material manufac-
the ones ordered and the label identifies the product, the turer’s product name and identifying number.
product identification number, and the constituent manu- (-b) A sample is of normal color and clarity for the
facturer. specific resin, free from solid or gelled particles and dirt as
(2) The fabricator may record results of specific tests determined by visual examination.
on the Resin Log Sheet, Form VI-6-1, provided the certi- (-c) They are within the constituent material
ficate of analysis is noted in the log sheet by a traceable manufacturer’s specification limits for specific gravity,
identification and is available for review by concerned viscosity, and room-temperature gel time.
parties. (2) Before a resin is used, its properties shall be
(c) If a certificate of analysis is not acceptable to the determined by the test methods of sections VI-3
fabricator, then the inspections described in this Appendix through VI-5 unless the manufacturer has developed
shall be performed on at least one random sample from and implemented test methods documented in their
each lot or batch of material received from a supplier. quality control (QC) program to generate the data
(d) If any containers or packages are damaged, then the required on the Resin Log Sheet, Form VI-6-1.
contents of each damaged container shall be inspected (3) Results of visual examinations and specific tests
according to the procedures of this Appendix. shall be recorded on the Resin Log Sheet, Form VI-6-1.
NOTE: The requirements of this Appendix shall be met prior to (b) Curing Agents
use of resins and curing agents for fabrication of piping compo- (1) Before use, curing agents shall be checked to
nents to this Standard. ensure they are the products ordered and they comply
(e) The requirements of this Appendix will help ensure with the following:
that the resins and curing agents are correctly identified; (-a) They have proper labeling for the specified
meet the constituent material manufacturer’s specifica- product, including the constituent material manufac-
tion; and are suitable for proper fabrication, curing prac- turer’s product name and identifying number.
tice, and design requirements of equipment fabricated to (-b) They have no layering or separation into two
this Standard. or more phases.
NOTE: Layering or separation presents potential hazard; if
layering is observed, the supplier should be contacted immedi-
ately at emergency telephone numbers shown on the Curing
Agent Log Sheet, Form VI-6-2, for instructions.

101
 ASME NM.2-2022

(-c) If liquid, they are free of sediment or VI-3.3 Calculations

suspended solids.
(-d) They have proper curing activity as defined by The following physical properties shall be calculated:
weight of full cup, g tare weight, g
the manufacturer’s process and/or constituent material (a) weight, lb/gal =
manufacturer’s specification, and as determined by the 10
weight, lb/gal
room-temperature gel-time test (see section VI-5). (b) specific gravity =
8.33
(2) Results of visual examination and gel-time
testing shall be recorded on the Curing Agents Log VI-3.4 Report
Sheet, Form VI-6-2.
The specific gravity shall be recorded on the Resin Log
VI-2.2 Acceptance Criteria Sheet, Form VI-6-1.
Materials failing to meet the visual inspection criteria of
para. VI-2.2 or the constituent material manufacturer’s VI-4 VISCOSITY, BROOKFIELD METHOD
specifications in any prescribed test shall not be used The Brookfield method determines the viscosity and
unless the following criteria are met: thixotropic index of a resin using a Brookfield viscometer.
(a) Based on input from the constituent material manu- It is applicable for both thixotropic and nonthixotropic
facturer’s QC contact (shown on log sheet), corrective resins.
sampling procedures are undertaken that result in the Close control of resin temperature and careful mainte-
material passing visual examination. nance of the Brookfield viscometer are required to obtain
(b) Test result differences are shown, by retest, to be accurate viscosity values.
caused by procedural differences in testing rather than by
differences in quality of materials. VI-4.1 Apparatus
The following apparatus shall be used for the proce-
VI-3 SPECIFIC GRAVITY dures in paras. VI-4.2 through VI-4.4:
This section specifies the procedure that shall be used to (a) viscometer suitable for measuring Brookfield vis-
determine the specific gravity. This shall be accomplished cosity (calibrated via constituent material manufacturer’s
by weighing a standard volume of liquid at a specific directions)
temperature and converting this weight to specific gravity. (b) metal, plastic, or glass beakers, 250 mL or larger,
with lids
VI-3.1 Apparatus (c) constant-temperature water bath at 25°C ± 0.5°C
(77°F ± 0.9°F)
The following apparatus shall be used for the procedure
(d) digital thermometer calibrated to a national stan-
in para. VI-3.2:
dard
(a) weight-per-gallon cup (water capacity 83.3 mL)
(e) stirring rod or spatula that will not absorb resin or
with lid
additives
(b) constant-temperature water bath at 25°C ± 0.5°C
(f) laboratory timer calibrated in units of 0.1 min
(77°F ± 0.9°F)
(c) digital thermometer calibrated to a national stan- VI-4.2 Temperature Adjustment
dard
(d) metal, plastic, or glass beaker, 250 mL or larger The following procedure shall be used to adjust the
(e) laboratory balance (0.1 g sensitivity) temperature of the resin:
Step 1. Fill the beaker with the material to be tested.
VI-3.2 Procedure Step 2. Immerse the covered beaker in the agitated
water bath and allow the material to come to temperature,
The following procedure shall be used to determine spe-
25°C ± 0.5°C (77°F ± 0.9°F).
cific gravity:
Step 1. Precondition the resin sample and weight-per- NOTE: The temperature adjustment may be hastened by spatula
gallon cup for 20 min at 25°C ± 0.5°C (77°F ± 0.9°F). Insert agitation of the sample (avoid air entrapment).
the cup and the resin sample separately in the large Step 3. Check the temperature of the material using the
beaker. Place the beaker in the water bath. thermometer.
Step 2. Tare weigh the empty cup and lid to ±0.1 g.
Step 3. Fill the cup to the brim with bubble-free resin. VI-4.3 Thixotropic Resins
Step 4. Place the lid on the cup and force it down to seat
The following procedure shall be used to determine vis-
fully.
cosity of thixotropic resins:
Step 5. Wipe the cup clean on the outside.
Step 6. Weigh the filled cup to ±0.1 g.

102
 ASME NM.2-2022

Step 1. Vigorously agitate the resin with a glass or stain- (b) viscosity in centipoise at 25°C (77°F), taken as the
less steel rod, stirring to mix thoroughly but taking care to average of two trials for each measurement speed used
minimize entrapment of air; replace the cover on the
beaker and return the beaker to the water bath for a VI-5 ROOM-TEMPERATURE GEL TIME
minimum of 5 min or until all visible entrapped air is gone.
Step 2. Level the Brookfield viscometer, and attach the This section specifies the procedure that shall be used to
spindle and guard as designated by the resin manufac- determine the room-temperature [25°C (77°F)] gel time of
turer. resins that have been properly mixed with correctly
Step 3. Remove the beaker from the water bath, place proportioned amounts of accelerator, promoter, and
the open beaker in position under the Brookfield viscom- peroxide curing agents.
eter, and center and immerse the spindle to the middle of
VI-5.1 Apparatus
the notch.
Step 4. Set speed to 6 rpm; start the Brookfield viscom- The following apparatus shall be used for the procedure
eter and timer. in para. VI-5.2:
(a) After 1 min, increase speed to 60 rpm. (a) constant-temperature water bath at 25°C ± 0.5°C
(b) At 2 min, stop the viscometer and read. (77°F ± 0.9°F)
(c) Reduce speed to 6 rpm, and take the final reading (b) plastic, metal, or glass beaker, 250 mL or larger
1 min after restarting. (c) stirring rod or spatula that will not absorb resin or
(d) Record the 60 rpm and 6 rpm values. additives
Step 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for a second reading at (d) laboratory timer, calibrated in units of 0.1 min
each spindle speed. (e) laboratory balance (0.1 g sensitivity)
(f) graduated syringes, delivery 0.1 mL to 3.0 mL
VI-4.4 Nonthixotropic Resins (g) digital thermometer calibrated to a national stan-
The following procedure shall be used to determine vis- dard
cosity of nonthixotropic resins:
VI-5.2 Procedure
Step 1. Level the Brookfield viscometer, and attach the
spindle and guard as designated by resin manufacturer. The following procedure shall be used to determine the
Step 2. Remove the beaker from the water bath, place gel time of resins at room temperature:
the open beaker in position under the Brookfield viscom- Step 1. Place 100 g of resin to be tested into a clean 250-
eter, and center and immerse the spindle to the middle of mL beaker. Place the beaker in the constant-temperature
the notch. water bath previously set at 25°C ± 0.1°C (77°F ± 0.18°F)
Step 3. Run the viscometer at 60 rpm for 1 min with a for a minimum of 20 min until the resin in the beaker is
spindle chosen so that the Brookfield pointer falls approxi- stabilized throughout at 25°C ± 1.0°C (77°F ± 0.18°F).
mately in the midrange of the recording dial. Alternatively, Step 2. Add controlled promoters and/or accelerators
run the viscometer at the speed and with the spindle rec- individually to the resin, stirring with the spatula between
ommended by the resin manufacturer. Record the value. each addition until they are thoroughly dispersed (1 min
Step 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 above for the second for each addition). The quantities and precision of
result. amounts shall be as specified by the resin supplier.
Step 3. After the addition of the promoters and accel-
VI-4.5 Calculations erators, allow the resin to rest in the constant-tempera-
(a) Viscosity shall be determined by multiplying the ture water bath.
values obtained in para. VI-4.3 or para. VI-4.4 by the (a) When enough of the entrapped air from stirring
Brookfield constant for the particular spindle number has left the sample to allow visual examination, check the
and speed (revolutions per minute) used to obtain the sample for good dispersion, particularly of cobalt addi-
value. tives.
(b) If the two results for a particular spindle and speed (b) If the sample shows any signs of striations or
do not agree within ±50 centipoise (cP), the test shall be strings of the cobalt, it shall be remixed.
repeated. Step 4. Add the required concentration of the peroxide
(c) Thixotropic index shall be determined as viscosity catalyst to the resin and mix vigorously with a clean
at 6 rpm divided by viscosity at 60 rpm. spatula for 1 min. Start the timer simultaneously with
the start of mixing.
VI-4.6 Report NOTE: Peroxides will react violently if placed in direct contact
with metallic promoters or organic accelerators. Extreme care
The following shall be reported on the Resin Log Sheet, shall be taken to avoid this. Refer carefully to constituent (i.e.,
Form VI-6-1: peroxide) material manufacturer’s instructions for safe handling
(a) Brookfield viscometer spindle and speed of these materials.

103
 ASME NM.2-2022

Step 5. With the beaker in the constant-temperature (d) Pigments. Pigments are compounds that provide
water bath, periodically probe the resin solution with coloration and/or opacity. Only the resin-rich outer-
the spatula until such time as the resin turns very surface layer may contain pigment.
thick and will “snap” or break evenly when the probe
is lifted from the resin. When the snap occurs, stop the VI-7.2 Acceptance Inspection
timer and record the time lapse as the gel time.
(a) The package for each of the common additives shall
be inspected at the time of delivery. Acceptance require-
VI-5.3 Report
ments are defined in para. VI-7.3.
The room-temperature [25°C (77°F)] gel time shall be (b) Form VI-7.2-1 or a similar form that contains the
recorded on the Resin Log Sheet, Form VI-6-1. provisions to record the results of these required inspec-
tions shall be used by the manufacturer and retained in the
VI-6 RESIN AND CURING AGENTS LOG SHEETS inspection records.
See Forms VI-6-1 and VI-6-2 for the Resin and Curing VI-7.3 Acceptance Criteria
Agents Log Sheets.
(a) The primary package shall be clearly labeled by the
VI-7 COMMON ADDITIVES constituent material manufacturer to identify the
contained product by constituent material manufacturer,
This section specifies the minimum inspections that name, and lot number.
shall be performed by the manufacturer prior to the accep- (1) The primary container shall be free from damage
tance and use of any of the common additives in the resin. (breakage, tear, or puncture).
(2) There shall be no visible sign that any part of the
VI-7.1 Definition and Limits primary container wall has at any time been saturated
(a) Thixotropic Agents. Thixotropic agents are flame- with a liquid such as water.
processed silicon dioxides that are used to adjust the (b) For additives found to be acceptable, the manufac-
flow characteristics of the resin. The laminating resin turer shall list the constituent material manufacturer’s
shall contain no more than 1.5 parts of thixotropic name, product name and lot number, and purpose of addi-
agent per 100 parts resin by weight. tive on the inspection form.
(b) Flame-Retardant Synergists. Flame-retardant (c) The inspector shall sign and date the inspection
synergists are antimony oxides that are added to haloge- form in the space next to “As Received.”
nated resins to enhance their flame-retardant character-
istics as measured per ASTM E84. The laminating resin VI-7.4 Inspection in Use
shall not contain more than 5 parts antimony oxide (a) At the time of use, additives shall be visually
per 100 parts resin by weight. When predispersed concen- inspected for contamination.
trates are used, the laminating resin shall contain no more (b) Solid contaminants may be removed and discarded.
than 5 parts active antimony oxide by weight. No more (c) Any portion of a product that has been agglomer-
than 10 parts of the predispersed concentrate per 100 ated by exposure to a liquid contaminant shall be removed
parts resin by weight is permissible. and discarded before the remainder can be added to a
(c) Ultraviolet Light Absorbers. Ultraviolet light absor- resin.
bers are organic compounds that, by converting photoche- (d) When contamination is found, the manufacturer
mical energy to thermal energy, effectively stabilize resin shall enter the date, describe the condition, and initial
binders against the deteriorating effects of ultraviolet the entry on the original Common Additives Log Sheet,
light. Only the resin-rich outer-surface layer may Form VI-7.2-1.
contain the ultraviolet light absorber.

104
 ASME NM.2-2022

Form VI-6-1 Resin Log Sheet

Manufacturer QC Contact

Resin Address

Spindle no. Telephone no.

Emergency telephone no.

Gel Time Viscosity @ 25°C Specific

(cP)
@ 25°C Gravity Visual
Date Lot No. (Minutes) @ 60 rpm @ 6 rpm @ 25°C Examination

Manufacturer’s Specification:

GENERAL NOTE: This form may be reproduced and used without written permission from ASME if used for purposes other than republication.

105
 ASME NM.2-2022

Form VI-6-2 Curing Agent Log Sheet

Manufacturer QC contact

Curing agent Address

Standard resin Telephone no.

Emergency telephone no.

Date Lot No. Gel Time @ 25°C (Minutes) Visual Examination

GENERAL NOTE: This form may be reproduced and used without written permission from ASME if used for purposes other than republication.

106
 ASME NM.2-2022

Form VI-7.2-1 Common Additives Log Sheet

Raw Materials Inspection Inspector Date
As Received
Manufacturer
In Use Quality Problems

Product Name

Lot Number

Additive Purpose

As Received
Manufacturer
In Use Quality Problems

Product Name

Lot Number

Additive Purpose

As Received
Manufacturer
In Use Quality Problems

Product Name

Lot Number

Additive Purpose

As Received
Manufacturer
In Use Quality Problems

Product Name

Lot Number

Additive Purpose

GENERAL NOTE: This form may be reproduced and used without written permission from ASME if used for purposes other than republication.

107
 ASME NM.2-2022

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX A
PIPE SUPPORT CALCULATIONS AND SIMPLIFIED STRESS
ANALYSIS FOR FRP PIPING SYSTEM DESIGN

A-1 SCOPE EAC = axial compressive modulus of elasticity for total

wall, MPa (psi)
This Appendix provides a suggested method for a calcu- Fth = thermal load, N (lb)
lation evaluation of a simple piping system to determine αA = coefficient of thermal expansion, mm/mm/°C
restrained piping anchor loads, locate anchors and guides, (in./in./°F)
and determine support spacing. ΔT = change in temperature from installation
temperature to maximum operating tempera-
A-2 SUPPORT LOAD CALCULATIONS ture or from installation temperature to
minimum operating/ambient temperature, °C
A-2.1 General (°F)
A piping system consisting of long straight runs with
simple offsets can be analyzed with this simplified calcu- (3) The critical buckling load shall be calculated as
lation method. Furthermore, this method may be used for follows:
any system that can be broken into straight runs and offset 2
EAC Is (A-2-2)
legs by use of anchors and guides. For example, a system Fcr =
routed on piping utility bridges with a few offsets can be LG 2C
handled in a straightforward manner without the need for
an extensive flexibility analysis. Note that long-term where
values of the mechanical modulus should be used in calcu- C = eccentricity factor. Should not be less than 1 but
lating loads and deflections. it is up to the designer’s judgment on the value to
use for a specific system
A-2.1.1 Rigidly Restrained Pipe. A rigidly restrained EAC = axial compressive modulus of elasticity for the
pipe system is one that uses anchors along the straight structural layer, MPa (psi)
runs of piping to restrict thermal expansion and contrac- Fcr = critical load, N (lb)
tion. The restrained thermal expansion manifests itself as Is = moment of inertia of the structural layer, mm4
compressive stress in the pipe and axial thermal loads on (in.4)
the anchors. This type of support system is generally LG = spacing between guides, mm (in.)
restricted to small-diameter piping due to the magnitude
of the anchor loads. (4) If the thermal load in the maximum operating
(a) Column-Type Buckling case is greater than the critical buckling load, the
(1) The restraint of thermal expansion of the pipe in spacing between the guides shall be reduced.
anchored horizontal systems will result in compressive (5) The load, Fcr, should be 20% greater than Fth.
loads on the pipe. It is therefore necessary to ensure (b) Pressure Loads on Anchors. The pressure load on the
that the spacing between guides is adequate to prevent anchors shall be calculated as follows:
column-type buckling. For a vertical anchored system,
E
the weight of the pipe and its contents should be FP = p (Di + 2tL)2 A t HAT AT ph (A-2-3)
added to the anchor loads. 4 EHT
(2) The thermal load shall be calculated as follows:
where
Fth = EACA t T (A-2-1)
A Di = inside diameter of component, mm (in.)
EHT = hoop tensile modulus of elasticity, MPa (psi)
where
Fp = pressure load, N (lb)
At = cross-sectional area of total pipe wall, mm2 (in.2)
P = pressure, MPa (psi)
x = (π/4)(Do2 − Di2)
tL = corrosion-barrier thickness, mm (in.)
Di = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.)
Do = outside diameter of pipe, mm (in.)

108
 ASME NM.2-2022

tS = structural wall thickness of component, mm (b) A vertical run should be supported on the riser to
(in.) keep excessive load off the elbows and guides as required.
νHAT = Poisson’s ratio for hoop-axial tensile stress NOTE: The guides and supports described in (a) and (b) provide
causing axial strain predictability to the system expansion loading/deflections.
σph = hoop stress due to pressure Ambient systems subject to solar thermal loadings can
x = PDi develop significant expansion loads or deflections.
2(tL + tS) (c) A straight piping run should have a stability guide at
least every third support, an anchor near the middle of the
(c) Total Load on Anchors. The total load on the anchors run, and guides at changes in direction spaced away from
for a restrained system may be calculated as follows: the elbow as indicated in para. A-3.2.
FA = Fth + FP (A-2-4) NOTE: Some piping systems, e.g., those exposed to large wind
loads, require more support than that described in (c). The span-
where ning capability of FRP piping spans is generally less than that for
FA = anchor load, N (lb) steel pipe, due to the lower modulus of the material.
(d) Supports shall be spaced to avoid sag (excessive
A-2.2 Guide Spacing for Restrained Systems displacement over time) and/or excessive vibration for
The required guide spacing, LG, to prevent Euler buck- the design life of the piping system.
ling between the anchors may be calculated by solving the NOTE: Stress due to bending from weight is both compressive
critical buckling [eq. (A-2-2)] for LG with the thermal load and tensile. The stress in the lower fibers (bottom of the pipe),
[eq. (A-2-1)], as follows: which are in tension, is additive to the tensile stress due to pres-
sure, and it is the combination of these stresses that limits the
2 support spacing requirement.
IsEAT (A-2-5)
LG =
A t A TEACC (e) The pipe deflection should be limited to 12.5 mm
(0.5 in.) maximum.
where (1) When filled with water, FRP pipes should be
At = cross-sectional area of total pipe wall, mm2 (in.2) capable of spanning at least the distances specified in
x = (π/4)(Do2 − Di2) Table A-3.1-1 while meeting the deflection criterion of
Di = inside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) 0.5% of span or 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) at center, whichever
Do = outside diameter of pipe, mm (in.) is smaller. The acceptable support spacing for simply
C = eccentricity factor supported spans may be calculated from the following
EAC = axial compressive modulus of elasticity for total equation:
wall, MPa (psi)
384EAT Is (A-3-1)
EAT = axial tensile modulus of elasticity for total wall, LS1 = 4
MPa (psi) 5w
Is = moment of inertia of the structural layer, mm4
where
(in.4)
EAT = axial tensile modulus of elasticity for the struc-
ΔT = change in temperature from installation
tural layer, MPa (psi)
temperature to maximum operating tempera-
Is = moment of inertia of the structural layer, mm4
ture, °C (°F)
(in.4)
αA = coefficient of thermal expansion, mm/mm/°C
LS1 = simple support spacing limited by deflection,
(in./in./°F)
mm (in.)
w = weight per unit length of pipe with fluid contents
NOTE: If values for the compressive modulus, EAC , are not avail- plus insulation if applicable, N/mm (lb/in.)
able, then it is acceptable for the engineer to consider them to be Δ = allowable midpoint deflection for simply
the same as for the tensile modulus, EAT. supported span
x = 12.5 mm (0.5 in.)
A-3 PIPE SUPPORT AND GUIDE SPACING FOR A
SEMIRIGID SYSTEM (2) The acceptable support spacing for continuously
supported spans may be calculated from the following
A-3.1 Guide and Anchor Installation equation:
(a) Guides and anchors should be installed on all FRP 144.9EAT Is (A-3-2)
LS 2 = 4
piping systems. This is true of both vertical and horizontal w
systems.

109
 ASME NM.2-2022

Table A-3.1-1
Guidance to Span Lengths

Pipe Size, Simple Span, L, m (ft) Continuous Span, L, m (ft) Cantilever Span, L, m (ft)
DN (NPS) SG = 1 SG = 1.35 SG = 1 SG = 1.35 SG = 1 SG = 1.35
50 (2) 2.19 (7.2) 2.10 (6.9) 2.56 (8.4) 2.47 (8.1) 1.25 (4.1) 1.19 (3.9)
80 (3) 2.47 (8.1) 2.35 (7.7) 2.90 (9.5) 2.77 (9.1) 1.40 (4.6) 1.34 (4.4)
100 (4) 2.65 (8.7) 2.53 (8.3) 3.11 (10.2) 2.96 (9.7) 1.52 (5.0) 1.43 (4.7)
150 (6) 2.99 (9.8) 2.80 (9.2) 3.47 (11.4) 3.29 (10.8) 1.68 (5.5) 1.62 (5.3)

200 (8) 3.20 (10.5) 3.05 (10.0) 3.78 (12.4) 3.57 (11.7) 1.83 (6.0) 1.74 (5.7)
250 (10) 3.66 (12.0) 3.44 (11.3) 4.30 (14.1) 4.05 (13.3) 2.07 (6.8) 1.95 (6.4)
300 (12) 4.08 (13.4) 3.84 (12.6) 4.75 (15.6) 4.51 (14.8) 2.32 (7.6) 2.19 (7.2)
350 (14) 4.18 (13.7) 3.93 (12.9) 4.88 (16.0) 4.60 (15.1) 2.38 (7.8) 2.23 (7.3)

400 (16) 4.51 (14.8) 4.27 (14.0) 5.30 (17.4) 5.00 (16.4) 2.56 (8.4) 2.44 (8.0)
450 (18) 4.85 (15.9) 4.57 (15.0) 5.70 (18.7) 5.36 (17.6) 2.77 (9.1) 2.59 (8.5)
500 (20) 5.00 (16.4) 4.72 (15.5) 5.85 (19.2) 5.52 (18.1) 2.83 (9.3) 2.68 (8.8)
600 (24) 5.58 (18.3) 5.27 (17.3) 6.55 (21.5) 6.16 (20.2) 3.17 (10.4) 2.99 (9.8)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) SG = specific gravity of the contents.
(b) The values in the table are based on typical 1.03 MPa (150 psi) rated FRP piping.
(c) Spans should be reduced for lower pressure ratings.
(d) The corrosion barrier has not been included as a structural element.
(e) The span data presented is
(1) based on typical deflection and bending stress criteria for FRP piping.
(2) estimated for preliminary arrangement and support layout. Actual spans should be verified on a project basis, based on the recommen-
dations of the selected piping manufacturer.
(f) Physical properties and dimensions of the FRP piping can vary between piping manufacturers.
(g) The presented spans do not include any consideration for inline components such as valves or flowmeters. Those components are assumed to
be independently supported.

where σn = net allowable stress reduced by pressure stress,

LS2 = continuous span support spacing limited by MPa (psi)
deflection, mm (in.)
Use the minimum support span limited by deflection
For existing support structures with a fixed span, or stress.
support spacing shall be calculated by iterating to a solu- (4) Larger spans are possible, and the designer
tion with a thicker pipe wall that will result in spacing should verify that stresses and deflections are within
equal to or greater than the required spacing. allowable limits accordingly. The thickness of the pipe
(3) In some cases, bending stresses or support wall may need to be increased to span large distances
contact stresses may become a limiting factor and the required by existing steel spacing. The designer shall
support spacing may have to be reduced. Based on the take into consideration the effect of buckling where
simply supported span’s maximum bending moment, compressive loading is present. The effect of temperature
the following calculation may be used to determine ac- on the axial modulus of the FRP material shall also be
ceptable support spacing based on stress limits: considered.
8 nZ (A-3-3)
LS 3 = A-3.2 Offset Legs
w
In a semi-anchored system, a long straight run
where expanding into a change in direction will stress the
LS3 = support spacing limited by stress, mm (in.) pipe and elbow or tee fitting if constrained (guided)
Z = section modulus for structural pipe wall, mm3 close to the turn.
(in.3) To prevent overstressing the fittings, a minimum
x = 2Is/Do distance to the first guide shall be determined.
Do = outside diameter of pipe, mm (in.)

110
 ASME NM.2-2022

(a) The limit on stress to the piping is based on a move- P = pressure = 80 psig
ment on the end of a cantilever span. The following calcu- ΔT = change in temperature from installation
lation should be used to determine acceptable guide- temperature to maximum operating tempera-
spacing-based stress limits: ture
x = 150°F − 77°F = 73°F
3 L1 EAT Do (A-3-4)
Lo1 = SG = specific gravity of the contents = 1
n

where NOTE: Material properties of pipe are taken from ASME NM.3.3,
Table 1-2.2-3, Data Sheet for Vinyl Ester Resin Type III. (For
Do = outside diameter of component, mm (in.)
55-deg machine filament-wound pipe, see Mandatory
EAT = axial tensile modulus of elasticity for the struc- Appendix IV.)
tural layer, MPa (psi)
Lo1 = offset length to first guide, stress limited, mm
Properties at Ambient Use Properties at Operating Use
(in.) 77°F in ASME NM.3.3, 150°F in ASME NM.3.3,
ΔL = actual length expansion into direction change, Table 1-2.2-3 Table 1-2.2-3
mm (in.) EAT = axial tensile modulus of EAT = axial tensile modulus of
σn = net allowable stress reduced by pressure stress, elasticity = 1,240,000 psi elasticity = 1,190,000 psi
MPa (psi) EAC = axial compressive EAC = axial compressive
modulus of elasticity = modulus of elasticity =
(b) The limit on stress to the elbow fitting is based on 1,240,000 psi 1,190,000 psi
the maximum moment allowed by the fabricator. The EHT = hoop tensile modulus of EHT = hoop tensile modulus of
following calculation should be used to determine accept- elasticity = 1,850,000 psi elasticity = 1,810,000 psi
able guide-spacing-based moment limits: t = 0.4 in. t = 0.4 in.
νHAT = hoop-axial tensile νHAT = hoop-axial tensile
6 L 2 EAT Is (A-3-5) Poisson’s ratio = 0.49 Poisson’s ratio = 0.49
Lo2 =
M max νAHT = axial-hoop tensile νAHT = axial-hoop tensile
Poisson’s ratio = 0.39 Poisson’s ratio = 0.39
where αA = axial coefficient of thermal αA = axial coefficient of thermal
Is = moment of inertia of the structural layer, mm4 expansion = 1.831 × 10−5 in./ expansion = 1.831 × 10−5 in./
in./°F in./°F
(in.4)
Lo2 = offset length to first guide, bending moment σall = allowable tensile stress = σall = allowable tensile stress =
1,240 psi 1,190 psi
limited, mm (in.)
ρ = density = 0.057 lb/in.3 ρ = density = 0.057 lb/in.3
Mmax = maximum bending moment on elbows
supplied by the pipe fabricator, N·mm (in.-lb)
ΔL2 = actual deflection for elbow, mm (in.) NOTE: Properties from manufacturer’s testing of a specific
project’s piping may be used in lieu of ASME NM.3.3 values.
(c) Use the maximum length limited by stress or (a) To determine support locations and anchor loads,
bending moment. The length shall be the most allowed perform the following calculations:
based on limits in pipe stress or elbow stress. (1) Using eq. (A-2-1), calculate thermal load, Fth, on
anchor for a rigidly supported segment.
A-4 REFERENCE Fth = EACA t A T
Young, W. C., and Budynas, R. G. (2002). Roark’s Formulas = 1.24 × 106(10.56)(1.831 × 10 5)73
for Stress and Strain (7th ed.). McGraw-Hill. = 17,502 lb

A-5 ANALYSIS EXAMPLE (U.S. CUSTOMARY where

UNITS) At = cross-sectional area of total pipe wall
To illustrate how the equations of section 2-4 and this ( /4)(Do 2 Di 2) = ( /4)(8.82 – 82) = 10.56 in.2
Appendix may be used to support a simple piping system Di = 8 in.
design, consider the following design conditions and Do = 8.8 in.
piping properties: EAC = 1.24 × 106 psi ambient
Di = inside diameter of pipe = 8 in. Fth = thermal load, lb
Do = outside diameter of pipe = 8.8 in. αA = 1.831 × 10−5 in./in./°F
tL = corrosion-barrier thickness = 0.1 in. ΔT = 150°F − 77°F = 73°F (assumed installation
tS = structural wall thickness of component = 0.3 in. temperature = 77°F)
t = total wall thickness = 0.3 + 0.1 = 0.4 in.

111
 ASME NM.2-2022

(2) Using eq. (A-2-3), calculate pressure load, Fp, on (b) Support Spacing
anchor for the rigidly supported segment (1) Calculate spans that are based on the straight
E horizontal simply supported spans by solving for
FP = P (Di + 2tL)2 A t HAT AT ph length. To determine acceptable support spacing,
4 EHT
perform the following calculations using eq. (A-3-1)
FP = 80( /4)[8 + 2(0.1)]2 – 10.56(0.49)
384EAT Is
(1.24/1.85)800 = 4,224.8 – 2,774.6 = 1,450 lb LS1 = 4
5w
where Combining Δ deflection limit with the 5 in the denomi-
EHT = 1.85 × 106 psi ambient nator
Fp = pressure load, lb
P = 80 psi
tL = 0.1 in. 38.4EAT Is 38.4(1.19 × 106)72.4
tS = 0.3 in. LS1 = 4 = 4 = 192.24 in.
w 2.422
νHAT = 0.49 = 16.0 ft
σph = hoop stress due to pressure
PDi where
= [80(8)] /[2(0.1 + 0.3)] = 800 psi
2(tL + tS) EAT = 1.19 × 106 psi operating
Is = 72.4 in.4
(3) Using eq. (A-2-4) and the results of (1) and (2) LS1 = simple support spacing limited by deflection
above, determine total load, FA, on anchors for a rigidly w = weight per unit length of pipe with fluid contents
supported segment plus insulation if applicable
FA = Fth + FP = 17,502 + 1,450 = 18,952 lb x = Atρ + (water weight per manufacturer’s table)
x = (10.56 in.2 × 0.057 lb/in.3) + [(21.8 lb/ft)/12]
(4) Verify that the structure will be able to support x = 0.602 + 1.82 = 2.422 lb/in.
these anchor loads. At = 10.56 in.2
(5) Using eq. (A-2-5), calculate guide spacing, LG, for a ρ = density of the pipe = 0.057 lb/in.3
rigidly supported segment Δ = allowable midpoint deflection for simply
supported span
2I E x = 0.5 in.
s AT
LG =
A t A TEAC C
ÅÄÅ 2 ÑÉ ÅÄ (2) Calculate spans that are based upon the straight
= {ÅÅÅÇ72.4(1.24 × 106)ÑÑÑÑ/ ÅÅÅÅ10.56(1.831 × 10 5)
Å
horizontal continuous supported spans with 3 or more
ÑÖ ÅÇ
É 0.5
Ñ simple supports by solving for length. To determine
73(1.24 × 106)2.0ÑÑÑÑ } the acceptable support spacing, perform the following
ÑÖ
0.5 calculations using eq. (A-3-2):
= (714.5/0.02822) = 159 in. = 13.26 ft
144.9EAT Is
LS 2 = 4
where w
C = eccentricity factor for deviation from pin
column. Pure pin-pin column anchored on the Combining Δ deflection limit
centerline would be 1.0. A larger factor is
selected here for anchor support attachment
distance below pipe centerline. C = 2.0 72.45EAT Is 72.45(1.19 × 106)72.4
LS 2 = 4 = 4
Di = 8 in. w 2.422
Do = 8.8 in. = 225.26 in. = 18.77 ft
Ds = inside diameter of structural layer = 8.2 in.
where
αA = 1.831 × 10−5 in./in./°F
LS2 = continuous span support spacing limited by
ΔT = 150°F − 77°F = 73°F
deflection
EAT = 1.24 × 106 psi ambient
EAC = 1.24 × 106 psi ambient
(3) Based on the simply supported span’s maximum
Is = moment of inertia of the structural layer
x = (π/64)(Do4 − Ds4) = (π/64)(8.84 − 8.24) bending moment, perform the following calculation using
x = 72.4 in.4 eq. (A-3-3) to determine acceptable support spacing based
LG = maximum spacing between guides on stress limits:

112
 ASME NM.2-2022

8 nZ 8(662)16.45 3 L1 EAT Do
LS 3 = = = 190 in. = 15.8 ft LO1 = L
w 2.422 n

3(0.00133)(1.24 × 106)8.8
where = L = 8.11 L
LS3 = support spacing limited by stress 662
Z = section modulus for structural pipe wall
where
x = 2Is/Do = 2(72.4)/8.8 = 16.45 in.3
Do = 8.8 in.
Do = 8.8 in.
EAT = 1.24 × 106 psi ambient
Ds = 8.2 in.
L = length of pipe thermally expanding into a direc-
σn = net allowable stress reduced by pressure stress
tion change, in.; use as required for length into
x = σall − σP = 1,190 − 528 = 662 psi
each offset in the pipe route.
σP = P(Ais/As) = 80(52.82/8.01) = 528 psi
LO1 = offset length to first guide, stress limited, in.
Ais = cross-sectional area of inside of pipe’s structural
ΔL1 = actual length expansion factor into direction
wall
change
x = (π/4)Ds2 = (π/4)8.22 = 52.82 in.2
x = αA ΔT = (1.831 × 10−5)73 = 0.00133 in./in.
As = cross-sectional area of pipe’s structural wall
αA = 1.831 × 10−5 in./in./°F
x = (π/4)(Do2 − Ds2) = (π/4)(8.82 − 8.22) = 8.01 in.2
ΔT = 150°F − 77°F = 73°F
σall = allowable tensile stress = 1,190 psi operating
σn = net allowable stress reduced by pressure stress
(see LS3 above) = 662 psi
(c) Evaluation. Note that the maximum guide spacing
LG = 13.26 ft for rigidly supported (anchor-to-anchor)
(2) The limit on stress to the elbow fitting is based on
sections is less than the support span allowed for the
the maximum moment allowed by the fabricator if avail-
maximum simple support span limited by deflection or
able. To determine acceptable guide-spacing-based
stress. Support span L S1 = 16.0 ft would exceed the
moment limits, perform the following calculation using
guide spacing allowed on the rigidly supported segments.
eq. (A-3-5):
Therefore, on the rigidly supported sections, the
maximum guide spacing of LG = 13.26 ft is the governing 6 L2 EAT Is
LO2 = L
maximum support spacing with all supports between M max
anchors being guides. Since the existing support structure
from Figure A-5-1 shows 20 ft between main columns, use 6(0.00133)(1.24 × 106)72.4
= L = 5.15 L
intermediate bridge steel at 10-ft intervals (existing for 27, 000
this example but not shown on sketch) for the shorter
support spacing that is needed. Use auxiliary steel only where
where necessary. Is = 72.4 in.4
In a section with many changes in direction, piping may LO2 = offset length to first guide, bending moment
be supported at a span that meets the LS1 span. Total span limited, in.
around a change in direction is customarily limited to two- Mmax = maximum bending moment on elbows
thirds of LS1. LS2 spans may be used on long straight runs supplied by the pipe fabricator. For 8-in.
that are not anchored on both ends. The LS3 support elbow, one manufacturer rates the elbow
spacing requirement does not apply since it is greater for 2,250 ft-lb or 27,000 in.-lb
than LS1. L = length of pipe thermally expanding into a
Calculate the distance to the first support on an offset direction change, in.; use as required for
leg. length into each offset in the pipe route.
The length growing into a direction change L is pulled ΔL2 = actual deflection factor for elbow
out of the formula for ΔL to allow checking of any length x = αA ΔT = (1.831 × 10−5)73 = 0.00133 in./in.
into an offset.
(1) The limit on stress to the piping is based on a Use the maximum length factor limited by stress or
movement on the end of a cantilever span. To determine bending moment. These length factors need to be
the acceptable guide-spacing-based stress limits near applied at every change in direction to prevent the
changes in direction, perform the following calculation pipe or fitting from being overstressed from the
using eq. (A-3-4): thermal growth of the longer leg at the turn. The
square root of the length in inches along with the
factor is used to determine the closest point a guide
may be used close to an elbow or tee.
For the sample geometry shown below, the above calcu-
lation may be applied to the piping.

113
 ASME NM.2-2022

Study the piping system. Break the system into straight For the offset leg, an example would be to determine the
segments and offset legs that will allow for analysis with closest safe location for the first anchor on the 200-ft long
the equations within this Appendix. rigidly supported run after the 30-ft riser supported from
The 200-ft and 300-ft segments are good candidates for the bottom. This will be governed by LO1. Repeat for each
the rigidly anchored method. The segments near changes offset leg.
in direction need to be evaluated with the offset leg calcu-
The LO1 = 8.11 30(12) = 153.9 in. or 12.8 ft.
lation for location of any guides or anchors near the
elbows.

114
 Figure A-5-1
Example Problem Layout

115
ASME NM.2-2022

GENERAL NOTE: For this example, the following parameters are given:
(1) nominal pipe size = 8 in.
(2) pipe outer diameter (O.D.) = 8.80 in.
(3) wall thickness = 0.30 in. + 0.10 in. = 0.40 in.
(4) fluid = sodium sulfate 3%
(5) operating temperature = 150°F
(6) operating pressure = 80 psi
(7) specific gravity = 1.0
 ASME NM.2-2022

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX B
ALTERNATIVE TESTING GRIPS AND BRACKETS
(MODIFICATION TO ASTM D2105)

B-1 USE OF ALTERNATIVE GRIPS AND BRACKETS (1) The test specimen shall have thicker ends, typi-
cally 1.5 times the wall thickness of the sample pipe.
Whenever the grips as outlined in ASTM D2105, para. (2) The additional laminate at the ends of the test
5.1.3 are not available (because of thicker FRP pipe or specimen shall consist of alternate layers of chopped
larger diameters), alternative grips or brackets (such strand and woven roving and shall extend with enough
as the one shown in Figure B-1-1 or any other type) length so that the pipe will not fail at the brackets.
may be used. The following conditions (see ASTM (c) The FRP pipe ends shall be drilled and pinned to the
D2105, para. 5.1.6) apply in the case where brackets metal brackets.
will be used in lieu of the grips described in ASTM (1) The size of the pin shall be determined in accor-
D2105, para. 5.1.3.1: dance with the expected loading, and the strength of the
(a) The brackets shall be made strong enough to handle pin shall be such that it will not deform at ultimate loads.
the expected loadings. (2) Maximum tolerance between the hole size and
(b) The brackets shall be made wide enough to accom- pin diameter shall be 3 mm (1∕8 in.).
modate the thicker ends of the test specimen.

116
 ASME NM.2-2022

Figure B-1-1
Alternative Testing Bracket

Metal bracket

117
 ASME NM.2-2022

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX C
GUIDANCE ON REPAIRS

C-1 SCOPE C-2.2 Incorrectly Sized or Placed Piping System

(a) This Appendix sets forth general criteria and repair
Components
guidance that should be used to correct nonconformities Any pipe repairs that are necessary because of incorrect
in piping system components before the components are size or placement of components or other attachments as
accepted as complying with this Standard and/or before requested by the user should also meet all the conditions
they are placed into service. set forth in para. C-2.1.
(b) The guidance in this Appendix applies only to piping
system components made with polyester and vinyl ester C-3 REPAIRS TO CORRECT NONCONFORMITIES
resins (polymers).
(c) The guidance in this Appendix applies only to piping C-3.1 Repairable Nonconformities
system components greater than or equal to DN 600
(NPS 24). (a) The following nonconformities may be repaired per
the guidance in this Appendix:
NOTE: Defects that may be visible at a cut end are most likely (1) all imperfections within the inner surface or
representative of similar defects elsewhere in the pipe section.
interior layer as defined by Table 4-3.2-1
The section of pipe should be rejected as not repairable.
(2) all imperfections within the structural layer as
defined by Table 4-3.2-1
C-2 GENERAL CONDITIONS (3) underthickness and/or understrength of the
structural laminate or secondary bond overlays of the
(a) When a defective or damaged laminate is to be
piping system components, provided the correct laminate
repaired, the total sequence of laminate construction
sequence was followed
removed by the grinding process should be replaced
(4) low Barcol hardness levels, provided they are
by a laminate sequence that provides structural proper-
correctable by postcuring
ties meeting the requirements of this Standard.
(5) acetone sensitivity of nonmolded surfaces and
(b) The repaired area should have the same physical
the outside of secondary bond overlays, provided they
strength and chemical-resistance characteristics as the
are correctable by postcuring
specified original laminate.
(6) incorrect size or placement of piping system
C-2.1 Nonconformities components
NOTES:
Piping fabricated to this Standard may be repaired to (1) Only nonpenetrating repairs are permitted on incorrectly
correct nonconformities detected before the piping is placed small piping components. If a wrong fitting (such
placed into service, provided all of the following condi- as a tee) is put in the wrong place, then it should be cut
tions are met: out and a new spool fabricated.
(a) The nonconformities should be classified as repair- (2) Penetrating repairs are permitted on incorrectly placed
able as indicated in section C-3. large piping components, provided the original cutout is
(b) The repair procedures used should be in accor- available.
dance with one or more of those outlined in (7) nonconformities that result in leakage during the
paras. C-6.6.1 through C-6.6.3. hydrostatic test (see Chapter 6)
(c) All repair procedures should be approved in (b) Repairs should be completed before the final hydro-
advance. If structural repairs are necessary, the designer static test is performed (see Chapter 6).
should concur.
(d) The amount of repaired area should not exceed the C-3.2 Unrepairable Nonconformities
limitations set forth in Table 4-3.2-1. (a) The following nonconformities are not considered
(e) Repairs should be done by a qualified bonder. repairable:
(f) All repairs should be examined and inspected per (1) incorrect materials of laminate construction,
the requirements of Chapters 5 and 6. such as resins, curing agents, and glass reinforcements

118
 ASME NM.2-2022

(2) incorrect structural laminate sequence C-6.1.2 Materials

(3) incorrect laminate construction and thickness of
(a) Repairs should be made with the same types of
the inner surface and interior layer
resin and reinforcement materials as were used to fabri-
(4) incorrect wind angle for filament-wound pipe
cate the inner surface of the original piping system compo-
(5) out-of-roundness in excess of that permitted by
nent.
ASME NM.3.2
(b) All laminate should be in accordance with Chapter 3.
(6) low Barcol hardness levels not correctable by
postcuring C-6.1.3 Repair Personnel. Repairs should be made by
(7) piping system component dimensions such as qualified bonders.
diameter that are not in compliance with the basic
piping system design calculations C-6.1.4 Repair Procedure
(b) A piping system component that has any one of the (a) The area to be repaired should be determined.
nonconformities listed in (a) should not be identified as
NOTE: The percentage of repair area should not exceed the
having been fabricated in accordance with this Standard.
limitations given in Table 4-3.2-1.

C-4 CLASSIFICATION OF REPAIRS (b) Areas adjacent to the repair should be protected to
prevent damage during the repair operation.
(a) Piping system component repairs should be classi- (c) Surface Preparation
fied into the following types: (1) A grinder fitted with a 60- to 80-grit disk should
(1) Type 1 — inner surface repairs be used to remove all nonconformities from the surface of
(2) Type 2 — interior layer repairs the area to be repaired.
(3) Type 3 — structural layer repairs (-a) The ground area should not be gouged out but
(4) Type 4 — dimensional nonconformance repairs tapered uniformly to the surface of adjacent unrepaired
(5) Type 5 — miscellaneous general repairs due to laminate.
acetone sensitivity or low Barcol readings (-b) Only cured laminate should be ground.
(6) Type 6 — repairs due to nonconformance with (-c) Final grinding should be done with a new disk
the user’s dimensional requirements surface to ensure a good surface profile for secondary
(b) Each type of repair should have its own corre- bonding.
sponding general repair procedure as given in (-d) Care should be taken not to remove more than
paras. C-6.1.1 through C-6.6.3. the inner surface unless necessary to remove all of the
nonconformity.
C-5 ORDER OF REPAIRS (-e) If any of the backup layers of chopped-strand
mat are removed, a Type 2 repair process as given in
If repairs are necessary due to damage to both the struc-
paras. C-6.2.1 through C-6.2.5 should be used.
tural layer and the corrosion barrier, the repairs to the
(2) The grinding dust should be removed from the
structural layer should be performed first, followed by
ground surface with a clean brush. If secondary bonding is
repairs to the corrosion barrier, unless otherwise
not started soon after the surface is brushed clean, the
approved by the designer.
cleaning procedure should be repeated just before the
repair laminate is applied.
C-6 REPAIR PROCEDURES (d) A new inner surface should be applied as specified
For general acceptance criteria, see the requirements of in the fabricator’s design drawings. The ground area
Table 4-3.2-1, Level 2. should be wetted with catalyzed resin just before the
new veil or veils are applied.
C-6.1 Type 1 — Inner Surface Repairs (e) After the inner surface has been applied and prop-
erly rolled out, a final topcoat of paraffin-containing resin
C-6.1.1 General
should be applied.
(a) For inner surface repairs, the inner surface (surfa-
cing veil) should be removed by grinding to eliminate C-6.1.5 Acceptance Inspection
nonconformities such as pits, inclusions, blisters, or air (a) The repaired areas should meet the requirements
voids. of Table 4-3.2-1.
(b) Repairs may be accomplished by adding back the (b) After the paraffin-containing topcoat has cured, the
correct inner surface material as specified in the fabrica- Barcol hardness and acetone sensitivity should be
tor’s design drawings. checked.
(c) The practice of capping the edges with veil should (c) Postcuring of the repaired area may be performed
be performed on butt-joined repairs of smaller pipe. to achieve the required Barcol hardness.

119
 ASME NM.2-2022

C-6.2 Type 2 — Interior Layer Repairs C-6.2.5 Acceptance Inspection

C-6.2.1 General (a) The repaired area should meet the requirements of
Table 4-3.2-1.
(a) For interior layer repairs, both inner-surface and
(b) After the paraffin-containing topcoat has cured, the
interior-layer laminate should be removed by grinding
Barcol hardness and acetone sensitivity should be
to eliminate nonconformities such as entrapped air, blis-
checked. Postcuring of the repaired area may be
ters, inclusions, cracks, and dry spots.
performed to achieve the required Barcol hardness.
(b) Repairs may be accomplished by adding back the
correct inner-surface and interior-layer laminate as speci- C-6.3 Type 3 — Structural Layer Repairs
fied in the fabricator’s design drawings.
C-6.3.1 General
C-6.2.2 Materials
(a) For structural layer repairs, structural material
(a) Repairs should be made with the same types of should be removed by grinding.
resin and reinforcement materials as were used to fabri- NOTE: The approach to the repair will vary depending on the
cate the inner surface and interior layer of the original type of nonconformity, its location, and its relationship to various
piping system component. piping system components.
(b) All laminate should be in accordance with Chapter 3.
(b) The designer should specify any special precautions
C-6.2.3 Repair Personnel. Repairs should be made by or considerations needed for a particular repair.
qualified bonders.
C-6.3.2 Materials
C-6.2.4 Repair Procedure
(a) Repairs should be made with the same types of
(a) The area to be repaired should be determined. resin and reinforcement materials as were used to fabri-
NOTE: The percentage of repair area should not exceed the cate the structural layers of the original piping system
limitations given in Table 4-3.2-1. component.
(b) Hand lay-up laminate should be used to repair fila-
(b) Areas adjacent to the repair should be protected to
ment-wound pipes [see para. C-6.3.4(c)].
prevent damage during the repair operation.
(c) All laminate should be in accordance with Chapter 3.
(c) Surface Preparation
(1) A grinder fitted with an 80-grit or coarser disk C-6.3.3 Repair Personnel. Repairs should be made by
should be used to remove all nonconformities from the qualified bonders.
surface of the area to be repaired.
C-6.3.4 Repair Specification. The designer should
(-a) The ground area should not be gouged out but
specify the following:
tapered uniformly to the surface of adjacent unrepaired
(a) the surface area and shape of the area to be
laminate.
disturbed for repair
(-b) Only cured laminate should be ground.
(b) any extra material required to effect a proper repair
(-c) Final grinding should be done with a new disk
of the area/layer affected by grinding
surface to ensure a good surface profile for secondary
bonding. NOTE: The required laminate sequence should be identified in
the Repair Specification.
(2) The grinding dust should be removed from the
ground surface with a clean brush. If secondary bonding is (c) for repair of nonconformities in filament-wound
not started soon after the surface is brushed clean, the structural layers, the complete hand lay-up laminate
cleaning procedure should be repeated just before the sequence
repair laminate is applied.
(d) A new inner surface and interior layer should be C-6.3.5 Repair Procedure
applied as specified in the fabricator’s design drawings. (a) The area to be repaired should be determined.
(1) The ground area should be wetted with catalyzed
NOTE: The percentage of repair area should not exceed the
resin just before the new laminate is applied. limitations given in Table 4-3.2-1.
(2) The new laminate should comprise a minimum of
two layers of chopped-strand mat weighing a nominal 450 (b) Areas adjacent to the repair should be protected to
g/m2 (1.5 oz/ft2) and one layer of surfacing veil. prevent damage during the repair operation.
(e) After all required laminate has been applied, cured, (c) Surface Preparation
inspected, and accepted, the area should be lightly sanded (1) A grinder fitted with a 36-grit or coarser disk
to remove sharp projections and to feather edges. should be used to remove all nonconformities from the
(f) The repaired area should be topcoated with surface of the area to be repaired.
paraffin-containing resin.

120
 ASME NM.2-2022

(-a) The ground area should not be gouged out but C-6.4.3 Repair Personnel. Repairs should be made by
tapered uniformly from the root of the nonconformity qualified bonders.
being repaired.
(-b) Only cured laminate should be ground. C-6.4.4 Repair Procedure
(-c) Final grinding should be done with a new disk (a) The area to be repaired should be determined.
to ensure a good surface profile for secondary bonding.
NOTE: The percentage of repair area should not exceed the
(2) The grinding dust should be removed from the
limitations given in Table 4-3.2-1.
ground surface with a clean brush. If secondary bonding is
not started soon after the surface is brushed clean, then (b) Areas adjacent to the repair should be protected to
the cleaning procedure should be repeated just before the prevent damage during the repair operation.
repair laminate is applied. (c) Surface Preparation
(d) Hand lay-up laminate should be applied in the same (1) A grinder fitted with a 36-grit or coarser disk
sequence of construction as that removed in the grinding should be used to remove all nonconformities from the
process and specified by the designer. surface of the area to be repaired.
(1) The ground area should be wetted with catalyzed (-a) The ground area should not be gouged out but
resin just before the new laminate is applied. tapered uniformly to the surface of adjacent unrepaired
(2) The first layer of the laminate should be a laminate.
chopped-strand mat weighing a nominal 450 g/m2 (1.5 (-b) Only cured laminate should be ground.
oz/ft2). (-c) Final grinding should be done with a new disk
(e) After all required laminate has been applied, cured, surface to ensure a good surface profile for secondary
inspected, and accepted, the area should be lightly sanded bonding.
to remove sharp projections and to feather edges. (2) The grinding dust should be removed from the
(f) The repaired area should be topcoated with ground surface with a clean brush. If secondary bonding is
paraffin-containing resin. not started soon after the surface is brushed clean, then
the cleaning procedure should be repeated just before the
C-6.3.6 Acceptance Inspection repair laminate is applied.
(d) Hand lay-up laminate should be applied in the lami-
(a) Structural repairs should meet the requirements of
nate sequence specified in the fabricator’s design draw-
Table 4-3.2-1.
ings and as specified by the designer.
(b) After the paraffin-containing topcoat has cured, the
(1) The ground area should be wetted with catalyzed
Barcol hardness and acetone sensitivity should be
resin just before the new laminate is applied.
checked. Postcuring of the repaired area may be
(2) The first layer of the laminate should be a
performed to achieve the required Barcol hardness.
chopped-strand mat weighing a nominal 450 g/m2 (1.5
C-6.4 Type 4 — Dimensional Nonconformance oz/ft2).
(e) After all required laminate has been applied, cured,
Repairs
inspected, and accepted, the area should be lightly sanded
C-6.4.1 General to remove sharp projections and to feather edges.
(a) Repairs due to dimensional nonconformance (f) The repaired area should be topcoated with
should include underthickness of pipe wall. paraffin-containing resin.
(b) Repairs should be made by adding laminate in the C-6.4.5 Acceptance Inspection
correct sequence specified in the fabricator’s design draw-
ings. (a) The repaired area should meet the requirements of
Table 4-3.2-1.
C-6.4.2 Materials (b) After the paraffin-containing topcoat has cured, the
(a) Repairs should be made with the same types of Barcol hardness and acetone sensitivity should be
resin and reinforcement materials as were used to fabri- checked. Postcuring of the repaired area may be
cate the original piping system component. performed to achieve the required Barcol hardness.
(b) Hand lay-up laminate should be used to repair both
C-6.5 Type 5 — Undercured Laminate Repairs
filament-wound and contact-molded piping system
components. C-6.5.1 General. Undercured laminate causes low
(c) The designer should specify the thickness of the Barcol readings or acetone sensitivity at the surface.
hand lay-up laminate to be added to a filament-wound Repairs include postcuring the affected laminate or re-
piping system component to maintain the original topcoating the surface of the acetone-sensitive laminate.
design strength.
(d) All laminate should be designed in accordance with
Chapter 2.

121
 ASME NM.2-2022

C-6.5.2 Materials. When re-topcoating is the chosen C-6.5.7 Acceptance Inspection. After the paraffin-
repair method, the material used should be the same containing topcoat has cured, the acetone sensitivity
type of paraffin-containing resin as was used on the should be checked. If the repaired area remains
original laminate. acetone sensitive, then it is unacceptable.
C-6.5.3 Repair Personnel. All repairs should be made C-6.6 Type 6 — Repairs Due to Noncomformance
by qualified bonders.
With User’s Dimensional Requirements
C-6.5.4 Repair Procedure to Correct Low Barcol Hard- C-6.6.1 General. User’s dimensional nonconfor-
ness mances that should be repaired include incorrect wall
(a) The laminate giving low Barcol readings should be thickness.
heat postcured in accordance with the resin manufac-
C-6.6.2 Materials
turer’s recommendations for maximum temperature
versus time of cure. The piping system component (a) Repairs to components not in conformance with the
may be placed in a circulating hot air oven for this user’s dimensional requirements should be made with the
purpose. Alternatively, portable hot air blowers or same types of resin and reinforcement materials as were
exhaust steam (no pressure) may be used. used to fabricate the original pipe.
(b) The temperature of the laminate should be moni- (b) The construction of new piping system components
tored during the postcure process to ensure that the or attachments should follow the specifications given in
proper temperature is maintained. the original fabricator’s design drawing and should be in
accordance with Chapter 4.
C-6.5.5 Acceptance Inspection. After postcuring is
(c) All laminates should be designed in accordance with
completed and the laminate has cooled to room tempera-
Chapter 2.
ture, the Barcol readings should be taken again.
(a) Where postcuring does not produce high enough C-6.6.3 Repair Procedure for Attachments and Other
Barcol readings, the laminate should be unacceptable. Nonpenetrating Parts
(b) If the area of the laminate that has low Barcol read-
ings is within the limits of repairability given in (a) Provided the attachment or piping system compo-
Table 4-3.2-1, then it may be repaired using Type 1 or nent part is attached only to the outside structural layer of
Type 2 repair procedures as set forth in paras. C-6.1.1 the piping system component, it may be removed and a
through C-6.2.5. new attachment or part added correctly.
NOTE: The fabrication of the new attachment should be in accor-
C-6.5.6 Repair Procedure to Correct Acetone Sensi- dance with the fabricator’s design drawings.
tivity
(b) The area where the nonconforming attachment or
(a) The exterior of the laminate showing sensitivity to part was removed should be ground smooth and re-
acetone should be lightly sanded to remove sharp projec- topcoated in accordance with para. C-6.5.6.
tions and previously applied paraffin-containing resin and (c) A new attachment may be placed on the piping
to feather edges. system component in accordance with Chapter 5, using
(b) The sanded area should be re-topcoated with the lamination procedure shown in the fabricator’s
paraffin-containing catalyzed resin. design drawings.
(c) If the sanding removes any part of the surfacing veil, (d) If a new attachment does not interfere with the
then an additional ply of surfacing veil should be applied original attachment, then the original attachment
along with the topcoat of paraffin-containing catalyzed should not be removed unless requested by the user.
resin. (e) The repair procedure should be approved by the
(d) Care should be taken during application of the designer.
topcoat to minimize the coverage of adjacent unsanded
areas.

122
 ASME Services

ASME is committed to developing and delivering technical information. At ASME’s Customer Care, we make every effort to answer your
questions and expedite your orders. Our representatives are ready to assist you in the following areas:

ASME Press Member Services & Benefits Public Information

Codes & Standards Other ASME Programs Self-Study Courses
Credit Card Orders Payment Inquiries Shipping Information
IMechE Publications Professional Development Subscriptions/Journals/Magazines
Meetings & Conferences Short Courses Symposia Volumes
Member Dues Status Publications Technical Papers

How can you reach us? It’s easier than ever!

There are four options for making inquiries* or placing orders. Simply mail, phone, fax, or E-mail us and a Customer Care representative will handle
your request.

Mail Call Toll Free Fax—24 hours E-Mail—24 hours

ASME US & Canada: 800-THE-ASME 973-882-1717 [email protected]
150 Clove Road, 6th Floor (800-843-2763) 973-882-5155
Little Falls, New Jersey Mexico: 95-800-THE-ASME
07424-2139 (95-800-843-2763)

*Customer Care staff are not permitted to answer inquiries about the technical content of this code or standard. Information as to whether or not
technical inquiries are issued to this code or standard is shown on the copyright page. All technical inquiries must be submitted in writing to the
staff secretary. Additional procedures for inquiries may be listed within.
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
INSIDE BACK COVER
BACK COVER